Gas Detector1632073 Install Oper Maint

Classification: Confidential
Project Title: Doc Id.: 1632073
CMA CGM 22000 TEU Container Vessel FGSS

Copyright Wärtsilä Gas Solutions Norway AS. All rights reserved. By taking possession of the drawing, the recipient recognizes
and honours these rights. Neither the whole nor any part of this drawing may be used in any way for construction, fabrication,
marketing or any other purpose nor copied in any way nor made accessible to third parties without the prior written consent of
Wärtsilä Gas Solutions Norway AS.
Hull No: H3033, H3034, H3035, H3036, H3037 - SJCS

H1471, H1472,H1473,H1474 - SJCHI
P.O. No.: 4504260347 / 348 / 352 / 391 / 392 / 395 / 398 / 400 / 402
Supplier: Autronica Fire and Security AS
Tag No.:
70-AI-0001, 70-AI-0002, 70-AI-0003, 70-AI-0004, 70-AI-0005, 70-AI-0006
01 03.12.2019 Issued after variation order SSV RBA RE

00 22.1.2019 Issued for approval RBA SSV SSV
Made Checked Approved
Rev Revision Date Reason for Issue
by by by
WGS Customer: Project No.:
Shanghai Jiangnan Changxing Shipbuilding Co.Ltd &
Shanghai Jiangnan Changxing Heavy Industry Co.Ltd
SP/03535-03543
Document Title:
INSTALLATION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Wärtsilä Gas Solutions

Classification: Confidential
Amendments Log:
Rev Changes
01 Added Optima + infrared sensor
Wärtsilä Gas Solutions

Cable Specifications – AutroSafe and Autroprime
Definitions
Example Local Frame Earth The electrical connection to the framework at the described physical
position, such as the frame or chassis of a cabinet, the power cable
outlet etc.
Shield Generic notation of an electric barrier that attenuates an RF field.
Shield could be realised as a metallic encapsulation around an
electronic device (shielded cabinet) or around a cable (Shielded cable).
Dual Shield The shield contains two levels of barriers that must be electrically
isolated. Each shield may consist of multiple layers, like foil + braid or
braid+braid. The shield can be physically realised as; Foil, Mesh, Braid,
Armour (defined below).
Foil A shield made of a metallic film or sheet that is 100% proof. In general
100 MHz and above as it requires a quite thin foil to enable flexibility. It
will not be the best option for low frequency communication lines
(below 10MHz). Note that if the foil type of shield is used, it is required
that there is a wire available for termination of this shield (Pig tail).
Mesh A shield made of knitted wires to improve the coverage of the shield,
compared to braid. This type of shield is rarely used.
Braid A shield made of weaved wires. This is the most common method for
shielded cables, it makes the best price / performance. A double layer
of braid is often used to increase the attenuation, this is especially
effective at cable lengths above 0,03 of the frequency wavelength,
which is 70 m at 133kHz (PowerLoop).
Armour A mechanical protection of the cable, normally a rigid braid inside the
outer isolation. If the armour supports proper electrical conductance
and shield coverage, this may be used as one of the required shields
(PE).
Instrument Earth (IE) An earth reference that is normally used to reference measurements of
electrical signals.
Protective Earth (PE) An earth reference that is normally used as a coupling path for
unwanted electrical signals, like transients and over-voltage. The
chassis or framework of the installation is normally considered to be
the local Protective Earth. As the name implies, it is intended to provide
a safe electrical potential for human safety.
Ground Synonym for Earth.
PowerLoop Cabling - Guidance Table
Type of shield (Dual) Characteristics Usability for PowerLoop

Foil + braid Tradeoff to make good attenuation at both high Most commonly used alternative. Recommended to
and low frequencies. avoid long parallel paths. Contact Autronica for
advice.
Foil + foil Optimised for high frequency. Not suitable to Powerloop. If foil is a thin metal film
this cable shall not be used. One of the foils has to be
at least 0,3mm thick copper to be acceptable at the
low frequencies. (Aluminium foil has to be 0,5 mm).
Braid+braid Improved attenuation in low/mid frequency Well suited.
range (compared to single braid shield).
Foil/braid +braid or The extra foil in one (or both) of the shield Well suited, especially for long parallel Powerloop
Foil/braid + foil/braid layers improves attenuation both at high and cable runs.
low frequencies.
Note. If foil is used for shield, the foil shall contain a separate wire in contact with this one, to be used as a pig tail for shield termination.
Armour shall be made of a copper braid (or mesh) to ensure high conductivity. Armour shielding coverage shall be optically covering
2 more than 60%, and conductance similar to the internal wire pair. Armour with less than 60% coverage shall include another shield
Conversion table American Wire Gauge (AWG) to mm / mm layer to contain two layers of foil/braid or braid/braid to ensure proper low frequency shielding. A PowerLoop cable shall be contained in
a dual shielded cable, i.e. multiple pair cable shall not contain two or more power loop cables. It is acceptable to arrange tour / retur of
AWG No Diam. mm Area mm2 the same power loop cable within one such cable (two wire pairs), this requires each pair to be individually shielded. The intention is to
This document specifies the cabling for Autronica’s interactive fire keep the dual shield barrier between two adjacent powerloop cables.
8 3,260 8,350 detection systems, and integrated fire and gas detection systems.
9 2,910 6,620
10 2,590 5,270 With respect to absolute requirements, the term “shall” is used consistently. The term
12 2,050 3,310 “recommended” is used when different parameters or various considerations determine the best
13 1,830 2,630 alternative solution. Measures referring to cable type, dimensions and lengths in the table on the
15 1,450 1,650 back side of this document are given in metric units. For information on cable dimensions in
17 1,150 1,040 American Wire Gauge (AWG), refer to the table above (Conversion table AWG to mm/mm2).
18 1,024 0,8230
24 0,511 0,2050
116-P-ASIFGCABLESPEC/CGB Rev. D, 2015-04-09 | Autronica Fire and Security AS | Tel.: +47 73 58 25 00 | E-mail: info@autronicafire.no | www.autronicafire.com | Page 1(3)
Cabling
Detection Loop Max cable Cable length (m) Cable length (m) Cable length (m) Cable length (m) Cable length (m)
Al_Com Fire Maximum
current setting resistance for for for for for
Detection Loops capacitance (µF)
(mA) (Ω) AWG 20 (0,5mm²) AWG 18 (0,75mm²) AWG 17 (1,0mm²) AWG 15 (1,5mm²) AWG 13 (2,5mm²)
Autroprime 100 105 0,5 1500 2250 3000 4500 7500
Low Current 150 58 0,5 829 1243 1657 2486 4143
Detectors and 200 35 0,5 500 750 1000 1500 2500
I/O Units 250 21 0,5 300 450 600 900 1500
Cabling
Detection Loop Max cable Maximum Cable length (m) Cable length (m) Cable length (m) Cable length (m) Cable length (m)
Al_Com Fire current setting resistance capacitance for for for for for
Detection Loops (mA) (Ω) (µF) AWG 20 (0,5mm²) AWG 18 (0,75mm²) AWG 17 (1,0mm²) AWG 15 (1,5mm²) AWG 13 (2,5mm²)
Autroprime 100 112 0,5 1600 2400 3200 4800 8000
High Current 150 78 0,5 1114 1671 2229 3343 5571
Detectors and 200 55 0,5 786 1179 1571 2357 3929
I/O Units 250 40 0,5 571 857 1143 1714 2857
300 30 0,5 429 643 857 1286 2143
350 23 0,5 329 493 657 986 1643
400 18 0,5 257 386 514 771 1286
Cabling
Max cable Maximum Cable length (m) Cable length (m) Cable length (m) Cable length (m) Cable length (m)
Al_Com Fire Loop Driver
resistance capacitance for for for for for
Detection Loops Module
(Ω) (µF) AWG 20 (0,5mm²) AWG 18 (0,75mm²) AWG 17 (1.0mm²) AWG 15 (1,5mm²) AWG 13 (2,5mm²)
AutroSafe Standard loop driver
module 50 0,5 650 1000 1300 2000 3300
BSD-310
High-power version
BSD-311 (High- 20 0,5 250 400 500 800 1300
current)
2
In Integrated Fire & Gas Detection Systems, shielded cable is recommended. Cable dimension CSA 1.0mm
Cabling Cable type / category Cable dimension Maximum cable length (m) Maximum resistance (Ω) / capacitance (F)
PowerLoop Dual shielded cable, twisted pair cables The Power Loop 1000m. The Power Loop Calculator Tool shall be used to determine the permissible cable length. Dual Maximum loop resistance depends on load.
shall be used Calculator Tool shall shielded cable shall be used.
be used to determine The Power Loop Calculator Tool shall be used to determine the
the cable dimension. Long parallel PowerLoop cable runs may introduce cross-talk between PowerLoops, thus it is maximum resistance.
2
Typically CSA 2,5mm recommended to avoid such long parallel runs. The permissible length of parallel PowerLoop cable runs
will depend on the quality of the cable shield. Segregation of parallel PowerLoop cable runs by 30cm (1
feet) will increase permissible parallel length significantly. Contact Autronica for design-advice for
applications with long parallel Powerloop cable runs.
AutroFieldBus Twisted-pair cables. Short length cables (< 600m): Characteristic impedance 100 Ω +/- 15%.
(AFB) Category 4, 5 or 6 The cable length is limited to 600m. Capacitance per 1000m shall be less than 200nF. Attenuation @100KHz, Max. 9 dB over full cable segments (or
between boosters).
Shielded cable required. Medium length cables (< 1000m):
Shielded by foil or braid. The AutroFieldBus cable length is limited to 1000m. Capacitance per 1000m shall be less than 100nF. Attenuation is defined by the wire to wire capacitance mostly, as long
2
as the wire is at least 0.5mm . The total attenuation of the cable
Cable length > 1000m: length shall not exceed 9 dB. If attenuation is not specified, normally
Boosters shall be used if the AutroFieldBus cable is more than 1km in length. Boosters shall be evenly the capacitance is defined. The capacitance shall not exceed the
spread round the AFB ring. NOTE: The maximum length for a total ring with Boosters is 2,8km (see also specified value in order to achieve the total communication length.
rightmost column).
All cable over full cable segment (or between boosters) shall be of
The booster can also be used in cases when different cable types (AFB cables) are used in a distributed same type and have equal specifications.
system (see also rightmost column).
Cabling Cable type / category Cable dimension Maximum cable length (m)
Ethernet –TCP/IP CAT 5 or 6, shielded or unshielded. Maximum 100m
(AutroNet) Single-mode or multi-mode optic fibre Maximum fibre length is determined by the transmission budget calculated from specifications of fiber cable, equipment, loss by fibre cable joints and connectors.
AutroCom Serial Multi-wired cable Maximum 10m
RS-232
AutroCom Serial CAT 4, 5 or 6. Maximum cable length 1000m - depending on the cable quality and baud rate.
VDR, ESPA, Modbus The transceiver is referenced to Earth in the AutroSafe panel. The transceiver at the other end shall be terminated and referenced to ensure low common mode voltage. For cable
connections out of the AutroSafe installation cabinet or earth reference (or where common mode voltage noise is expected) a galvanic isolation shall be introduced in the
RS-422/RS-485 communication path.
Power Supply / Cable dimension

Cabling according to system
load and project spec.
Applies to AutroSafe
only:
Multifunction Serial Ribbon cable XGE-1/20-40 Maximum 1,2m
Port Connection (standard is 40 cm)
between BSA-400 and
main terminal block L1
AL_Com+ connection Ribbon cable XGE-1/10-50 Maximum 3m
between BSA-400 and (standard is 50 cm)
BSL-310
Ferrit clamp part no. 116-6175-100.0010
must be applied.
1 ferrit clamp on standard BS-420/BC-420.
2 ferrit clamps, one inserted at each end
of the cable if the front and cabinet is
separated .
Instructions
Infrared Hydrocarbon Gas Detector
AutroPoint HC300PL
Instructions AutroPoint HC300PL, 116-P-HC300PL/IGB, rev. B, 2016-04-21, Autronica Fire and Security AS
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
COPYRIGHT ©
This publication, or parts thereof,
may not be reproduced in any form,
by any method, for any purpose.
Autronica Fire and Security AS and

its subsidiaries assume no responsi-
bility for any errors that may appear
in the publication, or for damages
arising from the information in it.
No information in this publication
should be regarded as a warranty
made by Autronica Fire and Security.
The information in this publication
may be updated without notice.
Product names mentioned in this

publication may be trademarks.
They are used only for identification.
Table of Contents
APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Routine inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Data logging capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Weather baffle cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Optics cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
O-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
AutroPoint termination box (PIRTB) . . . . . . 4
Protective caps and covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES . . . . 5
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . 20
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Identification of flammable vapor(s) to be
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN . 21
detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . 21
Identification of detector mounting locations . 6 AutroPoint HC300PL detector . . . . . . . . . 21
Physical installation requirements . . . . . . . 6 Calibration equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Wiring cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Power wiring size and maximum length . . . 7
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Junction box entries, plugs, & fittings . . . . . 8
FM approval description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Wiring procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Remote calibration wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
CSA approval description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Internal magnetic switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 APPENDIX C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Hart communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ATEX approval description . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Multicolor led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 APPENDIX D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Weather baffle assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 IECEx approval description . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
History logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 APPENDIX E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Remote calibration option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Other approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Special applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 SIL approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DNV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 MED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 INMETRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 NEPSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 APPENDIX F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
HC300PL startup/commissioning checklists 15 Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 APPENDIX G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 HART communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Additional calibration notes . . . . . . . . . . . 16 APPENDIX H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Calibration initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Time out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
APPENDIX I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Calibration abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Control drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
INSTRUCTIONS
Infrared Hydrocarbon Gas Detector

AutroPoint HC300PL
IMPORTANT APPLICATION
Be sure to read and understand the
entire instruction manual before installing The AutroPoint HC300PL is a diffusion-
or operating the gas detection system. based, point-type infrared gas detector that
This product is intended to provide early provides continuous monitoring of combustible
warning of the presence of a flammable hydrocarbon gas concentrations in the range of
or explosive gas mixture. Proper device 0 to 100% LFL.
installation, operation, and maintenance
is required to ensure safe and effective All units are powered from the PowerLoop, and
operation. If this equipment is used in a are furnished with an onboard “status indication”
manner not specified in this manual, safety LED, an internal magnetic calibration switch and
protection may be impaired. an external calibration line for use with the optional
PIRTB remote calibration termination box.
The AutroPoint HC300PL is ideal for use in harsh

outdoor environments and is certified for use in
Class I, Division 1, and Zone 1 hazardous areas.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 1
OPERATION OVERVIEW SPECIFICATIONS
THEORY OF OPERATION
INPUT VOLTAGE (All Models)—
Flammable hydrocarbon gases diffuse through Operating range is 20 to 30V DC supplied by the
the weather baffle assembly into the internal PowerLoop
measurement chamber, which is illuminated
by an infrared (IR) source. As the IR passes POWER CONSUMPTION (All Models)—
through the gas within the chamber, certain IR 4.0 watts nominal @ 24 VDC
wavelengths are absorbed by the gas, while 7.5 watts peak @ 24 VDC
other IR wavelengths are not. The amount of IR 10 watts peak @ 32 VDC.
absorption is determined by the concentration
TEMPERATURE RANGE—
of the hydrocarbon gas. A pair of optical
Operating: –55°C to +75°C (–67°F to +167°F).
detectors and associated electronics measure
Storage: –55°C to +85°C (–67°F to +185°F).
the absorption. The change in intensity of the
absorbed light (active signal) is measured HUMIDITY—
relative to the intensity of light at a non-absorbed 0 to 99% relative humidity (Autronica verified).
wavelength (reference signal). See Figure 1. The 5 to 95% relative humidity (FM/CSA/DEMKO
microprocessor computes the gas concentration verified).
and converts the value into an analogue value
that can be displayed on the control panel. GAS DETECTION RANGE—
0 to 100% LFL standard. Other ranges are
DETECTABLE GASES configurable (down to 20% full scale).
HC300PL is capable of detecting many
hydrocarbon gases and vapors. Refer to the DETECTABLE GASES—
“Specifications” section of this manual for details. HC300PL is provided with field-selectable settings
for linear measurement of methane, propane,
ethylene, and butane. HC300PL is performance
DATA LOGGING CAPABILITY certified for detection of methane, propane,
Non-volatile memory is provided to save the ethylene, and butane, and is shipped from the
10 most recent calibrations, alarm/fault events, factory calibrated and set for the customer’s choice
and minimum/maximum operating temperature of one of these gases. Digital communication (such
history. An hour meter (running operational hours as HART) is required to confirm the current setting
since startup) is provided to record operating and change it if required. In addition to the gases
service time and to give an indication of the listed above, the HC300PL is capable of detecting
relative time between events. This information is many other hydrocarbon gases and vapors, with
accessible using HART communication. settings provided for gases such as ethane and
propylene. For detection of gases other than the
four certified gases, performance characteristics
PERMEABLE
/ transfer curves are available. Please consult the
IR SOURCE
GAS CELL factory for details.
OPTICAL
BEAM SPLITTER
DETECTOR CONFIGURATION OPTIONS—
MEASUREMENT A significant number of HC300PL configuration
SIGNAL DETECTOR
parameters are field programmable including gas
type, measurement range, alarm setpoints, tag
number, special notations, password protection, etc.
Details are provided in the HART Communication
SAPPHIRE
Appendix.
OPTICAL
MIRROR FILTERS
SIGNAL PROCESSING
IR TRANSPARENT ELECTRONICS
WINDOW
GAS
REFERENCE CONCENTRATION
SIGNAL DETECTOR (LEL)
Figure 1 — Measurement Scheme for Infrared

Gas Detector
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 2
WARM-UP TIME (All Models)— VIBRATION—
Device enters normal mode after two minutes HC300PL successfully passes Sinusoidal
upon cold power-up. One hour warm-up time is Vibration Testing in accordance with MIL-STD-
recommended for optimum performance. Signal 810C, Method 514.2, Paragraph 4.5.1.3, Figure
output level during warm‑up is programmable. 514.2-7 Curve AW, and C22.2 No. 152-M1984,
and also DET NORSKE VERITAS Certification
VISUAL STATUS INDICATOR (All Models)— Notes – No. 2.4 dated April 2001.
Tri-color LED:
Red = Low alarm, high alarm, or calibration. ACCURACY—
See Table 1 for Details. ±3% LFL from 0 to 50% LFL, ±5% LFL from 51
Green = Power on / OK to 100% LFL (at room ambient temperature,
Yellow = Fault or warm-up. +23°C).
ALARM SETPOINT RANGE— SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST—

Low Alarm: 5 to 60% LEL Fail-Safe operation ensured by performing all
High Alarm: 5 to 60% LEL. critical tests once per second.
Alarm setpoint is programmable from AutroSafe

INGRESS PROTECTION—
panel or config.
IP66/IP67 (DEMKO Verified).
NB! Setpoint set by HART will be overridden by
DETECTOR HOUSING MATERIAL—
AutroSafe!
316 stainless steel (CF8M).
CALIBRATION—
CONDUIT ENTRY OPTIONS—
All units are factory set and calibrated to the
Two entries, 3/4 inch NPT or 25 mm.
customer’s choice of methane, propane, ethylene,
or butane.
HART COMMUNICATION PORT (optional)—
Intrinsically safe. For live maintenance, follow
Field programming and full calibration are
Control Drawing 007283-001 in Appendix J.
typically required for detection of vapors other
than the factory-calibrated gas. Refer to the
OPTICS PROTECTION—
“Calibration” section of this manual for details.
The three-layer weather baffle assembly is UV-
resistant, static-dissipating black Polythalimide
Routine calibration of the HC300PL after
plastic. The standard weather baffle version,
completion of initial commissioning is supported,
recommended for most outdoor and indoor
but not absolutely required. Generally, an annual
applications, includes an internal hydrophobic
gas bump test or full calibration will ensure proper
filter. The standard weather baffle includes a
sensitivity and response.
3/16” (4.8mm) barb fitting for attaching a 3/16”
I.D. hose during calibration.
NOTE
Frequent visual inspections of the HC300PL
Two replacement weather baffles with special
are recommended to confirm that there
calibration gas openings are available:
are no external impediments to proper
• With the barb fitting removed, the standard
detection capability.
weather baffle has a 1/16” internally threaded
calibration gas opening that allows the user
Three methods of initiating Calibration are
to install a threaded compression fitting (not
supported:
supplied) into the baffle for use with plastic
• On-Board magnetic reed switch
or metal tubing (116-007529-xxx Direct Duct
• HART communication compatible)
• Remote calibration line for remote switch • 7/16-20 externally threaded calibration gas
opening for use with the HC300PL sample
RESPONSE TIME— draw cup assembly (116-007378-001).
Refer to the appropriate appendix for details.
Heated optics minimize condensation to ensure
reliable operation through temperature extremes.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 3
WIRING— AUTROPOINT TERMINATION BOX (PIRTB)
Field wiring screw terminals are UL/CSA rated for
INPUT VOLTAGE—
up to 14 AWG wire, and are DIN/VDE rated for 2.5
24 VDC nominal. Operating range is 18 to 30
mm2 wire. Screw terminal required torque range
VDC.
is 3.5–4.4 in.-lbs. (0.4-0.5 N·m).
POWER CONSUMPTION (Watts)—
CERTIFICATION—
0.5 Watts Maximum
Refer to the appropriate appendix for specific
information.
CONDUIT ENTRY OPTIONS—
3/4 inch NPT or 25 mm.
DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 2.
SHIPPING WEIGHT (PIRTB)—
SHIPPING WEIGHT (Approximate)— Aluminum Tall Box: 2.2 lbs (1.0 kg)
10.5 pounds (4.8 kg). Aluminum Short Box: 2.0 lbs (0.95 kg)
Stainless Steel Tall Box: 9.5 lbs (4.3 kg)
WARRANTY—
Five year limited warranty from date of Stainless Steel Short Box: 9.0 lbs (4.1 kg).
manufacture. See Appendix I for details.
DIMENSIONS—
See Figure 3 for dimensions of the PIRTB.
TERMINALS—
PIRTB terminals UL/CSA rated for 14 to 22 AWG
wire; terminals DIN/VDE rated for 2.5 mm2 wire.
5.2 4.5
(13.2) (11.4)
9.3
(23.6)
4.6
(11.7)
3/16” (4.8mm) BARB FITTING

D2055 (STANDARD WEATHER BAFFLE)
Figure 2 — Dimensions of HC300PL Detector in

Inches (Centimeters)
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 4
5.86
(14.9)
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES
5.2
(13.2)
2.7 CAUTION
(6.9)
The wiring procedures in this manual are
intended to ensure proper functioning of the
device under normal conditions. However,
because of the many variations in wiring
4.7 codes and regulations, total compliance to
(11.9)
these ordinances cannot be guaranteed.
3.46
(8.8) Be certain that all wiring complies with
the NEC as well as all local ordinances.
If in doubt, consult the authority having
jurisdiction before wiring the system.
Installation must be done by a properly
trained person.
CAUTION
This product has been tested and approved
for use in hazardous areas. However, it
must be properly installed and used only
under the conditions specified within
6.57 this manual and the specific approval
(16.7)
certificates. Any device modification,
improper installation, or use in a faulty
or incomplete configuration will render
warranty and product certifications invalid.
1.28
(3.3)
CAUTION
A2307 The detector contains no user serviceable
components. Service or repair should
5.86 never be attempted by the user. Device
(14.9)
5.2
repair should be performed only by the
(13.2) manufacturer or trained service personnel.
2.7
(6.9)
LIABILITIES
The manufacturer’s warranty for this
product is void, and all liability for proper
function of the detector is irrevocably
4.7
(11.9)
transferred to the owner or operator in the
3.46
event that the device is serviced or repaired
(8.8) by personnel not employed or authorized
by the manufacturer, or if the device is used
in a manner not conforming to its intended
use.
CAUTION
O b s e r v e p re ca u t i o n s fo r h a n d l i n g
electrostatic sensitive devices.
3.77 NOTE
(9.6)
The AutroPoint HC300PL is intended for
detection of hydrocarbon vapors only. The
1.28
(3.3) device will not detect hydrogen gas.
C2281
Figure 3 — PIRTB Dimensions in Inches (cm)
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 5
INSTALLATION NOTE
For additional information on determining
Before installing the AutroPoint HC300PL, define
the following application details: the quantit y and placement of gas
detectors in a specific application, refer to
IDENTIFICATION OF FLAMMABLE the article titled “The Use of Combustible
VAPOR(S) TO BE DETECTED Detectors in Protecting Facilities from
It is necessary to always identify the flammable Flammable Hazards” contained in the
vapor(s) of interest at the job site in order to Instrumentation, Systems and Automation
determine the proper calibration gas setting for Society (ISA) Transaction, Volume 20,
AutroPoint HC300PL. In addition, the fire hazard Number 2.
properties of the vapor, such as vapor density,
flashpoint, and vapor pressure should be identified PHYSICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
and used to assist in selecting the optimum
detector mounting location within the area. AutroPoint HC300PL is provided with built-in
mounting feet that will accept 3/8 inch (M8)
IDENTIFICATION OF DETECTOR MOUNTING diameter mounting bolts. Always ensure that
LOCATIONS the mounting surface is vibration-free and can
Identification of the most likely leak sources suitably support the total weight of the AutroPoint
and leak accumulation areas is typically the first HC300PL without assistance from electrical
step in identifying the best detector mounting cabling or conduit system.
locations. In addition, identification of air
current / wind patterns within the protected The detector must be installed per local
area is useful in predicting gas leak dispersion installation practices. For IEC/ATEX hazardous
behavior. This information should be used to
areas, the detector and wired accessories must
identify optimum sensor installation points.
be installed per IEC/EN 60079-14, and it may be
If the vapor of interest is lighter than air, place acceptable to use Ex eb wiring practices with the
the sensor above the potential gas leak. Place HC300PL.
the sensor close to the floor for gases that are
heavier than air. For heavy vapors, typically Device Mounting Orientation
locate AutroPoint HC300PL at 2-4 cm above
grade elevation. Note that air currents may It is highly recommended that the HC300PL
cause a gas that is slightly heavier than air to be installed in the horizontal position. The
rise under some conditions. Heated gases may detector is not position-sensitive in terms of its
also exhibit the same phenomenon. ability to detect gas. However, the weather baffle
assembly provides superior performance when
The most effective number and placement of the HC300PL is installed with the baffle in a
detectors varies depending on the conditions horizontal position.
at the job site. The individual designing the
installation must often rely on experience and LED Visibility
common sense to determine the detector
quantity and best locations to adequately Select a mounting orientation where the
protect the area. Note that it is typically AutroPoint HC300PL status indication LED is
advantageous to locate detectors where they visible to personnel within the area.
are accessible for maintenance, and also
where the HC300PL status indication LED can
easily be seen. Locations near excessive heat /
vibration sources should be avoided if possible.
Final suitability of possible gas detector

locations should be verified by a job site survey.
Gas detector area of coverage is a subjective
evaluation, and may require long-term empirical
data to confirm effectiveness. A typical rule of
thumb is that one detector can cover a 900
square foot area.
CORRECT INCORRECT
However, this rule of thumb is subject to change
depending upon specific application properties Figure 4 — Recommended Orientation of
and requirements. HC300PL Detector
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 6
Calibration Gas Port Cover POWER WIRING SIZE AND MAXIMUM LENGTH
A protective cover for the calibration gas injection PowerLoop Calculator Tool must be used to
port is provided to ensure that contaminants are determine the cable dimensions and the maximum
not accidentally introduced into the HC300PL number of detectors connected to one loop. Refer
optics. Ensure that this cover is properly installed to the IFG manual for further information.
over the port when calibration is not being
performed.
NOTE
Failure to install the calibration gas port
cover or the use of a damaged cover
may result in nuisance faults and require
cleaning the detector optics.
CONNECTIONS EARTH GND LUG
Power Loop
In Out
A2084
+ – + – Figure 6 — Terminal Strip Located Inside Wiring

2 1 13 12 Compartment
Calibration Signal JUNCTION BOX ENTRIES, PLUGS, & FITTINGS

AutroPoint HC300 PL 3
WARNING
Shielded cable is required for the
PowerLoop, the shielding should be All entries must contain appropriately rated
continued.
plugs or fittings. It is required that each
plug or fitting be wrench-tightened to an
Figure 5 — Connections appropriate installation torque and meet the
minimum thread engagement requirements
WIRING CABLE REQUIREMENTS per the applicable local standards, codes,
Always use proper cabling type and diameter and practices in order to retain the defined
for input power as well as output signal wiring. ratings. PTFE sealant or equivalent should
14 to 18 AWG shielded stranded copper wire is be used on NPT threads.
recommended.
WIRING PROCEDURE
NOTE
The use of shielded cable in conduit or Ensure that all cables are terminated properly.
shielded armoured cable is required. AutroPoint HC300PL screw terminal torque range
In applications where the wiring is is 3.5–4.4 in.-lbs. (0.4–0.5 N·m).
installed in conduit, dedicated conduit is
recommended. Avoid low frequency, high Conductor insulation should be stripped off
voltage, and non-signalling conductors to with a bare conductor length of 0.2 inch (5 mm)
prevent nuisance EMI problems minimum and 0.35 inch (9 mm) maximum.
CAUTION Cable shield, if used, should be properly

The use of proper conduit installation terminated. If not terminated, clip the shield wire
techniques, breathers, glands, and seals is off short and insulate it within the detector housing
required to prevent water ingress and/or to prevent the shield wire from accidentally
maintain the explosion-proof rating. contacting the detector housing or any other wire.
NOTE
The HC300PL housing must be electrically
connected to earth ground. A dedicated earth
ground lug is provided for this purpose.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 7
REMOTE CALIBRATION WIRING
CALIBRATE SWITCH
If it is desired to initiate calibration remotely, the HOLD CALIBRATION MAGNET
use of the Autronica Model PIRTB Termination AT OUTSIDE BASE OF JUNCTION
BOX AT THIS LOCATION
REMOTE LED
Box is highly recommended for optimum ease TO ACTIVATE CALIBRATION SWITCH
of installation and calibration. The PIRTB module

includes a magnetic reed switch, indicating LED
or display, and wiring terminal block. Refer to
“Remote Calibration Option” in the “Description”
section of this manual for details.
Figure 7 shows the location of the wiring terminals,

reed switch, and LED inside the calibration
termination box. See Figure 8 for wiring details.
WARNING
Do not attempt to physically connect or
touch the calibration lead wire to DCV
common in the field to begin calibration. B2056
This practice is often less than precise, and

may result in a spark or other undesirable Figure 7 — Remote Calibration Switch and LED
results. For optimum ease of installation in Optional Autronica PIRTB Termination Box
and calibration, always use an Autronica
junction box with magnetic reed-switch,
indicating LED, and termination block
(Model PIRTB).
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 8
POWERLOOP IN
SUITABLE FOR 20ºC ABOVE MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
FOR AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ABOVE 60ºC, USE FIELD WIRING
1
-
PowerLoop in
+
2
MAGNETIC REED SWITCH
CAL FOR REMOTE CALIBRATION
3
CALIBRATION
4
-
SPARE
+
5
TERMINAL BLOCK
CAL CAL
NC
6
SIGNAL SIGNAL TYPICALLY

NO CONNECTION
140mm
24 VDC – 24 VDC –
NC
7
DO NOT CONNECT
24 VDC + 24 VDC +
NC
8
A2057R
NC
9
NC
10
NC
11
POWERLOOP OUT
12
-
13
+
Figure 10—Remote Calibration Module Wired to AutroPoint HC300 PL

Figure 8 — Remote Calibration Module Wired to AutroPoint HC300PL
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 9
DESCRIPTION Connect the HART Communicator, then turn it on
by pressing the ON/OFF key. The communicator
INTERNAL MAGNETIC SWITCH will indicate when the connection is made. If
An internal magnetic switch is provided for the connection is not made, the communicator
resetting latched alarms and initiating calibration. will indicate that no device was found. Refer to
See Figure 9 for switch location. Momentary the HART Appendix in this manual for complete
switch activation will reset alarms, while holding information.
the switch closed for two seconds or longer will
start the calibration sequence. The switch can WARNING
also be used to enter “live” calibration mode For Division applications, do not open cover
or terminate the calibration sequence (see when explosive gas atmosphere may be
“Calibration” section). present.
HART COMMUNICATION Refer to Appendix G in this manual for complete

information regarding HART communication with
A HART communication port is provided for
HC300PL.
connecting the HART Communicator to the
AutroPoint HC300PL. Refer to Figure 9.
I.S. HART PORT NOT PROVIDED ON THIS MODEL
CAUTION
The detector must be disabled via
t h e A u t ro S a fe p a n e l d u r i n g H A RT
Communications. Any alarm set points
set by the HART Communicator will be
overwritten by the AutoSafe panel.
MULTICOLOR LED
HART COMMUNICATION PORT

(COVER INSTALLED) HART COMMUNICATOR CONNECTED
TO I.S. HART PORT
PLACE CALIBRATION MAGNET

HERE TO ACTIVATE INTERNAL
REED SWITCH
EARTH GND LUG
WEATHER BAFFLE
CALIBRATION MAGNET
A2490
C2058 CALIBRATION NOZZLE

Figure 10 — HC300PL Models with and without IS
Figure 9 — AutroPoint HC300PL HART Port
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 10
Table 1 — LED Status Indication CLOCK
LED Device Status An hour meter is provided to give a relative
indication of time for historical logs. The meter
Green Normal operation.
is zeroed at the time of manufacture and only
Red Blinking indicates Low Alarm. increments while power is applied. HART
On steady indicates High Alarm. communication is required to view the running
Yellow Fault condition or warm-up. hours.
HISTORY LOGS
All history logs are saved in non-volatile memory
MULTICOLOR LED
and retained through power cycles. HART
An onboard multi-color LED is provided for communication is required to view the history
indicating faults, alarms, and calibration status. logs.
See Table 1. LED operation for fault status is non-
latching. LED operation for alarms is configurable Event Log (Alarms and Faults)
for latching/non-latching.
An event log saves the 10 most recent alarms and
a selected group of faults with an hour meter time
WEATHER BAFFLE ASSEMBLY
stamp. HART communication is required to view
The black weather baffle is provided to prevent the log. Types of logged events include:
debris and water from entering the optics, while • Low Alarms
allowing gases and vapors to enter readily. An • High Alarms
O-ring is provided on the main HC300PL body to
• Optics Fault
ensure a proper seal with the weather baffle. Two
weather baffle configurations are available — one • Warm-up
with an internal hydrophobic filter and one without • Calibration Fault
the internal hydrophobic filter.
Calibration Log
The weather baffle version with hydrophobic
filter is recommended for most outdoor and A log of the 10 most recent calibrations with time
indoor applications, especially wet and/or dirty stamp is saved. HART communication is required
applications. When compared to the weather to view the log. Types of calibration records
baffle version without the hydrophobic filter, it include:
provides optimum protection against airborne • Zero Only Calibration
water and dirt, with minimal reduction in speed of • Complete Calibration
gas alarm response. • Failed Calibration
The weather baffle assembly is not field-

Min/Max Temperature History
serviceable, but is easily replaceable. To remove
the plastic weather baffle from the HC300PL Ambient minimum and maximum exposed
body, rotate it one quarter turn counter-clockwise temperature measurements are stored in non-
and pull. volatile memory and are accessible via HART
communication. The measurements are time
The weather baffle is furnished with a calibration tagged with respect to total hours of powered
gas nozzle for direct injection of gas to the sensor, operation. The temperature log may be reset, in
allowing the operator to apply gas to the detector which case all min/max exposed temperature
without going through the weather baffle. logs are cleared.
NOTE
Always cover the calibration gas nozzle
with the cap during normal operation, and
ensure that the cap is not damaged.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 11
REMOTE CALIBRATION OPTION 4. Always purge the permanent tubing with
clean, dry compressed air prior to and
In most applications, it is recommended to install
immediately after calibration to ensure that
the AutroPoint HC300PL where it will contact
residual combustible gases are cleared.
the vapor of interest as quickly as possible.
Always close the shutoff valve after post-
Unfortunately, the best location for early warning
calibration purging is complete. This will
can often result in accessibility problems for the
ensure that all hydrocarbon vapors are
operator when calibration is required. In these
eliminated from the HC300PL optics.
applications, the Model PIRTB Termination Box
is highly recommended to provide the ability to 5. Note that permanently installed calibration
calibrate the AutroPoint HC300PL from a remote gas tubing will increase the calibration
location. gas consumption rate as a function of total
tubing length.
The PIRTB consists of a termination/circuit board,
housed within an explosion-proof junction box. Other methods of remote HC300PL calibration
The circuit board contains a magnetic reed include utilizing HART communications. Refer to
switch for initiating calibration, an indicating the HART appendix for details.
LED to signal the operator when to apply and
remove the calibration gas, and a wiring terminal NOTE
block. The junction box cover is furnished with The detector must be disabled via the
a small viewing window that enables calibration AutroSafe panel during calibration.
to be performed without hazardous area de- The detector must be re-enabled via the
classification. The PIRTB may be installed up to AutoSafe panel after calibration.
100 feet away from the HC300PL. Refer to Figure
24 for remote calibration configuration options.
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
NOTE The standard AutroPoint HC300PL is intended
The remote calibration switch is intended for open area combustible gas detection
for initiating calibration only. Resetting applications, however special detector
latching alarm outputs using the remote configurations are available for applications such
calibration switch cannot be accomplished as duct-mounting and sample extraction. Contact
without entering the Calibration mode. Autronica Fire and Security for information on
these special device configurations.
The following recommendations are provided
to enhance operator ease and convenience of
remote calibration configurations:
1. Install the HC300PL in such a manner

that the onboard LED is visible whenever
possible. This will aid in checking device
status “at a glance.”
2. The HC300PL is provided with a calibration
gas nozzle on the weather baffle, which
allows the use of permanently attached
calibration gas delivery tubing (either
polyethylene or stainless steel). The
tubing is typically routed in parallel with
the remote calibration cabling to the same
location as the PIRTB termination box. This
arrangement enables a technician to initiate
calibration and deliver the calibration gas to
the HC300PL from a single location.
3. When permanently installed calibration gas
tubing is utilized, always install a shut-off
valve at the open end to prevent unwanted
vapors or debris from entering the tubing.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 12
HAZARDOUS LOCATION NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
HART
* COMMUNICATOR
HC300 PL
PIRTB
24 VDC, CAL
PowerLoop In
CAL GAS
*CENELEC APPROVED APPLICATION ONLY, OR

DE-CLASSIFIED DIVISION APPLICATIONS
Figure 11 — Remote Calibration Configuration Options
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 13
OPERATION Table 2 — Calibration or Response Test
FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS Function Calibration Response
Test
The AutroPoint HC300PL is shipped from the
factory pre-calibrated and set for the customer’s Startup X
choice of 0-100% LFL methane, propane, Gas selection changed X
ethylene, or butane. Detection of gases other Non-standard gas X
than the factory default gas will require changing (using linearization
the gas setting and performing field calibration other than methane)
of the device. HART communication is required Replace any part X
to change the factory default settings. Refer to
Constant zero offset X
the HART Communications Appendix within this
document for additional guidance. Periodic Functional Testing X
(at least once a year)
OPERATING MODES
The HC300PL has three operating modes: warm-
up, normal, and calibrate.
Warm-up
Warm-up mode is entered upon application of 24
VDC operating power. During warm-up, the 4-20
mA current loop output will indicate warm-up, the
indicating LED is yellow, and the alarm outputs
are disabled. The warm-up mode lasts nominally
two minutes after power-up.
Normal
After warm-up mode is completed, the device
automatically enters the Normal mode, and all
analog and alarm outputs are enabled.
Calibrate
Calibration of the HC300PL is normally not
required; however, the user has the option to
verify proper calibration or to perform calibration
procedures if necessary. Guidelines for when
to perform a calibration or a response test are
listed in Table 2. The user has the choice of three
methods to place the device into the Calibrate
mode. Refer to the “Calibration” section in this
manual for details.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 14
STARTUP • Four special fasteners are provided for the
front electronics module, M6 bolts per ISO
When the HC300PL is installed and wired as 965 with M5 head, SST with a minimum
described in the “Installation” section, it is ready yield stress of 448 N/mm2 (65,000 PSI). The
for commissioning. If the application requires that tightening torque for each flange bolt is 4.5
specific changes be made to the factory settings, Nm (40 inch-pounds).
HART communication will be required. Refer to
the appropriate appendix for details.
Gas Detection and Measurement Checklist
NOTE
• Vapor(s) to be detected have been identified,
Ensure that controller alarm outputs are
and appropriate calibration gas setting for the
inhibited for a minimum of 10 seconds after
HC300PL has been confirmed.
system power‑up to prevent unwanted
output actuation. • Area(s) of coverage have been identified, and
optimum detector locations for installation are
NOTE documented.
The safety function (gas input-to-actuation/ • Detector installation location is suitable
notification) must always be verified for intended purpose, e.g., no obvious
upon completion of installation and/or impediments to contact with the gas or vapor
modification. of interest exist or are likely to exist.
• Proper calibration gas(es) are available to
HC300PL STARTUP/COMMISSIONING perform proof of response test or calibration
CHECKLISTS during commissioning.
Electrical Checklist • HART communicator or similar field
communicator is available if field
• All PowerLoop conductors are properly sized
programming is expected or required.
and are properly terminated.
• Calibration magnet is available to initiate
• The BSD-340 PowerLoop driver provides
quick calibration or reset.
sufficient load capacity for all gas
detectors.
• Using a DC voltmeter, 24 Vdc has been
measured at the detector.
• All screw terminals have been tightened
and all wires pulltested to confirm proper
termination has been accomplished.
Mechanical Checklist
• HC300PL detector is mounted to a solid
surface not prone to high vibration, shock,
traumatic impact or other undesirable
condition.
• HC300PL detector is installed in proper
orientation (horizontal).
• HC300PL detector is installed to achieve
weatherproof status, e.g., conduit seals or
cable glands have been properly installed.
If there is an unused conduit entry, this entry
has been sealed with a weather tight plug.
• HC300PL detector threaded covers are
tightened to engage all O-rings.
• The hex head set screw is tightened to secure
the cover and prevent access to the wiring
compartment without the use of a tool.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 15
CALIBRATION ADDITIONAL CALIBRATION NOTES
NOTE
Before initiating calibration the detector IMPORTANT
must be disabled via the AutroSafe panel. Always ensure that the correct gas type is
used for calibration. (2.5 LPM flow rate is
CALIBRATION OVERVIEW recommended.)
Although routine calibration of the AutroPoint NOTE
HC300PL is normally not required, the device It is highly recommended that the detector
supports non-intrusive field calibration capability. operate for at least two hours before
Two calibration procedure options are provided: calibrating.
1. Normal Calibration is a two-step process NOTE
consisting of clean air (zero) condition and Always ensure that the HC300PL optics
mid-scale (span) adjustment. Calibration are totally free of all hydrocarbons before
gas must be applied by the operator to initiating calibration. This may require
enable span adjustment. Normal calibration purging of the HC300PL with pure air prior
is required whenever the gas type setting to initiating calibration.
has been changed from the factory setting
(methane, propane, ethylene, or butane). NOTE
Purge the HC300PL optics with clean, dry Under very windy conditions, it may not
air prior to calibration initiation to ensure be possible to successfully calibrate the
that an accurate zero (clean air) condition HC300PL. This situation is easily corrected
is present. by using the HC300PL Calibration Bag
(116-006682-002), available from Autronica.
The following Normal Calibration guidelines
always apply:
NOTE
Always place the protective cap back on
A. The HC300PL is factory set for detection
the calibration nozzle after completion of
of methane, propane, ethylene, or
span calibration.
butane. If the gas setting is changed
(using HART communication), the
HC300PL must be re-calibrated.
B. The calibration gas type must match
the selected gas setting for the
HC300PL.
C. The recommended calibration gas
concentration is 50% LFL, although
other calibration concentrations
may be used if previously defined
in the HC300PL using HART
communication.
2. Zero Only Calibration is a one-step process

consisting of clean air (zero) condition
adjustment only, which is performed
automatically by the device. This procedure
adjusts the “clean air” signal output only,
and is normally used if the 4 milliampere
signal level has drifted. The cause of drift is
typically due to the presence of background
gas during calibration. Purge the HC300PL
optics with clean, dry compressed air prior
to calibration initiation to ensure an accurate
zero (clean air) condition is present.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 16
CALIBRATION INITIATION DETAILED CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
USING MAGNETIC SWITCH
HC300PL calibration may be initiated by any of
Refer to Tables 4 and 5 for a quick summary of the
the following means:
standard calibration sequence.
• The onboard magnetic calibration switch
• The magnetic calibration switch in the remote 1. Apply magnet for two seconds minimum to
termination box initiate calibration.
• HART communication A. The onboard LED turns to steady
red.
Calibration using Magnetic Switch B. The LED within the PIRTB (if used)
turns on.
1. Onboard Switch and LED
2. When zero calibration is complete:
The AutroPoint HC300PL provides an onboard
magnetic calibration/reset switch for non- A. The onboard LED changes from steady
intrusive calibration capability. The magnetic red to flashing red.
switch is located on the device bulkhead.
B. The LED within the PIRTB (if used)
See Figure 8 for switch location. An onboard
begins flashing.
tri-color LED is also provided to signal the
operator when to apply and remove calibration C. The operator should now apply the
gas. appropriate calibration gas to the
HC300PL if conducting Normal
Calibration.
2. Remote Switch and Indicating LED (PIRTB)
D. If conducting zero only calibration, the
A special Remote Termination Box (Model
operator should re-apply the magnet to
PIRTB) is available for initiating calibration
the switch. This will conclude the zero
from a remote location. The PIRTB provides an
only calibration sequence.
internal magnetic switch and indicating LED
(LED is on/off only, not tri-color). The PIRTB 3. When Span Calibration is complete:
is provided with a clear window on the cover,
A. The onboard LED changes from
enabling non-intrusive calibration capability.
flashing red to “off”.
Either magnetic switch must be actuated for B. The operator should now close the
two seconds using a calibration magnet to valve and remove the calibration gas
initiate HC300PL calibration. Upon initiation, from the HC300PL.
the HC300PL automatically performs the zero
calibration adjustment, and then signals the NOTE
operator when it is time to apply calibration It is normal for the HC300PL LED to go off
gas. Upon completion of the span adjustment, or turn blank (no color displayed) until the
the HC300PL returns to normal mode after the calibration gas is cleared from the optics
calibration gas has cleared. The indicating chamber. Remove the weather baffle if
LED (either onboard LED or PIRTB LED, if necessary to clear residual gas.
used) provides visual signals to the operator
regarding the proper time to apply and remove C. The LED within the PIRTB (if used)
the calibration gas. changes to steady on.
4. Return to Normal is complete when:
For zero only calibration, the operator must re-
actuate the magnetic switch upon LED signal A. The onboard LED changes from “off” to
to apply calibration gas. This action instructs steady green.
the HC300PL to utilize the previous span B. The LED within the PIRTB (if used)
setting, and return to normal mode without turns off.
requiring application of calibration gas.
Digital Communication Calibration

HART communication may be utilized to initiate
HC300PL calibration. Refer to the appropriate
appendix for details.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 17
Table 3 — Quick Reference Guide for Normal Calibration Procedure Using Magnetic Switch
Description Indicating LED Operator Action
(on-board/PIRTB)
Normal-ready to calibrate steady green/off Purge with clean air if required
Initiate Calibration steady red/on-steady Apply Magnet for 2 seconds min.
Zero Calibration complete flashing red/on-flashing Apply Calibration Gas to device
Span Calibration in progress flashing red/on-flashing Continue cal gas flow
Span Calibration complete off/on-steady Remove Calibration Gas
Output Returns to Normal steady green/off Calibration Completed
Normal Operation steady green/off None
Table 4 — Quick Reference Guide for Zero Only Calibration Procedure Using Magnetic Switch
Description Indicating LED Operator Action
(on-board/PIRTB)
Normal-ready to calibrate steady green/off Purge with clean air if required
Initiate Calibration steady red/on-steady Apply Magnet for 2 seconds min.
Zero Calibration complete flashing red/on-flashing Re-initiate magnetic switch
to terminate calibration
Return to Normal Mode steady green/off Zero Calibration Completed
TIME OUT CALIBRATION ABORT

If a calibration is not completed within 10 minutes, Calibration can be aborted at any time after
a calibration-failed fault is generated. When the zero calibration is completed. This is done by
HC300PL is in a calibration fault, it cannot detect activating the onboard or PIRTB magnetic switch,
gas. To clear the calibration fault, perform either a or by a command from the HART interface. If
zero only calibration or a Normal calibration (zero calibration is terminated, the new zero point is
with span). retained, and a zero calibration code is saved
in the calibration history buffer. The unit will
NOTE immediately return to normal operation.
Under normal conditions, span calibration is
typically completed in three minutes or less.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 18
DIFFUSION PATHS INTO MEASUREMENT CHAMBER
MIRROR
O-RING
IR SOURCE LAMP
AND WINDOW
C2059 HYDROPHOBIC FILTER
Figure 12 — AutroPoint HC300PL with Baffle Removed
OPTICS CLEANING
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning of the HC300PL optical surfaces
ROUTINE INSPECTION is normally required only if an optical fault is
The AutroPoint HC300PL detector should be indicated.
inspected periodically to ensure that external
obstructions such as plastic bags, mud, snow, or Thoroughly douse the mirror and window using a
other materials do not block the weather baffle, liberal amount of isopropyl alcohol to clear away
thereby impairing the performance of the device. contaminant particles. Repeat the alcohol flush
In addition, the weather baffle assembly should to remove any remaining contaminants. Allow the
be removed and inspected to ensure that the assembly to air-dry in a dust-free location.
diffusion paths into the measurement chamber
are clear. See Figure 12. O-RING
Periodically the O-ring should be inspected for
WEATHER BAFFLE CLEANING breaks, cracks and dryness. To test the ring,
Remove the weather baffle assembly and clean remove it from the enclosure and stretch it slightly.
with a soft brush and soap and water. Rinse and If cracks are visible, it should be replaced. If it
allow to dry. feels dry, a thin coating of lubricant should
be applied. See the “Spare Parts” section for
Replace the weather baffle if damaged or if recommended lubricant. When re-installing the
fouling of the baffle vents is evident. ring, be sure that it is properly seated in the
groove.
NOTE
Solvents may damage the weather baffle PROTECTIVE CAPS AND COVERS
assembly. If contamination is not removed The calibration nozzle cap must always be
using soap and water, then replacement of installed, except while performing calibration.
the baffle may be required. Also ensure that the HART Communication Port
cover and the wiring compartment cover are
installed and fully engaged.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 19
TROUBLESHOOTING
A Fault status is indicated by a yellow LED and a fault warning displayed in the AutroSafe panel display.
Table 5 — Troubleshooting Guide

Fault Warning
Problem Corrective action
(AutroSafe display)
Low temperature shut down The temperature at the detector is The detector has to be heated.
low as readings from the detector
can not be relied on.
Low temperature warning The temperature at the detector is The detector has to be heated.
below -35ºC.
The temperature is close to the limit
for reliable gas readings.
High temperature warning The temperature at the detector is The detector has to be cooled
above 85ºC. down.
The temperature at the detector is at Remove power.
the limit for safe use.
High temperature shut down The temperature at the detector is The detector has to be cooled
above 100ºC. down.
The temperature at the detector is Remove power.
outside the limit for safe use.
CPU supply voltage monitor Internal fault Replace detector
Interface Memory fault Internal fault Replace detector
Interface General fault Internal fault Replace detector
Calibration fault (0x11) The detector is out of calibration Recalibrate the detector
Dirty Optics (0x12) The optical components in the gas Clean the optics
sensing chamber is polluted.
Open lamp (0x13) The IR lamp is broken Replace detector
Zero drift (0x16) The sensor signal has drifted. Recalibrate the detector.
(Zero calibration)
HC300PL memory error (0x14) Internal fault Replace detector
HC300PL voltage supply fault Internal fault Replace detector

(0x15)
HC300PL ADC fault (0x17) Internal fault Reset detector.

If the fault condition is persistent,
replace detector
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 20
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN ORDERING INFORMATION
The AutroPoint HC300PL IR Hydrocarbon Gas AUTROPOINT HC300PL DETECTOR
Detector is not designed to be repaired in the
When ordering, please refer to the Product
field. If a problem should develop, first carefully
Catalogue and Price List.
check for proper wiring, programming, and
calibration. If it is determined that the problem is
CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT
caused by an electronics failure, the device must
be returned to the factory for repair. AutroPoint HC300PL calibration kits consist of a
sturdy carrying case containing two 3.6 cubic foot
Prior to returning devices or components, (103 liter) cylinders of specified gas, a regulator
contact the nearest local Autronica office so that with pressure indicator, and three feet of tubing.
a Service Order number can be assigned. A Methane, 50% LFL, 2.5% by volume 116-006468-001
written statement describing the malfunction must Ethylene, 50% LFL, 1.35% by volume 116-006468-003
accompany the returned device or component to
Propane, 50% LFL, 1.1% by volume 116-006468-004
expedite finding the cause of the failure.
Butane, 50% LFL, 0.8% by volume 116-006468-006
Return all equipment transportation prepaid to the AutroPoint HC300PL Regulator 116-162552-002
factory in Trondheim. HC300PL Calibration Bag 116-006682-002
Other calibration gases are available. Consult the

factory for specific information.
ACCESSORIES
PIRTB Termination Box 116-006414-XXX
Model 475 HART Field Communicator 116-103922-001
250 Ohm Terminating Resistor 116-010253-001
Remote HART Port Kit - 20 meters 116-000118-010
Remote HART Cable Kit - 20 meters 116-000118-020
Communicator-to-Cable
Extension Cordset 116-000118-021
Q300A Sample Draw Cup,
1/4 inch fitting 116-012200-001
Q900A Duct Mount Kit 116-007355-001
Q900C Marine Duct Mount Kit 116-009931-001
Direct Duct Mount Kit w/o HC300PL 116-007525-XXX
Direct Duct Mount Assembly w HC300PL 116-007529-XXX
SPARE PARTS
Weather Baffle with Inlet Nozzle,
with Hydrophobic Filter 116-007165-002
Weather Baffle with Inlet Nozzle,
without Hydrophobic Filter 116-007165-001
Calibration Port Cover 116-009192-001
Calibration Magnet 116-102740-002
Silicone Free Grease 116-005003-001
O-Ring, 3.75” i.d.,
for wiring compartment cover 116-104346-154
O-Ring, 3.25” i.d.,for front flange (internal)116-107427-053
O-Ring, 2.44” i.d., for weather baffle 116-107427-052
3 Foot Tubing 116-101678-007
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 21
APPENDIX A
FM APPROVAL DESCRIPTION
The following items, functions, and options describe the FM approval.
APPROVAL
AutroPoint HC300PL Infrared Hydrocarbon Gas Detector, HC300PL Series.
Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D (T4) Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM 3615,
With intrinsically safe output for HART communication in accordance with control drawing 007283-001.
Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D (T3C) Hazardous (Classified) Locations per FM
3611.
Tamb = –50°C to +75°C. Acidic atmospheres excluded. Conduit seal not required.
Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL Methane-in-air atmospheres per FM 6310/6320 and ANSI 12.13.01.
Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL Propane-in-air atmospheres per FM 6310/6320 and ANSI 12.13.01.
Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL Ethylene-in-air atmospheres per FM 6310/6320 and ANSI 12.13.01.
Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL Butane-in-air atmospheres per FM 6310/6320 and ANSI 12.13.01.
HC300PL hazardous location and performance testing was successfully completed down to –55°C.
However, the FM approved rating is limited to –50°C as there are no conduit fittings, cables, or cable
glands that are presently listed for use below –50°C in the US. FM approvals policy does not allow
product temperature ratings to exceed required installation components (such as conduit seals). The
user must ensure that conduit fittings, cables, cable glands, etc., are rated for the expected minimum
ambient temperature of the installation.
NOTES
Approval of the HC300PL does not include or imply approval of the apparatus to which the
detector may be connected and which processes the electronic signal for eventual end use. In
order to maintain an approved system, the apparatus to which the detector is connected must
also be approved.
This Approval does not include or imply Approval of the communications protocol or functions
provided by the software of this instrument or the communications apparatus or software
connected to this instrument.
AutroPoint Termination Box Model PIRTB

Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D (T6) Hazardous (Classified) Locations per
FM 3615.
Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D (T6) Hazardous (Classified) Locations
per FM 3611.
Tamb = –40°C to +75°C.
NOTE
Approval of the AutroPoint HC300PL detector and termination box does not include or imply
approval of the apparatus to which the detector may be connected and which processes the
electronic signal for eventual end use.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 22
Special Conditions for Safe Use:
• Approval covers use of the instrument when calibration is performed using the gas to be monitored
and the highest alarm set points are preset within 10% of the calibration gas concentration.
• The apparatus may be used with FM Approved AutroPoint Termination Box Model PIRTB Series.
• When using the Duct Mount version (Q900), outlet air velocity must be monitored to be at least 280
ft/min.
• The apparatus may be used with FM Approved Accessories as detailed below.
RESPONSE TIME (Average* in Seconds, with Weather Protection Baffle Installed, and 100% LFL Applied)—
Gas Baffle T50 T60 T90

Without Hydrophobic Filter 4.5 4.9 7.1
Methane
With Hydrophobic Filter 4.8 5.1 7.6
Propane
Ethylene
Butane
* Average of three consecutive trials, with the minimum and maximum response
times no greater than ±2 seconds from the average indicated response time.
ACCURACY—
±3% LFL from 0 to 50% LFL, ±5% LFL from 51 to 100% LFL
(at room ambient temperature, +23°C).
NOTE
Product operates properly with 5 watt walkie talkie keyed at 1 meter.
OTHER GASES
The AutroPoint HC300PL® is provided with field-selectable “standard gas” signal processing program
settings for linear measurement of methane, propane, ethylene, and butane gases. This means that
the HC300PL is capable of providing an analog signal output that is directly proportional to the % LFL
concentration for these gases, provided the proper gas setting has been selected, and the HC300PL has
been calibrated with the proper calibration gas type. The HC300PL is performance certified for detection
of methane, propane, ethylene, or butane, and is shipped from the factory calibrated and set for the
customer’s choice of one of these gases. Digital communication (such as HART) is required to confirm the
current setting and change it if required. In addition to the gases listed above, the HC300PL is capable
of detecting and measuring many other hydrocarbon gases and vapors, with settings provided for gases
such as ethane and propylene. For detection of other commonly encountered gases where specific gas
settings are not provided, one of the standard settings will usually suffice. Please consult the factory for
details.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 23
APPROVED ACCESSORIES
Part Number DESCRIPTION
116-007355-001 Q900A Duct Mount Kit, Standard
116-009931-001 Q900C Duct Mount Kit, Marine
116-007525-003 Direct Duct Mount Kit, Stainless Steel, Vertical
116-007525-004 Direct Duct Mount Kit, Aluminum, Vertical
116-007525-005 Direct Duct Mount Kit, Stainless Steel, Horizontal
116-007525-006 Direct Duct Mount Kit, Aluminum, Horizontal
116-006468-006 Gas Calibration Kit, 50% Butane (0.95% Vol.)
116-006468-003 Gas Calibration Kit, 50% Ethylene (1.35% Vol.)
116-006468-014 Gas Calibration Kit, 50% Methane (2.2% Vol.)
116-006468-914 Gas Calibration Kit, 50% Methane (Russian Certified, 2.2% Vol.)
116-006468-004 Gas Calibration Kit, 50% Propane (1.1% Vol.)
116-006468-915 Gas Calibration Kit, 50% Propane (Russian Certified, 0.85% Vol.)
116-102740-002 Calibration Magnet
116-103922-001 475 HART Field Communicator
116-103922-002 475 HART and Foundation Fieldbus Field Communicator
116-006414-XXX PIRTB Termination Box
NOTE
Refer to the appropriate instruction manual for complete information regarding the following devices:
Q900A - 95-8537
Q900C - 95-8640
Direct Duct Mount Kits - 95-8557
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 24
APPENDIX B
CSA APPROVAL DESCRIPTION
The following items, functions, and options describe the CSA approval.
APPROVAL
Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D (T4) Hazardous (Classified) Locations per C22.2 #30,
With intrinsically safe output for HART communication in accordance with control drawing 007283-001.
Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D (T3C) Hazardous (Classified) Locations per C22.2 #213.
Tamb = –55°C to +75°C. Acidic atmospheres excluded. Conduit seal not required.
Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL Methane-in-air atmospheres per C22.2 #152.
Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL Propane-in-air atmospheres per C22.2 #152.
Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL Ethylene-in-air atmospheres per C22.2 #152.
Performance verified for 0 to 100% LFL Butane-in-air atmospheres per C22.2 #152.
NOTES
Approval of the HC300PL does not include or imply approval of the apparatus to which the
detector may be connected and which processes the electronic signal for eventual end use. In
order to maintain an approved system, the apparatus to which the detector is connected must
also be approved.
This Approval does not include or imply Approval of the communications protocol or functions
provided by the software of this instrument or the communications apparatus or software
connected to this instrument.
AutroPoint Termination Box Model PIRTB Part Number 006414-XXX.
Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D (T6) Hazardous (Classified) Locations per
C22.2 #30.
Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T6) Hazardous (Classified) Locations per
C22.2 #213.
Tamb = –40°C to +75°C.
NOTE
Approval of the AutroPoint HC300PL detector and termination box does not include or imply
approval of the apparatus to which the detector may be connected and which processes the
electronic signal for eventual end use.

Methane
Propane
Ethylene
Butane
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 25
ACCURACY—
OTHER GASES
The AutroPoint HC300PL is provided with field-selectable “standard gas” signal processing program
concentration for these gases, provided the proper gas setting has been selected, and the HC300PL
has been calibrated with the proper calibration gas type. The HC300PL is performance certified for
detection of methane, propane, ethylene, or butane, and is shipped from the factory calibrated and set
for the customer’s choice of one of these gases. Digital communication (such as HART) is required to
confirm the current setting and change it if required. In addition to the gases listed above, the HC300PL
is capable of detecting and measuring many other hydrocarbon gases and vapors, with settings
provided for gases such as ethane and propylene. For detection of other commonly encountered gases
where specific gas settings are not provided, one of the standard settings will usually suffice. Please
consult the factory for details.
APPROVED ACCESSORIES
Part Number DESCRIPTION
116-006468-006 Gas Calibration Kit, 50% Butane (0.95% Vol.)
116-006468-003 Gas Calibration Kit, 50% Ethylene (1.35% Vol.)
116-006468-915 Gas Calibration Kit, 50% Propane (Russian Certified, 0.85% Vol.)
116-102740-002 Calibration Magnet
116-103922-001 475 HART Field Communicator
116-103922-002 475 HART and Foundation Fieldbus Field Communicator
116-006414-XXX PIRTB Termination Box
NOTE
Refer to the appropriate instruction manual for complete information regarding the following devices:
Q900A - 95-8537
Q900C - 95-8640
Direct Duct Mount Kits - 95-8557
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 26
APPENDIX C
ATEX APPROVAL DESCRIPTION
The following items, functions, and options describe the ATEX approval.
APPROVAL
0539 II 2 G
FM
APPROVED
®
Ex db eb IIC T5...T4
-- OR --
Ex db eb [ib] IIC T5...T4
(with HART communication port)
DEMKO 01 ATEX 129485X.
(Performance verified to Methane, Propane, Ethylene, and Butane in accordance with EN 60079-29-1).
T5 (Tamb –50°C to +40°C)
T4 (Tamb –50°C to +75°C)
IP66/IP67.
-- OR --
0539
FM
APPROVED
II 2 G®
Ex db IIC T5...T4
-- OR --
Ex db [ib] IIC T5...T4
DEMKO 01 ATEX 129485X.
(Performance verified to Methane, Propane, Ethylene, and Butane in accordance with EN 60079-29-1).
T5 (Tamb –55°C to +40°C)
T4 (Tamb –55°C to +75°C)
IP66/IP67.
HART Communication Port:
Uo = 4.0 V Co = 20 μF
Io = 100 mA Lo = 500 μH
Performance testing to EN60079-29-1:

The measuring function of the Infrared Gas Detector HC300PL for explosion protection, according to
Annex II clause 1.5.5, 1.5.6 ,and 1.5.7 of the Directive 94/9/EC is, for methane, propane, ethylene, and
butane, covered in this EC-Type Examination Certificate in the following configurations:
• HC300PL Infrared Gas Detector tested in combination with the Model PIRTB Termination Box.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 27
Special Conditions for Safe Use (General):
• The Infrared Gas Detector HC300PL shall be installed in places where there is a low risk of mechanical
damage.
• The field wiring terminal connections are certified for a single wire in size from 0.2–2.5 mm2, (or two
conductors with same cross section 0.2–0.75 mm2).The screws must be tightened down with a
torque 0.4–0.5 Nm.
• The metal housing of the Infrared Hydrocarbon Gas Detector must be electrically connected to earth
ground.
• The Infrared Gas Detector HC300PL has an ambient temperature rating for performance of –55°C to
+75 °C (for Ex d version) and –50°C to +75 °C (for e version).
• Alarm output latching requirement: High alarm outputs must be configured as latching, either as part
of the alarm operation of the gas detector itself (in stand-alone applications), or as a function of the
“high alarm” indication within the controller that is directly connected to the gas detector (for remote
applications).
• The PIRTB is an approved accessory and must be installed in accordance with the installation
requirements of the manual.
Special Conditions for Safe Use for the [ib] HART Communication Port Only:
• The AutroPoint Hydrocarbon Infrared Gas Detectors HC300PL shall be powered from a Safety
Isolating Transformer according to EN60742 or EN61588.
• The maximum cable distance between the HART Communicator and the HC300PL Infrared
Hydrocarbon Gas Detectors is 610 meters.
Additional Safety Notes:
• The following warning is on the product: Warning: Do not open when an explosive gas atmosphere
may be present. For ambient temperature above 60°C use field wiring suitable for maximum ambient
temperature. For temperature below –10°C use suitable field wiring for the lowest temperature.
• The ambient temperature range is limited to –55°C to +75°C (for Ex db version) or –50°C to +75°C (for
Ex db eb version).
• Cable, bushings, and the conduit entries shall be of a type already certified according to relevant
ATEX standard, so the protection principle employed will not be impaired.
• Unused conduit entries shall be closed using stop plugs certified for the conditions of use (IP66/IP67
minimum). The stop plugs should be removable only with the aid of a tool.
• The terminal compartment for HC300PL without relays is designed for either an increased safety
“eb” termination or a flameproof “db” termination of the supply cable. If a flameproof connection is
chosen, then an ATEX certified cable entry device certified to EN60079 must be used. The HC300PL
with relays requires Ex db cable entry devices only.
• Shielded cable is required.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 28
EN Standards:
EN 50270: 2006
EN 50271: 2010
EN 60079-0: 2012 + A11:2013
EN 60079-1: 2007
EN 60079-7: 2007
EN 60079-11: 2012
EN 60079-29-1: 2007
EN 60529: 1991+ A1 2000
EN 61000-6-4 (Emissions)
EN 61000-6-2 (Immunity)
CE: Conforms to:

Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC,
EMC Directive: 2004/108/EC,
ATEX Directive: 94/6/EEC.
Marine Equipment Directive: 96/98/EC.

Methane
Propane
Ethylene
Butane
ACCURACY—
OTHER GASES
The AutroPoint HC300PL is provided with field-selectable “standard gas” signal processing program
concentration for these gases, provided the proper gas setting has been selected, and the HC300PL
has been calibrated with the proper calibration gas type. The HC300PL is performance certified for
detection of methane, propane, ethylene, or butane, and is shipped from the factory calibrated and set
for the customer’s choice of one of these gases. Digital communication (such as HART) is required to
confirm the current setting and change it if required. In addition to the gases listed above, the HC300PL
is capable of detecting and measuring many other hydrocarbon gases and vapors, with settings
provided for gases such as ethane and propylene. For detection of other commonly encountered gases
where specific gas settings are not provided, one of the standard settings will usually suffice. Please
consult the factory for details.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 29
Accessory Information
The PIRTB accessory has been evaluated under a separate ATEX Certificate as shown below.
Certification of the PIRTB is not covered by the HC300PL Certificate and approval of the HC300PL does
not include or imply approval of the apparatus to which the detector may be connected for eventual
end use. To use the PIRTB as an approved accessory with the HC300PL detector, the detector and
accessory must be installed per EN/IEC 60079-14. The PIRTB has not been evaluated for use with the
HC300PL as a System. In order to obtain an approval as a System, the PIRTB must be evaluated with
that detector.

0539
FM
APPROVED II 2 G
®
Ex db IIC T6...T5
EN 60079-29-1
DEMKO 02 ATEX 131326
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +60°C)
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
IP66.
EN Standards: EN 60079-0: 2012 + A11:2013

EN 60079-1: 2007
EN 60529: 1991+A1: 2000
EN 60079-29-1: 2007.
All cable entry devices and blanking elements shall be certified in type of explosion protection
flameproof enclosure “d,” suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed. Unused apertures
shall be closed with suitable certified blanking elements.
For ambient temperatures below –10°C and above +60°C, use field wiring suitable for both minimum
and maximum ambient temperatures.
Performance testing to EN 60079-29-1

The measuring function of the AutroPoint Termination Box, model PIRTB, according to Annex II
paragraph 1.5.5, 1.5.6 and 1.5.7 of the Directive 94/9/EC, is (for methane) covered in this EC-type
Examination Certificate in the following configuration:
AutroPoint Termination Box, model PIRTB, in combination with Autronica gas detector models PIR9400,
PIRDUCT, or HC300PL (with methane applied to the gas detectors).
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 30
APPENDIX D
IECEx APPROVAL DESCRIPTION
The following items, functions, and options describe the IECEx approval.
APPROVAL
IECEx ULD 04.0002X

Ex db eb IIC T5...T4
-- OR --
Ex db eb [ib] IIC T5...T4
T5 (Tamb –50°C to +40°C)
T4 (Tamb –50°C to +75°C)
IP66/IP67.
-- OR --
IECEx ULD 04.0002X
Ex db IIC T5...T4
-- OR --
Ex db [ib] IIC T5...T4
T5 (Tamb –55°C to +40°C)
T4 (Tamb –55°C to +75°C)
IP66/IP67.
HART Communication Port:
Uo = 4.0 V Co = 20 μF
Io = 100 mA Lo = 500 μH
Special Conditions for Safe Use (General):
• The Infrared Gas Detector HC300PL shall be installed in places where there is a low risk of mechanical
damage.
• The field wiring terminal connections are certified for a single wire in size from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2, (or two
conductors with same cross section 0.2 to 0.75 mm2). The screws must be tightened down with a
torque 0.4 to 0.5 Nm.
• The metal housing of the Infrared Hydrocarbon Gas Detector must be electrically connected to earth
ground.
• Alarm output latching requirement: High alarm outputs must be configured as latching, either as part
of the alarm operation of the gas detector itself (in stand-alone applications) or as a function of the
“high alarm” indication within the controller that is directly connected to the gas detector (for remote
applications).
Special Conditions for Safe Use for the [ib] HART Communication Port Only:
• The AutroPoint Hydrocarbon Infrared Gas Detector HC300PL shall be powered from a Safety Isolating
Transformer according to EN60742 or EN61588.
• The maximum cable distance between the HART Communicator and the HC300PL Infrared
Hydrocarbon Gas Detector is 610 meters.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 31
IEC Standards:
IEC 60079-0: 2011
IEC 60079-1: 2007
IEC 60079-11: 2011
IEC 60079-7: 2006-07
IEC 60529, 2.1 Edition with Corr. 1
(2003-01 + 2 (2007-10)
WARNING
Always ensure that the detector/junction box hazardous (classified) location ratings are
applicable for the intended use.

IECEx ULD 10.0002
Ex db IIC T6...T5
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +60°C)
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
IP66.
IEC Standards: IEC 60079-0: 2011

IEC 60079-1: 2007
IEC 60529, 2.1.ed.+Corr. 1:2003+2:2007.
All cable entry devices and blanking elements shall be certified in type of explosion protection
flameproof enclosure “d,” suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed. Unused apertures
shall be closed with suitable certified blanking elements.
For ambient temperatures below –10°C and above +60°C, use field wiring suitable for both minimum
and maximum ambient temperatures.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 32
APPENDIX E
OTHER APPROVALS
The following items, functions, and options describe various other approvals applicable to the HC300PL.
SIL APPROVAL
HC300PL is IEC 61508 SIL 2 capable when used in the AutroSafe 4 Integrated Fire & Gas (IFG) system.
DNV
Type Approval Certificate No. A-13175.
Subject Matter of the Approval

HC300PL IR Hydrocarbon Gas Detector and PIRTB Termination Box are found to comply with Det
Norske Veritas’ Rules for Classification of Ships and Det Norske Veritas’ Offshore Standards.
Application/Limitation
Location Classes
MODEL TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY VIBRATION EMC ENCLOSURE
HC300PL D B B B C
Relevant tests according to “Standard for Certification No. 2.4”.
MED
Certificate No. MED-B-9906.
HC300PL IR Hydrocarbon Gas Detector and PIRTB Termination Box are found to comply with the
requirements in the following Regulations/Standards:
Annex A.1, item No. A.1/3.54 and Annex B, Module B in the Directive. SOLAS 74 as amended, Regulation
II-2/4 and V1/3 and FSS Code 15.
The equipment is found to comply with the following location/application dependent requirements (for
definition of each of the location classes, see the table below):
MODEL TEMPERATURE VIBRATION EMC ENCLOSURE

HC300PL TEM-D VIB-B EMC-B ENC-C
Definition of the location classes with reference to relevant standards:

Temperature
TEM-D Location (–25°C to +70°C) (ref. IEC 60092-504 (2001) table 1 item 6-7)
Vibration
VIB-D For eq. on reciprocating machines etc. (ref. IEC 60092-504 (2001) table 1 item 10)
EMC
EMC-B Bridge and open deck zone (ref. IEC 60092-504 (2001) table 1 item 19-20)
Enclosure
ENC-C Open deck (IP56) (ref. IEC 60092-201 table 5).
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 33
INMETRO
UL-BR 15.0242X
Ex d [ib] IIC T4-T5 Gb IP66/67
T5 (Tamb –55°C to +40°C)
T4 (Tamb –55°C to +75°C)
––OR––
Ex d e [ib] IIC T4-T5 Gb IP66/67
T5 (Tamb –50°C to +40°C)
T4 (Tamb –50°C to +75°C)
Note: All cable entry devices or blanking elements shall be Brazil certified in the type of explosion
protection, flameproof enclosure “d,” suitable for the conditions of use and correctly
installed, with an ingress protection rating of IP66/IP67.
A screw or cover lock is provided for a secondary means of fastening the cover.

UL-BR 15.0313
Ex d IIC T5-T6 Gb IP66
T6 (Tamb = –55°C to +60°C)
T5 (Tamb = –55°C to +75°C)
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 34
APPENDIX F
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
European Union
[1]
Declaration of Conformity
This declaration of conformity is issued under the sole responsibility of the manufacturer.
[2] It is declared that the following equipment:
Model HC300PL Series (AutroPoint IR Hydrocarbon Gas Detector)

Document reference number DEC-3023-HC300PL
[3] Manufactured by:
Detector Electronics Corporation (Det-Tronics)
th
6901 West 110 Street
Minneapolis, MN 55348 USA
[4] Is in conformity with the Essential Health and Safety Requirement and the relevant Union harmonisation legislation
by complying with:
th
ATEX Directive: 2009/94/9/EC (until April 19 , 2016) EN 60079-0:2012+A11:2013
th
2014/34/EU (from April 20 , 2016) EN 60079-1:2007
Certificate No.: DEMKO 01 ATEX 129485X EN 60079-7:2007
EN 60079-11:2012
EN 60079-29-1:2007
EN 60529:1991+A1:2000
th
EMC Directive: 2004/108/EC (until April 19 , 2016) EN 50270:2006
th
2014/30/EU (from April 20 , 2016)
th
Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC (until April 19 , 2016) EN 61010-1:2010
th
2014/35/EU (from April 20 , 2016)
WEEE Directive: 2002/96/EC
Marine Equipment Directive: 96/98/EC EN 60945:2002

DNV Certificate No.: MED-B-9906 Annex A.1 and Annex B, Module B, Solas
DNV Certificate No.: MED-D-1515 74, Regulation II-2/4 & VI/3 and FSS Code
15
[5] Production QAN Issued by:
UL International DEMKO A/S, NB. No. 0539
Borupvang 5A, 2750 Ballerup, Denmark
[6] The Marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:
Combustible Gas Version CO2 version
EN60079-29-1
II 2 G Ex db [ib] IIC T5…T4 IP66/IP67 II 2 G Ex db [ib] IIC T5…T4 IP66/IP67
II 2 G Ex db eb [ib] IIC T5…T4 IP66/IP67 II 2 G Ex db eb [ib] IIC T5…T4 IP66/IP67
II 2 G Ex db IIC T5…T4 IP66/IP67 II 2 G Ex db IIC T5…T4 IP66/IP67
II 2 G Ex db eb IIC T5…T4 IP66/IP67 II 2 G Ex db eb IIC T5…T4 IP66/IP67

[7] We, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the aforementioned Union
harmonisation legislation and harmonised Standard(s) for CE Conformity Marking.
Approvals Engineering Manager Operations Manager
Jon Miller Sally Day
Signature:
CONTACT THETHE
CONTACT FACTORY FOR
FACTORY FOR OFFICIAL
OFFICIAL
Signature:
COPY COPY
Date of Issue: Date of Issue:

Detector Electronics Corporation Detector Electronics UK Ltd. | Mathisen Way, Poyle Road
6901 West 110th Street | Minneapolis, MN 55348 USA Colnbrook, Slough | Berkshire SL3 OHB United Kingdom
Phone: +1 (1) 952-946-6488 Phone: +44 (0) 1753 683059
6901 West 110th Street, Minneapolis, MN 55438 USA Page 1 of 1

Toll-Free: 800.765.3473 | Fax: 952.829.8750 | www.det-tronics.com DEC-3023-HC300PL
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 35
APPENDIX G
HART COMMUNICATION
Digital communication with the AutroPoint HC300PL is necessary to monitor internal status and to
modify the factory settings. This appendix provides guidance on establishing HART communication,
and describes the communication menu structure when using the HC300PL with the HART Handheld
Communicator.
ESTABLISHING LOCAL HART COMMUNICATION WITH AUTROPOINT HC300PL

If the HC300PL is equipped with an I.S. HART communication port on the side of the detector, unscrew
the protective cap and connect the HART Communicator test probes to the two terminals inside the port
(non-polarized).
Press the “on” key to switch on the HART Handheld Communicator. The Online menu is the first menu
to appear when the Communicator is properly connected to the HC300PL. This menu is structured to
provide important information about the connected device. The HART protocol incorporates a concept
called the “Device Description Language” (DDL) that enables HART instrument manufacturers to define
and document their product in a consistent format. This format is readable by handheld communicators,
PCs, and other process interface devices that support DDL.
NOTES
It is possible to establish HART Communication with the HC300PL in Generic HART
communication mode. In this mode, HART communication with the HC300PL detector will be
established, but the Communicator will not recognize the HC300PL as a gas detector. Generic
HART communication will not provide access to the HC300PL DDL menu and important set-up,
diagnostics, or operation functions, including gas type selection.
PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE IF ECLIPSE (HC300PL) DDL IS PRESENT IN YOUR

COMMUNICATOR
1. From the Main menu, select the Offline menu.
2. From the Offline menu, select New Configurations to access the list of device descriptions
programmed into your HART Communicator. The Manufacturer menu displays a list of each
manufacturer with available DDLs.
3. Select a manufacturer, and the display will show the list of available device types.
4. If you cannot find the ECLIPSE (HC300PL) device on your Communicator, the specific DDL is not
programmed into the Memory Module. Your HART Communicator will require a DDL upgrade in
order to access all ECLIPSE (HC300PL) DDL functions.
The HART Communication Foundation (www.hartcomm.org) manages the HCF Approved DDL Library
and programming sites for HCF Approved field communicators. A complete listing of the DDL Library is
available for download and provides manufacturer and device type file identification.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 36
ECLIPSE (HC300PL) HART MENU STRUCTURE
This section displays the menu trees for the AutroPoint HC300PL. The Menu tree shows the primary
commands and options available when using menu selections.
1 Reference xxxxx 1 Calibrate Same

1 Gas xxxxxxxx
2 Snsr Temp xxxxx 2 Cal Conc xxxx Methane
2 PV 0.0% LEL
3 Operating Mode 3 Cal Gas xxxx Propane
3 AI Loop Current
4 Calibration 4 Gas Type xxxx
4.00 mA
5 xmtr flt 1 5 Calib Type xxxx Std
4 PV (chart)
6 xmtr flt 2 6 Cuvette Length Cuvette
7 xmtr status 1
1 Status 8 xmtr status 2 Running Hrs xxxxx
Maximum Temperature
1 Self test xxxx Deg C xxxxx Hours
2 Response test Max Temp Since Reset
2 Test Device 3 Reset xxxx Deg C xxxxx Hours
1 Device Variables Reset Min & Max Temp?
2 Diagnostics ABORT OK
1 4 mA
3 Device Setup 3 Loop Test 2 20 mA
3 Other Running Hrs xxxxx
4 End Minimum Temperature
xxxx Deg C xxxxx Hours
Min Temp Since Reset
1 Zero Trim xxxx Deg C xxxxx Hours
4 Calibration 2 Calibrate Sensor Reset Min & Max Temp?
3 Cal Date 12/02/2000 ABORT OK
4 D/A trim
Running Hrs xxxxx
Calibration History
(Event)
xxxxx Hrs
1 Running Hrs xxxx
5 History 1 Previous Running Hrs xxxxx
2 Max Temperatures
2 Next Event History
3 Min Temperatures
3 Exit (Event)
4 Cal Log
5 Event Log xxxxx Hrs
1 Previous
2 Next
1 Tag xxxxxx 3 Exit
2 Long Tag xxxxxx %LEL

1 Basic Setup ppm
3 PV Unit xxxxxx Vol%
1 URV 100% LEL

2 LRV 0.0% LEL
4 Range Values 3 PV USL 100% LEL
4 PV LSL 0.0% LEL
1 Tag xxxxxxxx
2 Long Tag xxxxxxxx
3 Date: 6/30/2000
5 Device Information 4 Descriptor
5 Message
6 Model: Eclipse
6 Gas xxxxxxxx 7 Write Protect No
8 Revision #’s
1 Universal Rev 5
9 Final asmbly num
2 Fld Dev Rev 1
Dev id xxxxx
3 FW Major Rev xx
4 FW Minor Rev xx
1 PV USL xxxx unit
2 Active xxxx
3 Reference xxxx
4 Ratio xxxx
(Prompt for entry)
5 Absorption xxxx %
Spcl Gas Coef A
6 Span Factor xxxxx
Spcl Gas Coef B
1 Sensor Information 7 Snsr temp xx degC
2 Detailed Setup Spcl Gas Coef C Eclipse
8 Vol% @ 100% LEL
Spcl Gas Coef D PIR9400
9 Coefficient A
Spcl Gas Coef E User Defined
Coefficient B
Spcl Gas Vol%
Coefficient C
Coefficient D
Coefficient E 1 High Alarm Level
2 High Alarm Latch
3 Low Alarm Level
Spcl
4 Low Alarm Latch
Methane 1 Warm up
3 Review 2 Gas Type xxxxx Ethane 2 Blocked Optics
Propane 1 Analog Fault Codes 3 Calibration
Ethylene 2 Analog Code Values 4 Fault
Propylene
Butane
1 Poll Addr xx Modbus
Spare 6
2 Num Req preams x ASCII
Spare 7
Spare 8
1 EQ DIP Switch xxx 1200
1 Config Gas Alarms 1 Protocol xxxxx 2400
2 Config fault out 2 Poll Addr xxx 4800
3 Output Condition 9600
3 Hart output 3 Baud Rate xxxx
4 Com Port 4 Parity xxxx 19.2k
4 Device Information
5 Write Protect 1 Password Disable None

ECLIPSE (HC300PL) 2 Set Write protect Enable Even
3 Write protect xx Change Password Odd
HART Device Rev 2, DD Rev 1
Menu Rev 00.05
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 37
CONNECTIONS AND HARDWARE
The HART Communicator can interface with the HC300PL from the onboard I.S. communication port,
from the control room. The connections are non-polarized.
COMMONLY USED HART COMMANDS

The most commonly used HART commands for the HC300PL are:
1. Performing basic setup functions such as:

• Assigning a tag number to the detector
• Assigning unit of measure (%LEL, PPM, % Vol)
2. Performing detailed setup functions such as:

• Assigning a special gas type
• Configuring Gas Alarm Levels (Low and High threshold)
• Configuring Fault Codes (analog signal output levels during various fault conditions)
• Configuration of HART communication protocol
• Write-protecting the HART programming, or assigning a password to protect the setup
3. Performing Diagnostic and Service functions such as:

• Reset Alarms or Faults
• Performing a signal loop output test
• Performing a Calibration
• Monitoring detector history/data logs
It is important for the user to understand how to correctly operate the HART Field Communicator,
and how to navigate through the various programming options and either select or de-select the
desired parameters. This document does NOT cover this fundamental information on the HART Field
Communicator. Please refer to the Field Communicator instruction manual for specific guidance on how
to operate the communicator.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 38
TYPICAL SETUP OF A HC300PL
After HART communication has been established with the HC300PL, the following operational
parameters are generally verified:
1. Inspect the Root menu to confirm that the gas type selected is proper for the gas hazard to be
detected. The HC300PL is shipped from the factory calibrated and set for detection of methane,
propane, ethylene, or butane. If a different gas type is desired, then change the setting using the
detailed setup programming option, and perform a field calibration using the same gas type as
is selected. Refer to the Calibration section of this manual.
2. Inspect the Gas Alarm level thresholds and Fault output signals using the Detailed setup option,
and modify these settings if required.
3. Enter a device Tag number and/or descriptor for future traceability and guidance.
While these three operations are typical, these steps may not be satisfactory for your application.
The following data provides basic guidance on HART menu navigation. Refer to the HART Field
Communicator manual for additional guidance.
ROOT MENU
When HART communication is established with the HC300PL, the first menu
displayed is the Root menu: 1 Device Variables
2 Diagnostics
To select any of the three menu options shown, highlight the desired option
using the up/down arrow key, and then press the “right arrow” key. 3 Device Setup
1 Device Variables
This shows the gas type and concentration being detected in %LEL.
2 Diagnostics
This menu option shows extensive status information about the detector. It can also be used to test the
detector, initiate calibration, or reset latched relay outputs.
3 Device Setup
The Device Setup menu accesses every configurable parameter of the connected device. Refer to the
Basic Setup and Detailed Setup Menus for more information.
DEVICE VARIABLES
Selecting this menu item will list all process variables and their values.
These process variables are continuously updated, and include: 1 Gas XXXXXX
Gas xxxxx (gas type being detected).
2 PV 0.0% LEL
PV (concentration of gas in % full scale).
Loop Current (analog output of device in mA). 3 AI Loop Current 4.00 mA
4 PV
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 39
DIAGNOSTICS/SERVICE MENU
The specific diagnostic and/or service functions available are:
1 Status
1 Status 2 Test Device
This menu option shows extensive status information about the detector. 3 Loop Test
Data available includes: 4 Calibration
1 Reference xxxx (output value of the reference sensor).
2 Snsr temp xxxx (temperature of the sensor that is making the 5 History
process measurement).
3 Operating mode (calibration, normal, reset)
4 Calibration
5 xmtr flt 1.Xmtr flt and xmtr status provide status information relating to failures, warnings
and status of processes.
6 xmtr flt 2
7 xmtr status 1
8 xmtr status 2
2 Test Device
1 Self-test. Internal tests are performed and any problems are reported in xmtr flt 1 and xmtr flt 2
2 Response Test. The analog output is held at 4 mA to prevent the alarm relays from activating
when gas is applied. Gas response is indicated by the PV.
3 Reset. Latched relay outputs are reset.
3 Loop Test
This test allows the operator to manually set the analog signal output to a selected constant value.
4 Calibration
This menu option initiates the calibration routine and is used to set device calibration preferences.
Calibration Submenus include:
1 Zero Trim. The current sensor input is used as the new zero reference.
2 Calibrate Sensor. This is the command used to calibrate the HC300PL Detector.
Submenus include:
1 Calibrate. Zero and span calibrations are performed.
2 Cal Concentration. The output will be set to this value when gas is applied during calibration.
3 Cal Gas
4 Gas Type. Always set to “Same,” never change setting to Methane or Propane.
5 Calibration Type. Submenu includes options:
– Standard
– Cuvette
6 Cuvette Length (in millimeters)
3 Calibration Date (CalDate). Shows date of last calibration
4 D/A trim (internal use only).
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 40
5 History
This menu option shows extensive historical information about the detector. Data available includes:
1 Running hrs xxxx (the number of hours the unit has been powered).
2 Max temperatures (the maximum temperatures recorded in the device).
See max temperature submenu below.
3 Min temperatures (the minimum temperatures recorded in the device).
See min temperature submenu below.
4 Cal log (data regarding stored calibrations). The most recent calibration is shown first.
Calibrations are recorded as zero only cal, cal OK (zero and span were successfully
completed), and cal failed. See cal log submenu below.
5 Event log (data regarding stored events). The most recent event is shown first.
Recorded events include blocked optics, warm-up, zero drift, low alarms and high
alarms. See event log submenu below.
Max Temperature Submenu:

Running hrs xxxx
Maximum Temperature
xxxx degC xxxx hours
Max temp since reset
Reset min&max temp?
ABORT OK
Min Temperature Submenu:

Running hrs xxxx
Minimum Temperature
Min temp since reset
Reset min&max temp?
ABORT OK
Cal Log Submenu:

Running hrs xxxx
Calibration history
(Event)
xxxxx Hrs
1 Previous
2 Next
3 Exit
Event Log Submenu:

Running hrs xxxx
Event history
(Event)
xxxx Hrs
1 Previous
2 Next
3 Exit
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 41
DEVICE SETUP
The Device Setup menu accesses every configurable parameter of the
1 Basic Setup
connected device. The accessible setup parameters include:
2 Detailed Setup
1 Basic Setup
3 Review
This menu provides quick access to a number of configurable parameters
including tag, unit, range values, device information, and gas type. Refer to
the Basic Setup Submenu for additional information.
The options available in the Basic Setup menu are the most fundamental tasks that can be performed
with a given device. These tasks are a subset of the options available under the Detailed Setup menu.
2 Detailed Setup
This menu provides access to:
1 Sensor information
2 Gas Type
3 Output Condition
4 Device information
5 Write protect
Refer to the Detailed Setup Submenu for additional information.
3 Review
This menu lists all of the parameters stored in the connected device, including information about the
measuring element, signal condition, and output. It also includes stored information about the connected
device such as tag, materials of construction, and device software revision.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 42
BASIC SETUP SUBMENU
The tag number identifies a specific device. Changing units affects the 1 Tag
engineering units that are displayed. Re-ranging changes the analog output
scaling. 2 Long Tag
1 Tag 3 PV Unit xxxxx
Press to access the Tag number menu. Enter the device tag number as 4 Range Values
desired.
2 Long Tag
6 Gas xxxxxx
Press to access the Tag number menu. Enter the device long tag number
as desired.
3 PV Unit
Press to access PV Unit submenu. Select %LEL for standard combustible applications.
– % LEL
– ppm
– Vol %
4 Range Values
Press to access Range Values submenu.
1 URV 20-100% LEL (upper range value).
2 LRV 0% LEL (lower range value).
3 USL 100% LEL (upper sensor limit).
4 LSL 0% LEL (lower sensor limit).
Press to access device information submenu:
1 Tag xxxx
2 Long Tag xxxx
3 Date 6/30/2000
4 Descriptor (text associated with the field device that can be used by the operator in any way).
5 Message (text associated with the field device that can be used by the operator in any way).
6 Model: HC300PL
7 Write protect xx. This indicates whether variables can be written to the device, or whether
commands that cause actions to be performed in the device can or cannot
occur.
8 Revision #’s. See Revision #’s submenu below.
9 Final asmbly num
Dev id xxxx (a number is used to identify a unique field device).
Revision # submenu
offers selection options for:
1 Universal rev
2 Fld dev rev
3 FW Major rev xx
4 FW Minor rev xx
6 Gas
Type of gas being detected.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 43
DETAILED SETUP MENU
1 Sensor Information 1 Sensor Information
This menu provides detailed information on the internal detector operations. 2 Gas Type xxxxx
Submenu options include:
3 Output Condition
1 PV USL xxxx. The upper sensor limit value defines the maximum
usable value for the upper range of the sensor. 4 Device Information
2 Active xxxx (output value of the active sensor). 5 Write Protect
3 Reference xxxx (output value of the reference sensor).
4 Ratio xxxx (the ratio of the active sensor over the reference sensor).
5 Absorption xxxx % (the gas absorption expressed in percent).
6 Span Factor xxxx (the number used in calibrating this specific device).
7 Snsr temp xx degC (the temperature of the sensor that is making the process measurement).
8 Vol % @ 100%LEL (the % volume of gas equal to 100% LEL).
9 Coefficient A
Coefficient B
Coefficient C
Coefficient D
Coefficient E
2 Gas Type
Select the gas to be detected here. Submenu options include:
– Spcl
Spcl Gas Coef A
Spcl Gas Coef B
Spcl Gas Coef C
Spcl Gas Coef D
Spcl Gas Coef E
Spcl Gas Vol %
– Methane
– Ethane
– Propane
– Ethylene
– Propylene
– Butane
– Spare 6
– Spare 7
– Spare 8
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 44
3 Output Condition
NOTE
Any settings will be overridden by the AutroSafe system. Output settings cannot be used for
PowerLoop detectors
Select and configure the output signal options for the HC300PL detector. Submenu options:
1 Config Gas Alarms. Submenu options inlcude:
1 High Alarm Level. The high alarm level cannot be set higher than 60% LEL or lower than
the low alarm level.
2 High Alarm Latch
3 Low Alarm Level. The low alarm level cannot be set lower than 5% LEL or higher than the
high alarm level.
4 Low Alarm Latch
2 Config fault out. Submenu options include:

1 Analog fault codes. This programs the analog output used to indicate faults. Submenu
options include:
– ECLIPSE
– PIR 9400
– User defined
2 Analog code values. Submenu options include:
1 Warm up
2 Blocked Optics
3 Calibration
4 Fault
3 HART output. Submenu options include:

1 Poll addr xx (address used by the host to identify a field device).
2 Num req preams x (Number of Request Preambles).
4 Com Port. Submenu options include:

1 Protocol xxxx (protocol for RS-485 communications). Submenu options:
– Modbus
– ASCII
2 Poll addr xxx (polling address for RS-485 communications).
3 Baud Rate xxxx (baud rate for RS-485 communications). Submenu options include:
– 1200
– 2400
– 4800
– 9600
– 19.2k
4 Parity xxxx (parity for RS-485 communications). Submenu options include:
– None
– Even
– Odd
NOTE
Do not use the Com Port menu options with the AutroPoint HC300PL.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 45
Press to access device information submenu:
1 Tag xxxx
2 Long Tag xxxx
3 Date 6/30/2000
4 Descriptor (text associated with the field device that can be used by the operator in any way).
5 Message (text associated with the field device that can be used by the operator in any way).
6 Model: HC300PL
7 Write protect xx. This indicates whether variables can be written to the device, or whether
commands that cause actions to be performed in the device can or cannot
occur.
8 Revision #’s. See Revision #’s submenu below.
9 Final asmbly num
Dev id xxxx (a number is used to identify a unique field device).
Revision # submenu
offers selection options for:
1 Universal rev
2 Fld dev rev
3 FW Major rev xx
4 FW Minor rev xx
5 Write Protect
Enable/disable password and write protection capability. Submenu options include:
1 Password. A password is required to enable writing to the device.
2 Set Write Protect
– Disable
– Enable
– Change Password
3 Write Protect xx. This indicates whether variables can be written to the field device or whether
commands that cause actions to the performed in the device can or cannot
occur.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 46
APPENDIX H
WARRANTY
Autronica Fire and Security products are manufactured from high quality components and the completed
device is rigorously inspected and tested before shipment; however, any electronic device is subject
to failure beyond the control of the manufacturer. To ensure system reliability, it is important for the user
to maintain the system as recommended by the instruction manuals and to determine the frequency of
functional checking of the system required for each specific installation. The more frequent the checking,
the greater the system reliability. For the highest reliability, a completely redundant system is necessary.
The manufacturer warrants the AutroPoint HC300PL against defective parts and workmanship, and
will replace or repair equipment returned to the manufacturer for these reasons within five years after
purchase date. See manufacturer’s Standard Terms and Conditions on the invoice for complete details.
Please note that no other warranties, written or implied, will be honored by the manufacturer.
CAUTION
The detector contains no user serviceable components. Service or repair should never be
attempted by the user. The manufacturer’s warranty for this product is void, and all liability for
proper function of the detector is irrevocably transferred to the owner or operator in the event that
the device is serviced or repaired by personnel not employed or authorized by Autronica Fire and
Security, or if the device is used in a manner not conforming to its intended use.
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 47
APPENDIX I
CONTROL DRAWING
P/N 95-8587, v2.1, rev. 04/16
Page 48
Autronica Fire and Security AS
Haakon VIIs gt. 4, NO-7041 Trondheim, Norway | Tel: +47 90 90 55 00 | Fax: +47 73 58 25 01
E-mail: info@autronicafire.no | www.autronicafire.com
Instructions
Electrochemical Gas Detector
GT3000 Series
Includes Transmitter (GTX)
and Sensor Module (GTS)
11.1 Rev: 8/15 95-8616

Table of Contents
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
GTS Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GT3000 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
GTX Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
History/Event Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HART Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Routine Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Magnetic Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Sensor Module Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Device Repair and Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Important Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
GTS Gas Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Calibration Kits for Gas Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Parts & Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Identification of Vapor(s) to be Detected . . . . . . . 6
Identification of Detector Mounting Locations . . . 6
Device Mounting Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 APPENDIX A — FM APPROVAL DESCRIPTION . . . . 18
Detector Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
APPENDIX B — CSA CERTIFICATION DESCRIPTION . 20
Sensor Termination Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
APPENDIX C — ATEX APPROVAL DESCRIPTION . . 21
wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 APPENDIX D — IECEx APPROVAL DESCRIPTION . 22
Wiring Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
APPENDIX E — OTHER APPROVALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Intrinsic Safety Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Guidelines for Intrinsic Safety Wiring . . . . . . . . . 8 Appendix F — Declaration of Conformity . 24
Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Appendix G — sensor comparison /
cross sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Appendix H — HART COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . 27
Appendix I — CONTROL DRAWINGs . . . . . . . . . . . 29

INSTRUCTIONS
Electrochemical Gas Detector

GT3000 Series
Includes Transmitter (GTX)
and Sensor Module (GTS)
Sensor
Module
(GTS)
Transmitter Detector (GT3000)

(GTX)
Important that are able to monitor a linear 4-20 mA dc signal. All

Be sure to read and understand the entire alarm functions are provided by the monitoring device.
instruction manual before installing or operating
the gas detection system. This product is The GT3000 is designed and approved as a stand
intended to provide early warning of the presence alone unit for use in hazardous locations. It is suitable
of a toxic or explosive gas mixture, or of oxygen for outdoor applications that require IP66 rating and
depletion. Proper device installation, operation, uses a hydrophobic filter that is easily replaced without
and maintenance are required to ensure safe opening the device or use of tools. The GT3000 is
and effective operation. If this equipment is used furnished as either explosion-proof or intrinsically safe.
in a manner not specified in this manual, safety
protection may be impaired. The GT3000 supports local one-person calibration
with the use of a magnet and on-board LED.
Description GTS SENSOR Module

The GT3000 Electrochemical Gas Detector is an The GTS’s electrochemical sensor cell uses capillary
intelligent stand-alone industrial gas detector, designed diffusion barrier technology for monitoring gas
to provide continuous monitoring of the atmosphere for concentrations in ambient air.
hazardous gas leaks or oxygen depletion. It is fully
performance tested and approved by Factory Mutual.
Live Maintenance
Refer to Appendix F for individual gas specifications.
The hot swappable GTS sensor module is intrinsically
The GT3000 Gas Detector consists of a replaceable safe and allows live maintenance while under power,
sensor module (Model GTS) connected to a transmitter without de‑classifying the hazardous area. When the
module (Model GTX). A single transmitter is sensor is removed, the transmitter generates a fault
compatible with all GTS sensor modules. A variety of output. If a new sensor of the same type and range is
electrochemical sensor models are available in various installed, the fault self-clears. However, if the type or
concentration ranges. range of the new sensor module does not match the
old, the transmitter generates a fault until a successful
The GT3000 is a 2-wire device that generates a 4-20 calibration or acceptance of the new sensor type is
mA output signal with HART communication that is completed. For additional information regarding Live
proportional to the concentration of the target gas. Maintenance, refer to “Sensor Module Replacement” in
the Maintenance section of this manual.
The GT3000 is compatible with FlexVu® Model UD10 and
UD20 Universal Display Units, as well as other devices
11.1 © Detector Electronics Corporation 2015 Rev: 8/15 95-8616

Automatic Sensor Module Recognition HISTORY/Event Logs
The transmitter provides automatic gas sensor Both the transmitter and sensor are able to store 256
recognition, allowing the operator to access the history logs, which are saved in non-volatile memory
following information via HART, or a UD10 or UD20 and retained through power cycles. A UD10/UD20
Universal display: Universal Display Unit, a HART communication device,
• Date of manufacture of the sensor module or AMS software is required to view the history logs.
• Sensor module serial number Sensor Logging Capability

• Gas type
The sensor module logs the following operating
• Measurement range parameters in non‑volatile memory:
The sensor module is factory programmed for the gas • Running Hours - The sensor module maintains the
type and measurement range. When the sensor module total operating hours, and cannot be reset.
powers up, the transmitter reads and acknowledges • Min/Max Temperature - The sensor module
the gas type and measurement range. maintains the minimum and maximum temperatures
with a date and time stamp.
GTX TRANSMITTER • Calibration - The sensor module logs the calibration
The transmitter output is a linear 4-20 mA dc signal history with a date and time stamp, along with the
with HART communication that directly corresponds to success or cause of failure codes. See Table 1. The
0-100% full scale. zero and span values (AD converter values recorded at
the time of calibration) are also saved. This allows the
A 3.8 mA output indicates sensor calibration in progress logs to follow the sensor module when it is calibrated
(17.3 mA for O2 sensor). The GT3000 comes with one separately from the transmitter. (Calibration data is
of two pre-programmed fault output levels: 2.45 mA or available via a UD10/UD20, a HART communication
3.5 mA. device, or AMS software.)
The sensor module gets the current time and date
Priority of output signals from highest to lowest is: from the transmitter and provides calibration log
information to the transmitter. See Figure 1.
Calibration
1
(In progress)
2 Fault Table 1—Calibration Status Codes
3 Gas Level Number Definition

0 EMPTY LOG
1 NOT USED
Transmitter Wiring 2 NOT USED
3 ZERO CAL
The GTX transmitter is a two-wire loop powered device
4 SPAN CAL
that uses a three-wire cable (power, signal, and earth
5 ABORT CAL
ground) for connecting to a controller or monitoring
6 FAILED CAL
device. The use of shielded cable is required.
7 NOT USED
8 NOT USED
Real Time Clock (RTC) 9 INIT CAL LOG
The GTX transmitter has a real time clock with battery 10 NOT USED
back‑up, that is used for time stamping the event logs. 11 CLR CAL FAULTS
The time and date are set and read using a UD10/
UD20 Universal Display Unit, a HART communication
device, or AMS software. The time stamp on the logs
will not be correct if the RTC in the transmitter is not set
correctly.
11.1 2 95-8616
GT3000
Gas Detector
Transmitter
RTC HART Interface
Event Logs
Transmitter updates Transmitter reads

sensor module calibration logs
time / date from sensor
Sensor Module
Calibration Logs GREEN LED (ON)
YELLOW LED (OFF)

Figure 1—GT3000 Logging
A2450
Transmitter Logging Capability Figure 3— Location of LEDs on GT3000 Gas Detector
The transmitter logs the following events with a time

Magnetic Switch
and date stamp:
• Power-up The GT3000 is furnished with an internal magnetic reed
switch as part of the user interface. The magnetic switch
• Sensor change allows the user to initiate calibration by momentarily
• All Faults. placing a magnet against the housing at the designated
location. See Figure 2.
HART Communication
LEDs
The transmitter supports HART communication on the
4‑20 mA loop. This allows for configuration capability The GT3000 has one green and one yellow LED
and provides device status information, calibration, and (See Figure 3). The LEDs are used to signal normal,
diagnostics capabilities. The GT3000 is compatible calibration, and fault conditions. See Table 2.
with HART interface devices such as a HART handheld
communicator, the Det-Tronics UD10 or UD20 Display Note
Unit, or an AMS system. (See Appendix G for HART The GT3000 does not have alarm setpoints and,
menu structure.) therefore, does not have a red LED.
Table 2—LEDs and Analog Output

During Various Operating Conditions
Analog
Function Green LED Yellow LED 4-20 Signal
Output
MAGNETIC
SWITCH Warm-up* Single Flash On 3.5***
Normal
Steady On Off 4-20
Operation
Fault
Off On 3.5***
Condition
Calibration Off See Table 5 3.8**
No Power Off Off 0
B2443
*Warm-up time can last up to 150 seconds.
**O2 sensor generates 17.3 mA during calibration.
Figure 2—Location of Magnetic Switch on GT3000 Detector ***2.45 for TYPE OUTPUT "29", reference GTX Model Matrix .
11.1 3 95-8616
specifications 6.2
(15.8)
5.6
(14.3)
sensor and transmitter
Available Sensors—
Refer to Appendix F. 2.5
(6.4)
Cross Sensitivity—
See Appendix F for Cross Sensitivity information.
B2397
calibration— Figure 4—Dimensions of GT3000 Gas Detector in Inches (CM)

Sensors are calibrated at the factory. Gas type and
range are read by the transmitter. Field calibration is
initiated at the detector, at the UD10/UD20 Universal Pressure range—
Display Unit, or by some other HART interface device. Atmospheric ±10%.
operating voltage— Ingress Protection—

24 volts dc nominal. (12 Vdc minimum, 30 Vdc maximum). IP66.
Maximum ripple is 2 volts peak-to-peak.
If using the HART function, the installation must comply electro-magnetic compatibility—
with the HART power standard. EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
EN55011 (Emissions)
power consumption— EN50270 (Immunity).
0.8 watt maximum @ 30 Vdc.
Thread options—
current output— 3/4" NPT or M25.
• 4-20 mA (Normal operating mode).
ENCLOSURE MATERIAL—
• 3.8 mA indicates calibrate mode. GTX Transmitter: 316 Stainless Steel
• 3.5 mA or less indicates a fault condition (2.45 mA GTS Sensor Module: PPA (30% carbon filled).
option available).
Dimensions—
maximum loop resistance— See Figure 4.
300 ohms at 18 Vdc, 600 ohms at 24 Vdc.
WARRANTY—(For the GTX and GTS)
Wiring— 12 months from date of installation or 18 months from
The transmitter has flying leads, 20” long, 600V insulation. date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
Colors: Red = V+
Black = V–
CERTIFICATIONs—
Green = earth ground
Gauge: 22 AWG (red and black) ®
16 AWG (green).
Warm-up—
Warm-up time can last up to 150 seconds.
For complete approval details, refer to the appropriate
operating temperature— Appendix:
See Appendix F.
Appendix A - FM
Storage Temperature— Appendix B - CSA
Transmitter: –55°C to +75°C (–67°F to +167°F) Appendix C - ATEX
Sensor: 0°C to +20°C (+32°F to +68°F). Appendix D - IECEx
Ideal: +4°C to +10°C (+39°F to +50°F). Appendix E - Other Approvals
Humidity range—
15 to 90% RH.
11.1 4 95-8616
Important Safety Notes Liabilities
The manufacturer’s warranty for this product is
CAUTION void, and all liability for proper function of the
The wiring procedures in this manual are intended detector is irrevocably transferred to the owner or
to ensure proper functioning of the device under operator in the event that the device is serviced or
normal conditions. However, because of the repaired by personnel not employed or authorized
many variations in wiring codes and regulations, by Detector Electronics Corporation, or if the
total compliance to these ordinances cannot be device is used in a manner not conforming to its
guaranteed. Be certain that all wiring complies intended use.
with the NEC as well as all local codes. If in
doubt, consult the authority having jurisdiction Caution
before wiring the system. Installation must be Observe precautions for handling electrostatic
done by a properly trained person. sensitive devices.
CAUTION NOTE
This product has been tested and approved The sensor housing is made of Polyphthalamide
for use in hazardous areas. However, it must (PPA), 30% carbon filled (Material Manufacturer
be properly installed and used only under the RTP). Questions regarding chemical resistance
conditions specified within this manual and should be addressed to:
the specific approval certificates. Any device www.det-tronics.com
modification, improper installation, or use in a US toll free 800-468-3244 or 952-941-5665
faulty or incomplete configuration will render
warranty and product certifications invalid.
CAUTION
The GT3000 contains no field repairable
components. User performed service is limited
to replacement of the gas sensor module.
CAUTION
Hazardous location temperature limits exceed
the product operational temperature limits. If the
sensor is exposed to temperatures beyond the
operational temperature limits listed in Appendix
F, then the sensor module (GTS) should be
replaced or a response test, as described in
the GT3000 Safety Manual (95-8685), shall be
performed.
11.1 5 95-8616
Installation The most effective number and placement of detectors
varies depending on the conditions on site. The
The gas detector can be installed either in a stand‑alone individual designing the installation must often rely
configuration as a loop powered device, or it can be on experience and common sense to determine the
connected to a UD10/UD20 Universal Display Unit. detector quantity and best locations to adequately
protect the area. Note that it is typically advantageous
note to locate detectors where they are accessible for
The gas detector housing must be electrically maintenance. Locations near excessive heat or
connected to earth ground. A dedicated earth vibration sources should be avoided if possible.
ground wire is provided on the transmitter for
connection to earth ground or to a grounded Final suitability of possible gas detector locations
housing. should be verified by a site survey. If any questions
arise regarding installation, please contact the factory.
The detector must always be installed per local
installation code.
Device Mounting Orientation
Before installing the gas detector, define the following The gas detector must be mounted in a vertical position
application details: only, with the sensor pointing down (See Figure 5).
Identification of vapor(s) to be detected Important

It is necessary to always identify the vapor(s) of interest The sensor should be oriented with the LEDs
at the job site. In addition, the fire hazard properties facing forward so they are easily visible to
of the vapor, such as vapor density, flashpoint, and personnel within the area. To ensure correct
vapor pressure should be identified and used to assist orientation (the LEDs are not visible when power
in selecting the optimum detector mounting location is off), position the GND lug on the left hand side
within the area. and the calibration notch to the front. Note that the
LEDs are located directly above the calibration
notch.
Identification of detector mounting
locations
Identification of the most likely leak sources and
leak accumulation areas is typically the first step in
identifying the best detector mounting locations. In
addition, identification of air current/wind patterns
within the protected area is useful in predicting gas leak
dispersion behavior. This information should be used
to identify optimum sensor installation points.
If the vapor of interest is lighter than air, place the sensor

above the potential gas leak. Place the sensor close to
the floor for gases that are heavier than air. Note that air
currents may cause a gas that is slightly heavier than GND LUG
air to rise under some conditions. Heated gases may
also exhibit the same phenomenon.
GREEN LED
CALIBRATION NOTCH
B2436
Figure 5—Correct Mounting Orientation for the GT3000
11.1 6 95-8616
Detector installation SENSOR termination box
A Det-Tronics sensor termination box (Model STB)
3/4" NPT Models
is required for installing the sensor in a stand alone
3/4" NPT models have Tapered Threads and no Lock configuration, or for installing the GT3000 remotely
Nut. Install the sensor as follows: from the UD10/UD20 Universal Display Unit.
1. Screw the detector into the appropriate entry on When installing the GT3000 remotely from a UD10/
the termination box. Ensure a minimum of 5 fully UD20, two‑conductor shielded cable is required to
engaged threads. Use of teflon tape on NPT threads prevent possible nuisance EMI/RFI. The maximum
is recommended to prevent thread damage. cable length between the GT3000 and the UD10/UD20
is 2000 ft.
2. When the detector gets tight, note the position of the
LEDs, GND lug and calibration notch and adjust the
detector as required so that the LEDs will be easily WIRING
visible.
power SUPPLY requirements
M25 Models
Calculate the total gas detection system power
M25 models have Straight Threads and a Lock Nut. consumption rate in watts from cold start-up. Select a
Install the detector as follows: power supply with adequate capability for the calculated
load. Ensure that the selected power supply provides
1. Screw the detector lock nut as far back as it will go, sufficient regulated and filtered output power for the
then screw the detector into the appropriate entry entire system. If a back-up power system is required, a
on the termination box. Ensure a minimum of 7 fully float‑type battery charging system is recommended. If
engaged threads. an existing source of power is being utilized, verify that
system requirements are met.
2. With the detector in the desired position (LEDs
visible as shown in Figure 5), tighten the lock nut note
against the termination box to hold the detector The power supply must also meet the noise
securely in place. requirements for HART systems.
3. Tighten the set screws (minimum of two) to prevent

Wiring cable requirements
movement of the lock nut. See Figure 6.
Always use proper cabling type and diameter for input
power as well as output signal wiring. 22 to 14 AWG
shielded stranded copper wire is recommended.
Always install a properly sized, master power fuse or

breaker on the system power circuit.
note
The use of shielded cable in conduit or shielded
armored cable is highly recommended. In
applications where the wiring is installed in
conduit, dedicated conduit is recommended.
Avoid low frequency, high voltage, and
non‑signaling conductors to prevent nuisance
EMI problems.
Set Screws
caution
The use of proper conduit installation techniques,
Figure 6—Location of Lock Nut and Set Screws breathers, glands, and seals is required to prevent
(Metric Models Only) water ingress and/or maintain the explosion-proof
rating.
11.1 7 95-8616
Intrinsic SafeTy Barriers Guidelines for Intrinsic Safety Wiring
When the GT3000 is used in an intrinsically safe Intrinsically safe systems must be installed in
installation, care must be taken when selecting an I.S. accordance with the approved control drawings for
barrier to ensure proper function of the device. The the field equipment and the intrinsic safety barriers.
GT3000 has been tested with the types of barriers listed Capacitance and inductance of interconnecting wiring
must always be included in wiring calculations.
in Tables 3 and 4.
Shielded twisted pair cables with at least 18 AWG
Table 3 lists zener barriers. The third column gives the conductors are recommended to ensure circuit
range of input voltage to the barrier. The upper limit is performance.
set by the barrier. The lower limit is limited by voltage
drops in the 4-20 mA loop with a maximum of 10 Ohms The intrinsically safe conductors must be separated
of resistance in each leg of the loop. from all other wiring by placing them in separate
conduits or raceways, or by an airspace of at least 2
Table 4 lists isolating barriers that provide a wider range inches (50 mm). When located within an enclosure, the
of input power supply voltages and are less dependent conductors can be separated by a grounded metal or
on voltage drops in the loop. Input voltage to the barrier insulated partition. Wires must be tied down to prevent
loosening and/or shorting.
is specified by the barrier manufacturer.
Intrinsically safe wiring must be identified. Raceways,
For additional information regarding proper IS cable trays, open wiring, and terminal boxes must be
installation, refer to the Control Drawings in Appendix labeled as Intrinsically Safe. Intrinsically safe wiring
H of this manual. may be light blue in color when no other conductors
colored light blue are used.
Wiring enclosures should be located as close as

possible to the hazardous area to minimize cable runs
and reduce total capacitance of the wiring.
A high quality intrinsic safety ground is required. Some

Table 3—Acceptable Intrinsic Safety Barriers
general rules for grounding intrinsically safe systems are:
for use with GT3000 – Zener Barriers • The maximum impedance of the grounding
conductor between the barrier ground terminal and
Manufacturer P/N
the main ground point must be less than 1 ohm.
Turck MZB87PX
• The grounding conductor must be a minimum of 12
MTL MTL7787P+ AWG.
Pepperl & Fuchs Z787.h • Redundant grounding conductors are recommended
to facilitate testing of the ground connection.
• The grounding conductor should be insulated and
protected from the possibility of mechanical damage.
Wiring Procedure
Table 4—Acceptable Intrinsic Safety Barriers
for use with GT3000 – Isolating Barriers Wire the transmitter as shown in Figures 7 through 12.
Manufacturer P/N
Caution
Turck IM33-11Ex-Hi If ripple on the main power source causes
MTL 5541 interference with the HART function, the use
of an isolated power source (Figure 12) is
Pepperl & Fuchs KCD2-STC-Ex1
recommended for best HART performance.
Stahl 9160/13-10-11
11.1 8 95-8616
SENSOR TERMINATION BOX
GREEN
+
RED
24 VDC
BLACK
D
–
RE
K
SEE NOTES 2 & 3
AC
BL
SEE NOTE 1
RED
BLACK
NOTE 1 GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE POWER SOURCE

END ONLY.
NOTE 2 250 OHM RESISTOR REQUIRED FOR HART

MENU ACCESS.
NOTE 3 EXTERNAL HART COMMUNICATION DEVICES

CAN BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE 250 OHM
GT3000 RESISTOR OR ACROSS THE GT3000.
GAS DETECTOR
NOTE 4 JUNCTION BOX MUST BE ELECTRICALLY
A2502
CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND.
Figure 7—GT3000 Wired to Sensor Termination Box in Stand-Alone Configuration (Explosion-Proof)
HAZARDOUS LOCATION NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
+
INTRINSIC
BARRIER
GREEN
SAFETY
RED
24 VDC
BLACK
D
–
RE
SEE NOTES 2 & 3

AC
BL
SEE NOTE 1
RED
BLACK

END ONLY.

MENU ACCESS.
NOTE 3 EXTERNAL HART COMMUNICATION DEVICES

CAN BE CONNECTED ACROSS THE 250 OHM
GT3000 RESISTOR OR ACROSS THE GT3000.
GAS DETECTOR
A2530
Figure 8— GT3000 Wired to Sensor Termination Box in Stand-Alone Configuration (Intrinsically Safe)
11.1 9 95-8616
UD20 DISPLAY UNIT
+ J2-6 +
SEE NOTES 2 & 3 24 VDC
POWER – J2-5 –
LOOP
SHIELD J2-4
SEE NOTE 5
RED +
J2-3
BLACK SENSOR
J2-2 – LOOP
GREEN SEE NOTE 1
J2-1 SHIELD
J2
NOTE 1 CONNECT THE GREEN DETECTOR LEAD TO THE

CHASSIS GROUND LUG ON THE INSIDE BOTTOM
OF THE UD20 DISPLAY UNIT ENCLOSURE.

MENU ACCESS.
GT3000
GAS DETECTOR NOTE 3 EXTERNAL HART COMMUNICATION DEVICES CAN BE
CONNECTED ACROSS THE 250 OHM RESISTOR,
ACROSS J2-5 AND J2-6, OR ACROSS J2-2 AND J2-3.


END ONLY. B2478
Figure 9—GT3000 Wired Directly to UD20 Display Unit (Explosion-Proof)
UD20 DISPLAY UNIT
+ J2-6 +
24 VDC
POWER – J2-5 –
LOOP SEE NOTES 2 & 3
SHIELD J2-4
SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 1
GREEN J2-3 +
RED
BLACK
SENSOR
D
–
RE
J2-2
LOOP
K
AC
BL
J2-1 SHIELD
RED
BLACK
J2

END ONLY.

MENU ACCESS.
NOTE 3 EXTERNAL HART COMMUNICATION DEVICES CAN BE

CONNECTED ACROSS THE 250 OHM RESISTOR,
GT3000 ACROSS J2-5 AND J2-6, OR ACROSS J2-2 AND J2-3.
GAS DETECTOR
NOTE 4 JUNCTION BOXES MUST BE ELECTRICALLY
CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND. D2408
Figure 10—GT3000 with Sensor Termination Box Wired to UD20 Display Unit (Explosion-Proof)
11.1 10 95-8616
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION
BLACK
RED
UD10
DISPLAY UNIT GREEN
Sensor Connector
J3-1
J3-2
J3-3
J3-4
J3-5
J3
CALIBRATE
24 VDC –
SHIELD
24 VDC +
4-20 mA
Output Loop SEE NOTE 1
Connector
HIGH ALARM COM J4-1
P1-3 4-20 mA +
HIGH ALARM NC J4-2
P1-2 4-20 mA – HIGH ALARM NO J4-3
PLC 4-20 mA INPUT CARD AUX ALARM COM J4-4
Relay Connector
P1-1 SHIELD
AUX ALARM NC J4-5
P1
AUX ALARM NO J4-6
LOW ALARM COM J4-7

J2
GT3000
LOW ALARM NC J4-8
COM
INPUT J2-3
LOW ALARM NO J4-9 GAS DETECTOR
J2-2 RS485 A FAULT COM J4-10
4-20 mA
FAULT NC J4-11
J2-1 RS485 B
– FAULT NO J4-12
24 VDC –
24 VDC –
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
250 24 VDC MODBUS
SHIELD
SHIELD
J4
OHMS + Connector
MINIMUM
P2-6
P2-5
P2-4
P2-3
P2-2
P2-1
P2
P12
Power Supply Connector
Notes: Resistor may be external if voltage input card is used. NOTE 1 CONNECT THE GREEN DETECTOR LEAD
Sinking resistance at PLC must be 250 ohms minimum TO THE CHASSIS GROUND LUG ON THE
INSIDE BOTTOM OF THE DISPLAY UNIT
for HART communication.
ENCLOSURE.
NOTE 2 JUNCTION BOXES MUST BE ELECTRICALLY

C2453 CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND.
Figure 11—GT3000 Wired Directly to the UD10 Display Unit / UD10 Wired to PLC with 4-20 mA Non-Isolated Sourcing Output
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION
BLACK
RED
UD10
DISPLAY UNIT GREEN
Sensor Connector
J3-1
J3-2
J3-3
J3-4
J3-5
J3
CALIBRATE
24 VDC –
SHIELD
24 VDC +
4-20 mA
Output Loop SEE NOTE 1

Connector
HIGH ALARM COM J4-1
P1-3 4-20 mA +
HIGH ALARM NC J4-2
P1-2 4-20 mA – HIGH ALARM NO J4-3
PLC 4-20 mA INPUT CARD AUX ALARM COM J4-4

Relay Connector
P1-1 SHIELD
AUX ALARM NC J4-5
P1
AUX ALARM NO J4-6
LOW ALARM COM J4-7

J2
GT3000
LOW ALARM NC J4-8
COM
INPUT J2-3
LOW ALARM NO J4-9 GAS DETECTOR
J2-2 RS485 A FAULT COM J4-10
4-20 mA
FAULT NC J4-11
J2-1 RS485 B
– FAULT NO J4-12
24 VDC –
24 VDC –
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
250 24 VDC MODBUS

SHIELD
SHIELD
J4
OHMS + Connector
MINIMUM
P2-6
P2-5
P2-4
P2-3
P2-2
P2-1
P2
P12
Power Supply Connector NOTE 1 CONNECT THE GREEN DETECTOR
LEAD TO THE CHASSIS GROUND
LUG ON THE INSIDE BOTTOM OF
Notes: Resistor may be external if voltage input card is used. THE DISPLAY UNIT ENCLOSURE.
Sinking resistance at PLC must be 250 ohms minimum
for HART communication. – NOTE 2 JUNCTION BOXES MUST BE
24 VDC ELECTRICALLY CONNECTED
C2479 +
TO EARTH GROUND.
Figure 12—GT3000 Wired Directly to the UD10 Display Unit / UD10 Wired to PLC with 4-20 mA Isolated Sourcing Output
11.1 11 95-8616
Calibration The calibration process proceeds automatically after
initiation. Onboard LEDs signal the operator when to
GT3000 Calibration apply the calibration gas and inform of the progress.
The GT3000 supports one person calibration, which The calibration can be aborted by activating the
can be initiated locally using a calibration magnet, or magnetic switch or with a command from the HART
remotely with a command from the HART interface. communication device in lieu of applying the calibration
The calibration process is automatic, with the exception gas.
of gas delivery. LEDs on the transmitter guide the
operator when to apply and remove the calibration gas If the calibration process takes longer than 10 minutes,
See Table 5. the detector will time-out and signal a calibration fault.
note If the calibration sequence is aborted or not completed

The HART interface allows the operator to adjust successfully, the detector reverts back to the previous
the calibration gas concentration within the range calibration values and signals a calibration fault. The
of 30 to 90% full scale. The default value for all calibration fault can be cleared by activating the
gas sensors except oxygen is 50% full scale. magnetic switch for one second or by performing a
Oxygen sensors use a default value of 20.9%. successful calibration.
All GT3000 gas detectors require a two-point The calibration process can fail for the following
calibration — zero and span. The calibration process causes:
can be initiated using the magnetic switch or through a • Zero is out of range
HART interface, such as the UD10/UD20. All sensors,
• Span is out of range
including oxygen, should be in clean air (20.9% oxygen)
when the calibration sequence is initiated. • Time-Out.
The time and date of calibration events are logged in

non‑volatile memory along with the calibration outcome.
Possible calibration scenarios include the following:
Table 5— LEDs During Calibration • Successful Calibration
Calibration Step Yellow LED • Aborted Calibration
• Failed Calibration and the Cause
Waiting for Zero Steady
The Sensor Module stores calibration data in non‑volatile
Waiting for Gas Blinking memory to allow the sensor to be calibrated off‑site and
Waiting for Span Blinking installed in the field without the need for re‑calibration.
Remove Cal Gas Off
11.1 12 95-8616
Calibration Procedure NOTE
The calibration procedure must be completed
note
within a ten minute period. If the calibration is not
When attaching or removing the calibration cup,
completed, a calibration fault will be generated
push or pull the cup with a slight clockwise twist.
and the transmitter will continue to use the
Turning counterclockwise can cause the filter
previous calibration data.
assembly on the GT3000 to loosen. If the filter
assembly is inadvertently loosened, tighten it by
NOTE
hand (no tools required).
To ensure reliable detection performance,
calibration should be performed at regularly
Toxic and Hydrogen Sensors scheduled intervals. Various factors affect
the time interval between periodic calibrations
1. Clean air must be present at the GT3000 sensor (typically 30, 60, or 90 day intervals, depending
module prior to initiating calibration. The use of on the ambient conditions).
bottled air is recommended.
note
2. Initiate calibration by momentarily holding the Calibration of ammonia sensor is recommended
calibration magnet against the designated location any time the sensor has been exposed to 90 ppm
on the sensor module (see Figure 13) until the ammonia.
green LED turns off and the yellow LED turns on
steady (approximately one second). Remove
the magnet when the green LED turns off. The Oxygen Sensor
detector immediately begins taking zero readings. 1. Using the magnet, activate the magnetic calibration
Calibration can also be initiated via HART interface switch on the GT3000. The green LED turns off and
(see Appendix G) or the UD10 (see manual number the yellow LED turns on steady.
95-8618).
2. The device automatically performs the zero
3. When the zero calibration is complete, the yellow calibration.
LED changes from steady to blinking. Apply the
calibration gas to the sensor. 3. When the yellow LED on the GT3000 flashes, the
device automatically performs the span calculation.
4. When the yellow LED turns off, remove the calibration If using bottled 20.9% oxygen, apply immediately.
gas. The gas level at the sensor gradually returns to
zero. The green LED turns on steady to indicate that 4. After successful calibration, the yellow LED turns off
the device has returned to normal operation, using and the green LED turns on steady to indicate that
the new calibration data. the device has returned to normal operation, using
the new calibration data. Remove calibration gas (if
used).
LED
PLACE MAGNET HERE

TO ACTIVATE INTERNAL
MAGNETIC SWITCH
B2452
Figure 13—Location of Magnetic Switch on GT3000 Detector
11.1 13 95-8616
Maintenance Important
Always exercise caution when working in
note combustible gas areas. Follow replacement
Refer to the GT3000 Safety Manual (number instructions explicitly.
9 5 - 8 6 8 5 ) fo r s p e c i fi c re q u i re m e n t s a n d
recommendations applicable to the proper note
installation, operation, and maintenance of all Removing the sensor module with power applied
SIL‑Certified GT3000 gas detectors. will result in a fault condition until a new sensor
module of the same type is installed. When
replacing an oxygen sensor, this action will result
Routine Inspection
in an alarm condition as the decreasing 4-20 mA
The gas inlet to the sensor should be inspected signal passes through the alarm range. Inhibit
periodically, or during scheduled maintenance, to response devices to prevent unwanted actuation.
ensure that external obstructions such as plastic bags,
litter, heavy oil and tar, paint, mud, snow, or other NOTE
materials do not block the flow of gas to the sensor, Oxygen (O2) electrochemical sensors contain
thereby impairing the performance of the device. lead (Pb). Observe all local waste management
requirements when disposing of exhausted O2
To replace a dirty or damaged filter, simply grasp the electrochemical sensors.
filter assembly and twist counterclockwise to remove.
Screw the new filter in place on the sensor module. Do note
not overtighten. See Figure 14. Electrochemical sensors are highly sensitive to
antiseptic wipes and/or cleaning products that
To ensure reliable protection, it is important to check and contain alcohol and antibacterial/antiviral agents.
calibrate the detection system on a regularly scheduled Antiseptic products should be removed from
basis. The frequency of these checks is determined by areas where sensors are stored, handled, or
the requirements of the particular installation – typically used. If antiseptic products are being used on
30, 60, or 90 day intervals, depending on the ambient workers' hands, sufficient time should be allowed
conditions. for the alcohol to evaporate before handling
sensors.
Sensor module replacement
(Live Maintenance)
The hot swappable, intrinsically safe sensor module
can be replaced in the field without removing power or
de‑classifying the hazardous area.
To replace the sensor module, locate the three captive

screws on the front of the module as shown in Figure
15. Loosen these screws and remove the old sensor
module. Install the new sensor module onto the
transmitter, and tighten the screws. To ensure proper
moisture ingress protection and grounding of the plastic
nosepiece, tighten the screws to 70-100 oz-in (0.5-0.7
N-m).
TURN FILTER COUNTERCLOCKWISE

TO REMOVE. NO TOOLS REQUIRED.
LOOSEN CAPTIVE PHILLIPS

SCREWS (3) TO REMOVE
SENSOR MODULE.
A2481 B2451
Figure 14—GT3000 with Replaceable Filter Removed Figure 15—Location of Screws for Sensor Module Replacement
11.1 14 95-8616
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN Calibration Kits for Gas Sensors
Part Number Gas / Concentration
Prior to returning devices, contact the nearest local
010274-001 H2S / 10 ppm
Detector Electronics office so that a Return Material
010274-002 H2S / 25 ppm
Identification (RMI) number can be assigned. A
010274-003 H2S / 50 ppm
written statement describing the malfunction must
010274-008 H2 / 500 ppm
accompany the returned device or component to
010274-009 O2 / 20.9%
assist and expedite finding the root cause of the
010274-010 CO / 50 ppm
failure.
010274-011 CO / 250 ppm
010274-005 NH3 / 50 ppm
Pack the unit properly. Always use sufficient packing
010274-006 NH3 / 250 ppm
material. Where applicable, use an antistatic bag as
010274-013 SO2 / 10 ppm
protection from electrostatic discharge.
010274-014 SO2 / 50 ppm
010274-004 Cl2 / 5 ppm
note
010274-016 NO2 / 10 ppm
Inadequate packaging that ultimately causes
damage to the returned device during shipment Replacement gas cylinders for all calibration kits are
will result in a service charge to repair the damage available.
incurred during shipment.
Parts & Accessories
Return all equipment transportation prepaid to the
factory in Minneapolis. Part Number Description
009700-001 Magnetic Tool
NOTE 009737-001 Calibration Cup
It is highly recommended that a complete spare 107427-059 Calibration Cup O-ring
be kept on hand for field replacement to ensure 101678-007 3 Foot Tubing
continuous protection. 162552-001 Regulator, 1 LPM
009640-001 Replacement Filter
ORDERING INFORMATION 012509-001 Q312 Sample Draw without Fittings
012509-002 Q312 Sample Draw with Fittings
Sensor module (GTS) and transmitter (GTX) must be 010780-003 GT3000 Remote Calibration Adaptor
ordered separately. Refer to the Transmitter and Sensor 010783-001 GT3000 Remote Calibration Filter
Model Matrix on next page for ordering details. 012513-XXX* Q912 Duct Mount Enclosure, M25
012514-XXX* Q912 Duct Mount Enclosure, 3/4"
GTS Gas Sensors *Refer to the Product Catalog for a list of options.
Gas Concentration
Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) 0-20 ppm Assistance
Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) 0-50 ppm For assistance in ordering a system to meet the needs
of a specific application, contact:
Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) 0-100 ppm
Oxygen (O2)* 0-25% V/V Detector Electronics Corporation
Carbon Monoxide (CO) 0-100 ppm 6901 West 110th Street
Carbon Monoxide (CO) 0-500 ppm Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
Operator: (952) 941-5665 or (800) 765-FIRE
Ammonia (NH3) 0-100, or 0-500 ppm
Customer Service: (952) 946-6491
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) 0-20 ppm Fax: (952) 829-8750
Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) 0-100 ppm Web site: www.det-tronics.com
Chlorine (Cl2) 0-10 ppm E-mail: det-tronics@det-tronics.com
Hydrogen (H2) 0-1000 ppm
Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) 0-20 ppm
*Oxygen detector for O2 depletion (< 21% V/V) only.
11.1 15 95-8616
GTS Sensor Model Matrix
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GTS Gas Sensor Module
TYPE GAS / RANGE
H2S Hydrogen Sulfide
20P 0 - 20 PPM
50P 0 - 50 PPM
100P 0 - 100 PPM
H2S+ Hydrogen Sulfide
20P 0 - 20 PPM
50P 0 - 50 PPM
100P 0 - 100 PPM
CL2 Chlorine
10P 0 - 10 PPM
NH3 Ammonia
100P 0 - 100 PPM
500P 0 - 500 PPM
H2 Hydrogen
1000P 0 - 1000 PPM
O2 Oxygen
25V 0 - 25 % by Vol
CO Carbon Monoxide
100P 0 - 100 PPM
500P 0 - 500 PPM
SO2+ Sulfur Dioxide
20P 0 - 20 PPM
100P 0 - 100 PPM
NO2 Nitrogen Dioxide
20P 0 - 20 PPM
TYPE APPROVAL*
B INMETRO (Brazil)
C CSA
D DNV
R Russia
S SIL
T SIL/FM/CSA/ATEX/CE/IECEx
W FM/CSA/ATEX/CE/IECEx
* Type Approval can use one or more letters to

designate the Approvals on the product.
11.1 16 95-8616
GTX Transmitter Model Matrix
MODEL DESCRIPTION
GTX Gas Transmitter
TYPE MATERIAL
S Stainless Steel (316)
TYPE THREAD SIZE
N 3/4" NPT
M Metric M25
TYPE OUTPUTS
26 4-20 mA, HART (3.5 mA FAULT)
29 4-20 mA, HART (2.45 mA FAULT)
TYPE APPROVALS
B INMETRO (Brazil)
R Russia
W FM/CSA/ATEX/CE/IECEx
TYPE CLASSIFICATION (Division/Zone)
4 Intrinsically Safe
5 Explosion-Proof
Note: Approvals Type W and B are SIL 2 Capable when used with an H2S or O2 GTS sensor module.
11.1 17 95-8616
Appendix A
FM Approval Description
The following items, functions and options describe the FM approval.
Approval
Electrochemical Gas Detector, GT3000 Series.
Explosion Proof Model

Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, & D (T4).
Class I, Zone 1, AEx d mb [ia Ga] IIC T4.
IP66.
Conduit seal not required.
Acidic atmospheres excluded.
note
The GTX Gas Transmitter module shall be connected directly to a junction box suitable for the area of
installation to provide protection for the flying leads.
Intrinsically Safe Model

IS Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, & D (T4).
Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC (T4).
IP66.
NOTE
In order to maintain the intrinsically safe rating of the transmitter, the device must be powered through an
approved I.S. barrier.
For a list of recommended barrier models, refer to Tables 3 and 4. For additional information regarding
proper I.S. installation, refer to the Control Drawings in Appendix H of this manual.
Performance verified per ANSI/ISA 92.00.01, FM6340/41 and EN50104.
11.1 18 95-8616
Approved Accessories
Part Number Description

010274-001 Gas Calibration Kit, 10 ppm H2S
010274-008 Gas Calibration Kit, 500 ppm H2
010274-009 Gas Calibration Kit, 20.9% O2
010274-010 Gas Calibration Kit, 50 ppm CO
010274-011 Gas Calibration Kit, 250 ppm CO
010274-005 Gas Calibration Kit, 50 ppm NH3
010274-006 Gas Calibration Kit, 250 ppm NH3
010274-013 Gas Calibration Kit, 10 ppm SO2
010274-014 Gas Calibration Kit, 50 ppm SO2
010274-004 Gas Calibration Kit, 5 ppm Cl2
010274-016 Gas Calibration Kit, 10 ppm NO2
009700-001 Magnetic Tool
009737-001 Calibration Cup
107427-059 Calibration Cup O-ring
101678-007 3 Foot Tubing
162552-001 Regulator, 1 LPM
009640-001 Replaceable Filter
11.1 19 95-8616
Appendix B
CSA certification Description
The following items, functions and options describe the CSA approval.
Approval

Class I, Zone 1, AEx d mb [ia Ga] IIC T4.
IP66.
Conduit seal not required.
Acidic atmospheres excluded.
note

Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, & D (T4).
IP66.
NOTE
11.1 20 95-8616
Appendix C
ATEX Approval Description
The following items, functions and options describe the ATEX approval.
Approval

0539
FM
APPROVEDII 2(1)G.
®
Ex d mb [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb IP66.

FM10ATEX0009X.
note

0539
FM
II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga IP66.
APPROVED
®
FM08ATEX0045X.
NOTE
11.1 21 95-8616
Appendix D
IECEx Approval Description
The following items, functions and options describe the IECEx approval.
Approval

Ex d mb [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb IP66.
IECEx FMG 10.0003X.
note

Ex ia IIC T4 Ga IP66.
IECEx FMG 08.0005X.
NOTE
11.1 22 95-8616
Appendix E
Other Approvals
The following items, functions and options describe various other approvals applicable to the GT3000.
SIL Approval
IEC 61508
Certified SIL 2 Capable.
SIL Certification includes H2S and O2 GTS models only. For specific information regarding SIL models, refer to the
GT3000 Safety Reference Manual, form 95-8685.
INMetro (Brazil)

UL-BR 15.0752X
Ex d mb [ia Ga] IIC T4 Gb IP66
Tamb –40°C to +50°C (H2S)
Tamb –20°C to +50°C (other)
note
NOTE
Consideration must be given to overall Gas System Performance Requirements.

UL-BR 15.0404X
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga IP66
Tamb –40°C to +50°C
NOTE
DNV
Type Approval Certificate No. A-12358.
MED
Certificate No. MED-B-6708.
Russia / Kazakhstan / India

Contact Det-Tronics for details.
11.1 23 95-8616
Appendix F
declaration of conformity
For a copy of the original document, please contact the factory.
11.1 24 95-8616
Appendix G
Sensor comparison/Cross Sensitivity
Electrochemical Gas Sensors
Accuracy of
Response Reading Operating Performance
Gas Range Zero Drift
Time1 (Whichever Temperature Range Approved Standard
is Greater)
T20 = ≤7 Sec
Hydrogen Sulfide ±2 ppm or
0-20 PPM T50 = ≤10 Sec. –40°C to +50°C ± 1 ppm/Mo. ISA 92.00.014
(H2S) ±10% of Reading
T90 = ≤16 Sec.
T20 = ≤4 Sec
T90 = ≤16 Sec.
T20 = ≤5 Sec
T90 = ≤21 Sec.
T20 = ≤10 Sec
Hydrogen Sulfide+ ±2 ppm or
(H2S+) ±10% of Reading
T90 = ≤23 Sec.
T20 = ≤6 Sec
T90 = ≤15 Sec.
T20 = ≤6 Sec
T90 = ≤15 Sec.
T50 = 24 Sec. ±4 ppm or
Ammonia (NH3) 0-100 PPM2 –20°C to +40°C ± 2 ppm/Mo. FM63404
T90 = 65 Sec. ±10% of Reading
T50 = 30 Sec. ±4 ppm or Det-Tronics Verified
Ammonia (NH3) 0-500 PPM2 –20°C to +40°C ± 10 ppm/Mo.
T90 = 120 Sec. ±10% of Reading (CSA Exd)
T20 = 7 Sec.
Oxygen (O2) 0-25% V/V3 < 0.5% V/V –20°C to +50°C < 2 %/Mo. BS EN 501044
T90 = 30 Sec.
Carbon T50 = 15 Sec. ±5 ppm or
0-100 PPM –20°C to +50°C ± 2 ppm/Mo. ISA 92.00.014
Monoxide (CO) T90 = 40 Sec. ±10% of Reading
Carbon T50 = 12 Sec. ±5 ppm or
0-500 PPM –20°C to +50°C ± 9 ppm/Mo. ISA 92.00.014
Monoxide (CO) T90 = 25 Sec. ±10% of Reading
Sulfur Dioxide+ T50 = 12 Sec. ±0.6 ppm or Det-Tronics Verified
0-20 PPM –40°C to +55°C ± 0.4 ppm/Mo.
(SO2+) T90 = 30 Sec. ±10% of Reading (CSA Exd)
Sulfur Dioxide+ T50 = 15 Sec. ±0.6 ppm or Det-Tronics Verified
0-100 PPM –40°C to +55°C ± 0.4 ppm/Mo.
(SO2+) T90 = 35 Sec. ±10% of Reading (CSA Exd)
Chlorine T50 = ≤14 Sec. ±0.6 ppm or
0-10 PPM –20°C to +50°C < 0.2 ppm/Mo. FM63404
(Cl2) T90 = ≤34 Sec. ±10% of Reading
Hydrogen T50 = 8 Sec. ±50 ppm or Det-Tronics Verified
0-1,000 PPM –20°C to +40°C ± 20 ppm/Mo.
(H2) T90 = 60 Sec. ±10% of Reading (CSA Exd)
Nitrogen Dioxide T50 = 7 Sec. ±2 ppm or Det-Tronics Verified
0-20 PPM –20°C to +40°C ± 0.1 ppm/Mo.
(NO2) T90 = 31 Sec. ±10% of Reading (CSA Exd)
1 Time to reach percentage of final reading when gas concentration equal to full scale is applied to sensor.
2 Background concentrations of ammonia may shorten lifetime of sensor.
3 Sensor approved for oxygen depletion (< 21% V/V) only.
4 Factory Mutual Performance Approved.
11.1 25 95-8616
Typical Cross Sensitivity of H2S Sensor (0-20 ppm / 0-50 ppm / 0-100 ppm)
Reading
Gas Concentration
H2S H2S+
Carbon monoxide 300 ppm ≤ 2 ppm ≤ 2 ppm
Sulfur dioxide 5 ppm ~ 1 ppm ~ 0 ppm
Nitric oxide 35 ppm < 0.7 ppm ~ 0 ppm
Hydrogen 10000 ppm ≤ 10 ppm
Ammonia 50 ppm ~ 0 ppm
Nitrogen dioxide 5 ppm ~ –1 ppm ~ 0 ppm
Methanol 200 ppm ~ 0 ppm ~ 0 ppm
Typical Cross Sensitivity of NH3 Sensor (0-100 ppm) Typical Cross Sensitivity of NH3 Sensor (0-500 ppm)
Gas Concentration Reading Gas Concentration Reading

Alcohols 1000 ppm 0 ppm Alcohols 1000 ppm 0 ppm
Carbon dioxide 5000 ppm 0 ppm Carbon monoxide 100 ppm 0 ppm
Carbon monoxide 100 ppm 0 ppm Chlorine 5 ppm 0 ppm
Hydrocarbons % Range 0 ppm Nitrogen dioxide 10 ppm 0 ppm
Hydrogen 10000 ppm 0 ppm Sulfur dioxide 20 ppm –40 ppm
Hydrogen sulfide 20 ppm ~ 2 ppm1 Hydrogen 3000 ppm 0 ppm
1 Short time gas exposure in minute range. Hydrogen sulfide 20 ppm 2 ppm
Typical Cross Sensitivity of CO Sensor (0-100 ppm / 0-500 ppm) Typical Cross Sensitivity of SO2 Sensor (0-20 ppm / 0-100 ppm)
Reading Gas Concentration Reading

Gas Concentration
CO Carbon monoxide 300 ppm < 1 ppm
Hydrogen sulfide 15 ppm ~ 45 ppm Nitric oxide 50 ppm 0-5 ppm
Sulfur dioxide 5 ppm ~ 2.5 ppm Nitrogen dioxide 6 ppm < –10 ppm
Nitric oxide 35 ppm ~ 10 ppm Hydrogen Sulfide 25 ppm < 0.1 ppm
Chlorine 1 ppm –1 ppm Chlorine 5 ppm < –2 ppm
Hydrogen 100 ppm < 40 ppm Ammonia 20 ppm 0 ppm
Nitrogen dioxide 5 ppm ~ –3 ppm Hydrogen 400 ppm < 1 ppm
Hydrogen Cyanide 10 ppm < 5 ppm
Acetylene 10 ppm < 30 ppm
Ethene 50 ppm < 45 ppm
Typical Cross Sensitivity of Cl2 Sensor (0-10 ppm) Typical Cross Sensitivity of NO2 Sensor (0-20 ppm)
Gas Concentration Reading Gas Concentration Reading

Carbon monoxide 300 ppm 0 ppm Alcohols 1000 ppm 0 ppm
Hydrogen sulfide 15 ppm ~ –7.5 ppm Carbon dioxide 5000 ppm 0 ppm
Sulfur dioxide 5 ppm 0 ppm Chlorine 1 ppm ≤ 1 ppm
Nitric oxide 35 ppm 0 ppm Nitric oxide 100 ppm 0.4 ppm
Sulfur dioxide 20 ppm 5 ppm
Hydrogen 3000 ppm 0 ppm
For details on other interfering gases, please contact Detector Electronics Corp.
11.1 26 95-8616
Appendix H
HART Communication
HART MENU STRUCTURE

This section displays the menu tree for the GT3000. The menu tree shows the primary commands and options
available when using menu selections of a HART handheld communicator.
11.1 27 95-8616
11.1
General Info
Process Menu 1) Manufacturer xxxxx

2) Model xxxxx
1) Gas Name xxxxx 3) Tag xxxxx DET-TRONICS
2) PV xx yy 4) Descriptor xxxxx
3) PV AO xx yy 5) Message xxxxx
4) PV URV xx yy 6) Final asmbly num xxx
5) PV LRV xx yy 7) Dev id xxxxx
6) SV xx yy
7) TV xx yy
Fault/Status Info
RTC Menu
Status Menu 1) Op Mode xxxxx
2) Cal State xxxxx 1) Seconds xxxxx
1) General Info 3) Snsr Status Byte1 xxxxx 2) Minutes xxxxx
2) Fault/Status Info 4) Snsr Status Byte2 xxxxx 3) Hours xxxxx
3) Device Information 5) Tx Status Byte 1 xxxxx 4) Day xxxxx
4) Sensor Information 6) Tx Status Byte 2 xxxxx 5) Month xxxxx
5) History Info 7) Snsr Fault Byte 1 xxxxx 6) Year xxxxx
6) Debug Menu 8) Snsr Fault Byte 2 xxxxx
9) Tx Fault Byte 1 xxxxx
Tx Fault Byte 2 xxxxx
Write Protect Menu Sensor History
Change the device write
Device Information 1) Snsr Run Hours xxxx
1) Change Write Protect protect setting.
GT3000 Root Menu Setup Menu 2) Write Protect xxxxx 2) Sensor Max Temp xxxx
1) RTC Menu 3) Max Temp Time
1) Process Menu 1) Write Protect Yes/No 2) Write Protect xxxxx 4) Sensor Min Temp xxxx
2) Status Menu 2) Write Protect Menu 3) Universal rev xxxxx 5) Min Temp Time
3) Setup Menu 3) Hart Option Menu Enter Password 4) Fld dev rev xxxxx 6) Snsr Hi Temp Rst xxxx
4) Calibration Menu 4) RTC Menu 5) Software rev xxxxx 7) Snsr Lo Temp Rst xxxx
5) Test Menu 5) Clear Configuration xxxxxxxx 6) Tx Serial Number xxxxx
7) Tx Hardware Rev
Tx History
8) Tx Firmware Rev
9) Tx Running Hrs xxxxx
1) Tx Running Hrs xxxx
Select Option Tx Temperature
2) Tx Max Temp xxxxx
3) Max Temp Time
Disable Sensor Information 4) Tx Min Temp xxxxx
28
Enable 5) Min Temp Time
Change Password 1) Sensor Sensitivity xxxxx
2) Sensor Type xxxxx Cal Log
Hart Option Menu 3) Snsr Serial Num xxxxx
Calibration Menu
4) Snsr Revision xxxxx Cal Log:
Change Password 5) PV USL xxxxx Index xxxx
1) Cal Gas Concentraton xx 1) Tag xxxxx
6) PV LSL xxxxx DD-MM-YY xx-xx-xx
2) Sensor Calibration 2) Descriptor xxxxx
xxxxxxxx 7) Snsr Hardware Rev hh:mm:ss xx:xx:xx
3) Response Factor xxx 3) Message xxxxx
8) Snsr Firmware Rev Cal Code xx
4) Snsr Cal Point Zero xxx 4) Poll Adrs xxxxx
9) Snsr Run Hours xxxxx Zero Value xx
5) Snsr Cal Point Span xxx 5) Date xxxxx
Snsr PPM Hours xxxxx Span Value xx
6) Change Gas Sensor Type 6) Final asmbly num xxxx
Event Log
History Info
Event Log:
1) Snsr History
Index xxxx
2) Tx History
DD-MM-YY xx-xx-xx
3) Read Calibration Log
Test Menu RTC Menu hh:mm:ss xx:xx:xx
4) Read Event Log
Event Code xx
1) Self Test 1) Seconds
2) Response Test 2) Minutes
3) Reset 3) Hours Debug Menu DD Build Version
4) Reset min-max Temps 4) Day
5) Loop Test 5) Month 1) Debug Hart Err Cntr xxxx GT3000 DD
6) D/A Trim 6) Year 2) Debug Modbus Err Cntr Build Version: xx.xx
3) DD Build Version Build Date: xxxxxx
GTX Firmware Version 1.04

Detector Electronics
DD Version 0.10 GT3000 March 16,2009
HART
95-8616
Appendix I
Intrinsic safety ConTrol Drawing — FM

009803-001 Rev. D
11.1 29 95-8616
Intrinsic safety ConTrol Drawing — CSA
009803-002 Rev. B
11.1 30 95-8616
Explosion proof ConTrol Drawing — FM
012555-001 Rev. A
11.1 31 95-8616
95-8616
FlexSonicTM Acoustic X3301 Multispectrum PointWatch Eclipse ® IR FlexVu ® Universal Display Eagle Quantum Premier ®
Leak Detector IR Flame Detector Combustible Gas Detector with GT3000 Toxic Gas Detector Safety System
Corporate Office Phone: 952.946.6491 All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
6901 West 110th Street Toll-free: 800.765.3473 © 2015 Detector Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved.
Minneapolis, MN 55438 USA Fax: 952.829.8750 Det-Tronics manufacturing system is certified to ISO 9001—
www.det-tronics.com det-tronics@det-tronics.com the world’s most recognized quality management standard.
Release 4
Installation Handbook
AutroSafe Interactive Fire Detection System
116-P-ASAFE-INSTALL/DGB Rev. J, 2016-05-09, Autronica Fire And Security AS

COPYRIGHT ©
This publication, or parts thereof, may

not be reproduced in any form, by any
method, for any purpose.
Autronica Fire and Security AS and its

subsidiaries assume no responsibility
for any errors that may appear in the
publication, or for damages arising
from the information in it. No
information in this publication should
be regarded as a warranty made by
Autronica Fire and Security AS. The
information in this publication may be
updated without notice.

publication may be trademarks. They
are used only for identification.
E-1676
This product contains static-sensitive devices. Avoid any electrostatic discharge.
The WEEE Directive
When the marking below is shown on the

product and/or its literature, it means that
the product should not be disposed with
other household wastes at the end of its
life cycle. During waste treatment,
disposal and collection, please separate
the product from other types of wastes
and recycle it responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
This product should not be mixed with
other commercial wastes for disposal.
Installation Handbook, AutroSafe Interactive Fire Detection System, 116-P-ASAFE-INSTALL/DGB Rev. J, 2016-05-09, Autronica Fire and Security
Table of Contents
1. Introduction ...................................................................... 7
1.1 About the Handbook .......................................................................... 7
1.2 The Reader ....................................................................................... 7
1.3 Reference Documentation................................................................. 8
2. Pre-installation ................................................................. 9
2.1 Location ............................................................................................. 9
2.2 Environmental Requirements ............................................................ 9
2.3 Mounting Height / Space Requirement ............................................. 9
3. System Units – Overview ................................................ 10
4. Loop Panels – Overview .................................................. 13
5. Mounting Instructions ..................................................... 14

5.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 14
5.2 Mounting Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420 / Controller BC-420 ...... 15
5.3 Mounting the Operator Panel BS-430 ............................................... 17
5.4 Mounting Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 .............................................. 18
5.5 Mounting Loop Panels (BV-110 and BU-110) ................................... 20
5.6 Mounting Power Cabinet BP-405 ...................................................... 21
5.7 Mounting Power Supply Unit BPS-405 / BPS-410 ............................ 24
5.8 Inserting Text Foils ............................................................................ 25
5.9 Cable Inlets / Outlets ......................................................................... 26
5.10 Cut Out Dimensions for Flush Mounting in a Wall ............................ 27
5.10.1 Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 .................................................... 27
5.10.2 Operator Panel BS-430 ........................................................... 28
6. Power Consumption ........................................................ 29

6.1 Mains Power ...................................................................................... 29
6.1.1 BPS-405 .................................................................................. 29
6.1.2 BPS-410 .................................................................................. 29
6.2 System Units ..................................................................................... 29
6.3 Loop Units ......................................................................................... 29
6.4 Phoenix Ethernet Switches ............................................................... 30
6.5 Power Design Considerations ........................................................... 30
7. Cable Connection Overview............................................ 31
8. Connecting Internal Cables............................................. 32

8.1 Overview – BS-420 / BC-420 ............................................................ 32
8.2 BS-420 / BC-420 ............................................................................... 33
8.2.1 AL_Com+ Connection on Controller Board BSA-400 ............. 33
Installation Handbook, AutroSafe Interactive Fire Detection System, Release 4, 116-P-ASAFE-INSTALL/DGB Rev. J, 2016-05-09,
Page 3
8.2.2 AL_Com+ Connection on Communication Module BSL-
310 .......................................................................................... 33
8.2.3 Multifunction Serial Port Connection on Controller Board
BSA-400 .................................................................................. 34
8.2.4 Multifunction Serial Port Connection on Terminal Block,
List L1 ...................................................................................... 34
8.2.5 Multifunction Serial Port Connection Overview – BSA-400 .... 35
8.3 BC-440 .............................................................................................. 35
8.4 Internal Earth Cabling........................................................................ 36
9. Connecting External Cables ........................................... 37

9.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 37
9.2 Before Connecting Cables ................................................................ 37
9.3 Mains Wiring - Two-pole Disconnect Device..................................... 37
9.3.1 Voltage Selection 115/230VAC on the BPS-405 .................... 38
9.3.2 115/230VAC Voltage BPS-410 ............................................... 38
9.4 AutroFieldBus Connections ............................................................... 39
9.4.1 Connections to BS-420/BC-420 - Terminal Block (List 1)....... 39
9.4.2 Connections to Connector J2, Power Board BSF-400 ........... 40
9.4.3 Example of the Interconnection of Several Power
Cabinets .................................................................................. 40
9.5 Connection of Network Cables (AutroNet) ........................................ 41
9.5.1 AutroNet Redundant Star Topology ........................................ 41
9.5.2 AutroNet Single Star Topology ............................................... 42
9.5.3 AutroNet Ring Topology .......................................................... 43
9.5.4 Connection to Controller Board BSA-400 ............................... 44
9.5.5 Common Earth Connections ................................................... 44
9.6 RS-485 Connections to Terminal Block, List L1 ............................... 45
9.9 24V Power Connections .................................................................... 46
9.9.1 Connections to Controller Board BSA-400 ............................. 46
9.9.2 Connections to Power Board BSF-400 ................................... 47
9.9.3 Power Connection Overview ................................................... 48
9.10 Mains Power Connections................................................................. 49
10. Installing I/O Modules ...................................................... 50

10.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 50
10.2 Front View of I/O Module................................................................... 50
10.3 Mounting / Removing I/O Modules .................................................... 51
10.3.1 General ................................................................................... 51
10.3.2 Mounting ................................................................................. 51
10.3.3 Removing ................................................................................ 52
10.3.4 Before Connecting Cables ...................................................... 52
10.4 Data Sheets - I/O Modules ................................................................ 52
11. Dual Safety Installation ................................................... 53

11.1 Dual Safety System Overview ........................................................... 53
11.2 Rules of Thumb ................................................................................. 53
11.2.1 Example 1: Connections Using AL_Com+ only ...................... 54
11.2.2 Example 2: Connections using both AL_Com+ and
AutroFieldBus .......................................................................... 55
11.3 Connections Overview ...................................................................... 55
11.3.1 Connections – AutroKeeper BN-180....................................... 57
11.3.2 Switch Settings – AutroKeeper BN-180 .................................. 57
Page 4
12. Cable Specifications ........................................................ 58
13. Service and Maintenance ................................................ 59

13.1.1 Monthly Maintenance .............................................................. 59
13.1.2 Annual Service and Maintenance ........................................... 60
13.1.3 SIL2 Approved Systems ......................................................... 61
14. Appendix A - Controller Board BSA_400 ....................... 62

14.1 Circuit Board Layout .......................................................................... 62
14.2 Location inside Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420 ............................. 63
14.3 Description ........................................................................................ 63
14.4 Internal LED Indicators ...................................................................... 64
14.5 Power Input Connector J18 (screw terminal) .................................... 64
14.6 Two-stage Push Button Reset (S5) ................................................... 65
14.7 USB Ports (J10, J11) ......................................................................... 65
14.8 Multifunction Serial Port Connector J3 - AutroFieldBus and
Fault Relay ........................................................................................ 66
14.9 AutroFieldBus Connections ............................................................... 67
14.9.1 Ribbon Cable Connector BSA-400 to Terminal Block L1 ....... 67
14.10 Multifunction Serial Port Dipswitch Settings – Switch S6 (RS-
232, RS-422, RS-485) ....................................................................... 68
14.11 Multifunction Serial Port Dipswitch Settings – Switch S7.................. 68
14.12 RS-485 Connections ......................................................................... 69
14.12.1 Ribbon Cable Connector BSA-400 to Terminal Block L1 .... 69
14.12.2 Switch Setting – Switch S6 and S7 ...................................... 69
14.13 RS-422 Connections ......................................................................... 69
14.13.3 Schematic of port equivalent: ............................................... 70
14.14 RS-232 Connections ......................................................................... 70
14.15 Serial Debug Connector J21 ............................................................. 71
14.16 AL_Com+ Connector J5 .................................................................... 71
14.17 LCD Backlight Connector J17 ........................................................... 72
14.18 Ethernet Ports (RJ-45 Connectors) ................................................... 72
14.18.1 Ethernet Straight Through Cable ......................................... 73
14.19 Fault messages Power Board BSF-400 ............................................ 73
15. Appendix B - Power Supply ............................................ 75

15.1 Power Cabinet and Power Units ....................................................... 75
15.1.1 Power Cabinet BP-405 ........................................................... 75
15.1.2 Power Unit BPS-405 ............................................................... 75
15.1.3 Power Unit BPS-410 ............................................................... 75
15.2 Circuit Board Layout BSF-400 .......................................................... 76
15.3 Description ........................................................................................ 77
15.4 Power Block Diagram – Example ...................................................... 77
15.5 Batteries ............................................................................................ 78
15.5.1 Power Unit BPS-405 ............................................................... 78
15.5.2 Power Unit BPS-410 ............................................................... 79
15.6 Battery Charging ............................................................................... 79
15.7 Button S2 – Start on S2 on Standby Source ..................................... 80
15.8 Configuration Settings ....................................................................... 81
15.9 Dipswitch table – S5 and S6 ............................................................. 82
Page 5
15.10 Connectors ........................................................................................ 83
15.11 Fault Relay Watchdog J26 ................................................................ 84
15.12 Battery Resistance Measurement ..................................................... 85
15.13 Electronic fuses ................................................................................. 85
15.13.1 Power outputs ...................................................................... 85
15.13.2 Battery Input ......................................................................... 86
15.14 Part of an AutroFieldBus Network ..................................................... 86
15.15 Power Unit BPS-405 / BPS-410 as Standalone ................................ 86
Page 6
Introduction
1. Introduction
1.1 About the Handbook
This handbook is intended to provide all necessary information for the
installation of the AutroSafe Interactive Fire Detection System,
Release 4. It also gives detailed information on connections to
Autronica’s local area network (AutroNet) and guidelines for the
installation and addressing of loop units.
Information on the connection of detectors and other loop units to the

detection loop is found in a separate handbook, Connecting Loop
Units, 116-P-CONNECTLOOPUNIT/GBD (pdf filname
connectloopunit_gbd).
Note that this handbook deals with the mechanical and electrical
installation only. All tasks described in the handbook are to be
!
POWER OFF!
performed without applying power to the system.
Power must not be applied before commissioning, refer to
Commissioning Handbook.
The chapter «Service and Maintenance» outlines the recommended

monthly and annual service and maintenance procedures that should
be performed after the system has been commissioned.
1.2 The Reader

The handbook is intended to be used by Autronica Fire and Security
trained service and technical personnel who are responsible for the
installation of the AutroSafe Interactive Fire Detection System,
Release 4.
Page 7
Introduction
1.3 Reference Documentation

The table below shows an overview of the technical marketing
documentation for AutroSafe Interactive Fire Detection System,
Release 4.
Document Name Part number File name

System Description 116-P-ASAFE-SYSTEMD/EGB asafesystemd_egb
Installation Handbook 116-P-ASAFE-INSTALL/DGB asafeinstall_dgb
Commissioning Handbook 116-P-ASAFE-COMMISS/EGB asafecommiss_egb
User Guide, Remote Access 116-P-ASAFE-REMOTEAC/EGB asaferemoteac_egb
Connecting Loop Units 116-P-CONNECTLOOPUNIT/DGB connectloopunit_dgb
Operator’s Handbook 116-P-ASAFE-OPERATE/FGB asafeoperate_fgb
User Guide 116-P-ASAFE-USERGUI/LGB asafeusergui_lgb
Wall Chart 116-P-ASAFE-WALLCHA/LGB asafewallcha_lgb
Menu Structure 116-P-ASAFE-MENUSTR/MGB asafemenustr_mgb
Datasheet; Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420 116-P-BS420/CGB bs420_cgb
Datasheet; Operator Panel BS-430 116-P-BS430/CGB bs430_cgb
Datasheet; Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 116-P-BUBV420/CGB bubv420_cgb
Datasheet; Fire Brigade Loop Panel BU-110 116-P-BU110/CGB bu110_cgb
Datasheet; Information Loop Panel BV-110 116-P-BV110/CGB bv110_cgb
Datasheet; Controller BC-420 116-P-BC420/CGB bc420_cgb
Datasheet; Controller Unit Rack BC-440 116-P-BC440/CGB bc440_cgb
Datasheet; Power Cabinet BP-405 116-P-BP405/CGB bp405_cgb
Datasheet; Power Unit BPS-405 116-P-BPS405/CGB bps405_cgb
Datasheet; Power Unit BPS-410 116-P-BPS410/CGB bps410_cgb
Datasheet; AutroKeeper BN-180 116-P-BN180/CGB bn180_cgb
For detailed technical information on Phoenix Ethernet Switches, refer

to Phoenix Contact web site at
http://select.phoenixcontact.com/phoenix/dwl/dwlfr1.jsp?lang=en
Page 8
Pre-installation
2. Pre-installation
2.1 Location
The Fire Alarm Control Panel or Operator Panel must be located in, or
nearby, the entrance according to local regulations and in consultation
with the fire brigade.
Repeater Panels (Fire Brigade Panels and Information Panels),

Controllers and Power Cabinets must be placed according to local
regulations and in consultation with the fire brigade.
2.2 Environmental Requirements

For information on environmental requirements for AutroSafe
equipment, refer to separate datasheets.
2.3 Mounting Height / Space Requirement

To ensure optimal readability of the Fire Alarm Control Panel's
display, the recommended mounting height of this cabinet top is
approximately 175 cm above the floor. Other panels should be
mounted accordingly.
175 cm
Page 9
System Units – Overview
3. System Units – Overview

For detailed information on each system unit, refer to separate
datasheets.
System Unit Description
Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420
BS-420 is a complete fire alarm control panel with full

operation capabilities. The panel serves as an
operating panel for one or several defined operation
zones. All alarm handling and system features can be
controlled and monitored from the panel.
The panel provides connections for:

 2 Ethernet ports and 2 USB host ports
 1 RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485 serial port for
communication with third party equipment
 1 AutroFieldBus (AFB) interface
 1 AlCom+ interface
 FailSafe relay output
 Power redundant
Dimensions:
HxWxD (mm): 350 x 350 x 194
Operator Panel BS-430
BS-430 serves as an operating panel for one or

several defined operation zones.
All alarm handling and system features can be

controlled and monitored from the panel.
Dimensions:
HxWxD (mm): 350 x 350 x 84
Repeater Panel BU-BV-420
The Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 serves as both a Fire

Brigade Panel and an Information Panel. Settings on a
dipswitch determine the type of panel.
The Fire Brigade Panel displays alarms and allows you

to operate alarms and receive additional information
related to the relevant operation zone.
The Information Panel serves as an indication device

only. It provides information related to the defined
operation zone(s).
Dimensions:
HxWxD (mm): 195 x 350 x 84
Page 10
Controller BC-420
The Controller, BC-420, serves as a connection unit

for the detection loop, alarm sounders, controls and
inputs.
It can accommodate up to a maximum of 12 modules.
The panel provides connections for:

 2 Ethernet ports and 2 USB host ports
 1 RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485 serial port for
communication with third party equipment
 1 AlCom+ interface
Dimensions:
HxWxD (mm): 350 x 350 x 194
Controller BC-440
The Controller Rack Unit BC-440 serves as a

connection unit for the detection loop, alarm sounders,
controls and inputs. It is a variant of the BC-420
Controller prepared for rack installations. Together
with the IO modules the unit will have the full
functionality of the BC-420 Controller.
Dimensions:
3Ux12HPx200mm
Power Cabinet BP-405
The Power Cabinet BP-405 provides space for two

12V/18Ah batteries (not included). The power supply
and battery brackets are already mounted when the
cabinet is delivered from the factory.
The cabinet provides:

 Power Board BSF-400, including:
 AutroFieldBus interface
 115VAC /230VAC input
 6 outputs 24VDC (max. 2A each)
 1 fault relay output
Dimensions:
HxWxD (mm): 420 x 346 x 146
Page 11
Power Unit BPS-405 / BPS-410
BPS-405: 24V/5A power supply

BPS-410: 24V/10A power supply
Both units include:

Dimensions:
HxWxD (mm): 130 x 259 x 120
Page 12
Loop Panels – Overview
4. Loop Panels – Overview

The 100-series provides the following panels and wall brackets:
Information Loop Panel (BV-110)
Mounted onto a wall bracket (UD-732).
Dimensions (mm):
HxWxD (mm): 310 x 154 x 45
Fire Brigade Loop Panel (BU-110)
Mounted onto a wall bracket (UD-732).
Dimensions (mm):
HxWxD (mm): 310 x 154 x 45
Page 13
Mounting Instructions
5. Mounting Instructions
5.1 Introduction
This following chapters deal with the mounting of:
 Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420 / Controller BC-420

 Operator Panel BS-430
 Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 (Fire Brigade Panel / Information
Panel)
 Loop Panels (Information Loop Panel BV-110 and Fire Brigade
Loop Panel BU-110)
 Power Cabinet BP-405
 Power Units BPS-405 and BPS-410
The following is delivered together with the system units:
 Fireman’s key (delivered with all system units, except for BC-420
and BP-405/BPS-405/BPS-410)
 Unbraco key (to lock/unlock the front panel) – (not delivered with
BP-405 /BPS-405/BPS-410)
 Plastic cap to cover the key hole (Repeater Panel only; when
Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 is to be used as an Information Panel)
 11 Rubber glands for entry of external cables
 Text foils
A general description of flush mounting Repeater Panel BU-BV-420

and Operator Panel BS-430 in a wall is described in a chapter 5.10.
For information on mounting the Controller Rack BC-440, refer to

separate datasheet.
E-1676
This product contains static-sensitive devices.

Always use an antistatic wrist strap / earth bracelet to avoid any
electrostatic discharge.
Page 14
5.2 Mounting Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420 /

Controller BC-420
Instructions Remarks Illustrations
 Unlock the front panel In order to easily
access the
by turning the unbraco mounting holes
key clockwise. when mounting
 Open the front panel. the cabinet, the
front panel should
be removed.
 Disconnect both ribbon

cables from the front
panel.
 Unscrew and disconnect Note: Do NOT

unscrew the earth
the earth cable from the cable from the
termination block inside connection point
the cabinet. on the front panel
(PE=Protective
Earth).
 Loosen the 4 wing nuts

located on the right and
left hand side of the
cabinet, then close the
front panel, and remove
the front panel from the
cabinet.
 Mark and drill the 3 The cabinet has 3
mounting holes
holes according to the located at the
illustration. rear. The 2 upper
holes are of key-
hole-type.
 Partly fasten the upper

Page 15

screws.
 Hang the cabinet onto
the upper screws.
 Partly fasten the bottom
screw.
 Tighten all screws.
 Feed all the external For detailed
information on the
cables into the cabinet
connection of
from the top or bottom external cables,
through the suitable see chapter 9.
cable inlets.
 Reassemble the front
panel and tighten the 4
wing nuts.
 Reconnect the cables
between the front panel
and the cabinet.
 Insert the text foils (in For detailed

description of the
the appropriate various text foils,
language) into their see chapter 5.8.
respective positions.
Page 16
5.3 Mounting the Operator Panel BS-430

access the
front panel should
be removed.

unscrew the earth
termination point inside connection point
(PE=Protective
Earth).
 Unscrew the 4 wing nuts

cabinet.
 Mark and drill the 3 The cabinet has 5
mounting holes
holes. located at the
rear. The 3 upper
holes are of key-
hole-type.

screws.
the upper screws.
screw.

information on the
connection of
from the top through the external cables,
suitable cable inlets. see chapter 9.
Page 17

wing nuts.
 Reconnect the earth
cable to the termination
point inside the cabinet
(PE=Protective Earth).

description of the
the appropriate
various text foils,
language) into the their see chapter 5.8.
5.4 Mounting Repeater Panel BU-BV-420

access the
front panel should
be removed.

unscrew the earth
termination point inside connection point
(PE=Protective
Earth).
 Unscrew the 4 wing nuts

cabinet.
 Mark and drill all 3
The cabinet has 5
holes.
mounting holes
located at the
rear. The upper 3
holes are of key-
hole-type.

screws.
the upper screws.
Page 18

screw.
information on
cable
from the top through the connections, see
suitable cable inlets. chapter 9.

wing nuts.
 Reconnect the earth
cable to the termination
point inside the cabinet
(PE=Protective Earth).
 Set the appropriate The Repeater

Panel BU-BV-420
dipswitch settings on
serves as both a
dipswitch S2 (Controller Fire Brigade
Board BSA-400) Panel and an
according to the type of Information Panel.
panel (either a Fire
Brigade Panel or an
Information Panel).
S2
Fire Brigade Panel

S2-1 ON
S2-2 ON
S2-3 OFF
S2-4 OFF
Information Panel
S2-1 ON
S2-2 OFF
S2-3 ON
S2-4 OFF
 If the panel is to be used The Information
Panel is an
as an Information Panel,
indication device
snap the plastic cap on only.
top of the keyhole.
The plastic
covering is
delivered together
with the panel.
description of the
the appropriate various text foils,
language) into the their see chapter 5.8.
Page 19
5.5 Mounting Loop Panels (BV-110 and BU-110)

Instructions Illustrations
 Find the text foils in the relevant
language for the panel, and insert the
text foils in the correct locations (there
are two different foils in one foil kit
 Through the small hole near the slot,
use a small screwdriver or similar to
slightly bend the edge (approx. 1mm) of
each foil until the edge slips behind the
opening of the slot.
 Mount the wall bracket onto the wall.
Make sure to mount the panel onto a wall

with a flat surface in order to maintain IP
rating (IP32).
 Connect AL_Com loop cables to the

correct terminal points on connector J3:
J3-1: In+
J3-2: In-
J3-3: Out+
J3-4: Out-
 Place and centre the lower part of the

panel onto the lower part of the bracket,
then simply push the upper part of the
panel towards the bracket until it snaps
on.
Page 20
5.6 Mounting Power Cabinet BP-405

AutroSafe Release 4 provides a Power Cabinet BP-405 with space for
two 12V/18Ah batteries (not included). The power supply and battery
brackets are already mounted when the cabinet is delivered from the
factory.
The mounting procedure deals with the mounting of the cabinet and
the internal batteries.
Note that the Power Cabinet can be placed under and fastened
directly to a Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420 or a Controller BC-420.
The position of the 11 cable inlets/outlets at the bottom of the
BS-420/BC-420 match exactly with the ones on the top of the Power
Cabinet BP-405.

 Unlock the front door
by unscrewing the
door lock screws
 Open the front door.
 Mark and drill holes. The cabinet has 3 mounting

holes located at the rear.
The 2 upper holes are of
key-hole-type.
 Partly fasten the

upper screws.
the upper screws.
 Partly fasten the
bottom screw.
Page 21

 Insert both batteries in
their appropriate
locations with the
battery poles facing
up and towards the
outside of the cabinet.
 Tighten the strap
around each battery.
 Connect the black Make sure that the correct

black cable is connected to
cable from the
the minus pole, i.e. the one
connector on the
Power Board to the
that is connected to the
Power Board on the other
-
minus pole on the end.
uppermost battery.
 Connect the red cable
from the connector on
the Power Board to
the plus pole on the
lowermost battery.
Page 22

 Power must not be
applied before
commissioning.
+
 At a later stage
(during
commissioning)
!
POWER OFF!
interconnect the other
plus pole and minus
pole on the batteries
with the cable.
 Locate the wire (Part Make sure that the

No. 116-XL-069) sensor itself is
connected to the securely fastened
Power Board (Therm close to the battery.
+ and Therm-), then
fasten the The length of the
temperature sensor temperature sensor
on the other end of wire must not exceed
the cable to the 3m. Make sure that
battery with a piece of the wire is not placed
tape. close to other wires
that conduct high
current, as for
example, wires for
sounder circuits,
230VAC or 24VDC.
Page 23
5.7 Mounting Power Supply Unit BPS-405 / BPS-410

The unit can be mounted inside a rack or consol. The hole and screw
dimensions are shown below.
Note that the BPS-410 Power Supply Unit 24VDC/10A is delivered as

two separate part numbers:
 116-BPS-410 for 230VAC
 116-BPS-410/115 for 115VAC
The dipswitch settings on the Power Board BSF-400 (dipswitch S6-6)

determines the type of power unit.
Dip-switch Name Description

S6-6 Power Unit Type ON: BPS-405
OFF: BPS-410
For further information on dipswitch settings, refer to Appendix B –

Power Supply. Note that when using Power Unit BPS-410 (including a
24V/10A power supply), a calibration procedure must be performed.
Refer to the Commissioning Handbook, Calibration Procedure –
Power Unit BPS-410.
Page 24
5.8 Inserting Text Foils

 Find the text foils in the
relevant language for the
panel in question (foil sheets
are delivered with the panel).
The part numbers are

indicated below.
Example: Foil sheet for BS-420
E-2852
E-2852
E-2855
E-2856
E-2856
E-2853 E-2854
 Make sure that you are holding the textfoil the correct way.
 Bend the small flap towards the panel (as shown on the left most
illustation below), then insert the foil into the appropriate slot, and
slightly push it in as far as possible.
 The foils that are to be inserted into the slot on the righ hand side
of the panel front have a small flap which can easily be bent (along
the perforation holes).
Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420 is shown in the example below.
Page 25
5.9 Cable Inlets / Outlets

When feeding the cables, use whichever is appropriate.
ø29 x 5
ø23 x 6
The illustration above shows the positioning and dimensions of the

cable inlets for BS-420/BC-420 (the uppermost illustration) and
BU-BV-420.
Page 26
5.10 Cut Out Dimensions for Flush Mounting in a Wall

The Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 and Operator Panel BS-430 can be
flush mounted in a wall.
5.10.1 Repeater Panel BU-BV-420

The illustration below shows the cabinet’s cut out dimensions. The
dimensions given include space for the cover frame.
85
Page 27
5.10.2 Operator Panel BS-430

The illustration below shows the cabinet’s cut out dimensions. The
dimensions given include space for the cover frame.
85
Page 28
Power Consumption
6. Power Consumption
6.1 Mains Power
6.1.1 BPS-405
The current consumption at 115V AC is 3,2A.
The inrush peak current consumption is 35A.
6.1.2 BPS-410
The inrush peak current consumption is 35A.
6.2 System Units
System Unit Current Consumption

Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420 156mA/27V DC (idle)
Controller BC-420 Max. 340mA/27V DC
Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 156mA/22,2V DC (idle)
Max. 220mA/27V DC (lamp test)
Operator Panel BS-430 175mA/27V DC (idle)
Max. 340mA/27V DC (lamp test)
Power Board BSF-400 85mA
6.3 Loop Units

For information on the current consumption for various loop units,
refer to technical specifications provided in the relevant datasheets.
Page 29
Power Consumption
6.4 Phoenix Ethernet Switches

A network solution (AutroNet) with more than two panels requires the
use of switches, unless AutroNet Ring Topology is used (refer to
chapter 9.5.3). Only Phoenix Ethernet switches are approved and
supported by Autronica Fire and Security AS. The switch type and the
number of switches depend on the actual installation / network design
(number of panels and the transmission length between the panels /
switches).
For detailed technical information on the power consumption for

Phoenix Ethernet Switches, refer to System Description, AutroSafe
Interactive Fire Detection System.
6.5 Power Design Considerations

The Power Cabinet’s (BP-405) power supply (BPS-405) has 3A
available, as 2A is reserved for battery charging.
The supplies have three different output classes:

 A1/A2, rated 2A each. (May be paralleled for higher current). Will
always be ON except in fault situations.
 B1/B2, rated 2A each. (May be paralleled for higher current)
 C1/C2, rated 2A each. (Cannot be paralleled. Will be turned OFF
during every start-up/initialization.
Output class A1 may be paralleled with A2, and output class B1 may
be paralleled with B2.
The outputs current is limited by the total available current, i.e. on a

BP-405 Power Cabinet with battery, 2A is drawn from output A1, only
1A is available from output A2, and nothing available for the other
outputs.
One BPS-405 unit can be connected to one battery set. A battery set
may NOT be shared by several BPS-405 units.
The outputs from different BPS-405 units cannot be paralleled, as the

power supplies are not designed for this. Earth fail detection will also
fail. Regulations define that battery resistance shall be monitored,
which prevents the use of common battery bank.
The A1/A2 outputs are not affected of a BPS-405 software failure. If

one output (for example, A1) is short-circuited, the other ones are not
affected. This does not apply when two outputs are paralleled, (for
example, A1 and A2), as a short circuit in this case will disconnect
both outputs.
Page 30
Cable Connection Overview
7. Cable Connection Overview
Controller Board 4 -
BSA-400 J18
3 +
2 -
1 +
1
2
3
5
4 Fire Alarm
6
7
8
Control Panel
10
9
8
9
10 TERMINAL BS-420
Power Supply 7
11
12
BLOCK
6 13
Module 5 14
4 - 15
16
BSS-310A
BSS-310A/ 3 -
2 +
17
18
BSS-311 1 + 19
20
The cable connection overview Cat.5

shows a redundant 24V cabling
between BSA-400 and BSF-400,
which is required for cabling
between two different cabinets.
1 AFB A
2 AFB A''
If the 24V cabling is inside the same 3 AFB CT A
cabinet, redundant cabling is not 4 AFB Earth Fault Sense
5 AFB B
required. Single cabling is thus 6 AFB B''
7 AFB CT B
possible (for example, between 8 AFB Earth Fault Sense
A1+/- and J18/1 / J18/ 2).
+
A2
-
+
A1
-
Power Cabinet
BP-405 +
B2 Power Board
-
+
B1
BSF-400
-
+
C2
-
+
C1
-
Batt 1 2 3
+ - + -
+ - + -
12V 12V
Page 31
Connecting Internal Cables
8. Connecting Internal Cables

8.1 Overview – BS-420 / BC-420
Multifunction cable
XGE-1/20-40
AL_Com+ cable
XGE-1/10-50
Page 32
8.2 BS-420 / BC-420
8.2.1 AL_Com+ Connection on Controller Board BSA-400
Connector J5
Cable XGE-1/10-50
8.2.2 AL_Com+ Connection on Communication Module BSL-310
Cable XGE-1/10-50
Page 33
8.2.3 Multifunction Serial Port Connection on Controller Board BSA-400

A ribbon cable is connected between the Multifunction Serial Port
Connector and the main terminal block (mounted on the DIN rail inside
the cabinet).
Connector J3
Multifunction cable XGE-1/20-40
8.2.4 Multifunction Serial Port Connection on Terminal Block, List L1

The ribbon cable from the Serial Port Connection on the Controller
Board is connected to the main terminal block, list L1 (mounted on the
DIN rail inside the cabinet).
Multifunction cable
XGE-1/20-40
Page 34
8.2.5 Multifunction Serial Port Connection Overview – BSA-400

Connection to Description Connector J3 on Controller
terminal block Board BSA-400
(L1)
L1.1 GND J3.1
L1.2 GND J3.2
L1.3 AutroFieldBus B J3.3
L1.4 Multifunction Serial Port RS-422/RS485 A+ J3.4
L1.5 AutroFieldBus B’ J3.5
L1.6 Multifunction Serial Port RS-422/RS485 B- J3.6
L1.7 AutroFieldBus B Reference J3.7
L1.8 Multifunction Serial Port RS-422 X+ J3.8
L1.9 AutroFieldBus A J3.9
L1.10 Multifunction Serial Port RS-422 Z+ J3.10
L1.11 AutroFieldBus A’ J3.11
L1.12 Multifunction Serial Port RS-232 TX J3.12
L1.13 AutroFieldBus A Reference J3.13
L1.14 Multifunction Serial Port RS-232 RX J3. 14
L1.15 GND J3.15
L1.16 Multifunction Serial Port Reference J3.16
L1.17 Fault Relay Normal Open J3.17
L1.18 GND J3.18
L1.19 Fault Relay Normal Closed J3.19
L1.20 Fault Relay Common J3.20
8.3 BC-440
For information on the cabling to AutroSafe Controller Rack BC-440,
refer to separate datasheet.
Page 35
8.4 Internal Earth Cabling
Page 36
Connecting External Cables
9. Connecting External Cables

9.1 Introduction
This chapter deals with the connection of external cables.
For more detailed information regarding the Controller Board BSA-400

and Power Board BSF-400, see Appendix.
9.2 Before Connecting Cables

 Before connecting cables, make sure that the mains power is not
connected.
!  Remove fuse F8 from the power supply in all Power Cabinets.

Do not replace the fuse until commissioning of the system. Refer to
the Commissioning Handbook.
POWER OFF!
9.3 Mains Wiring - Two-pole Disconnect Device

In the fixed mains wiring to the panel a two-pole disconnect device
must be provided to disconnect the equipment from the power supply
when servicing is required. Normally, this switch is a two-pole
automatic fuse located in the fuse terminal box at the premises. This
fuse location must be marked "Fire Alarm System". No other than the
Fire Detection System shall be sourced from this switch.
The isolation of the mains wiring must be of either:

 inflammability class V2
or
 the wiring has to be fixed to the cabinet separated from all other
cables
Page 37
9.3.1 Voltage Selection 115/230VAC on the BPS-405

 Make sure that the mains power is not connected.
 Use a screwdriver to slide the switch to the correct position
! according to the appropriate voltage (115/230VAC).
POWER OFF!
9.3.2 115/230VAC Voltage BPS-410

Note:
The BPS-410 Power Unit 24VDC/10A is delivered as two separate
part numbers:
! 

116-BPS-410 for 230VAC
116-BPS-410/115 for 115VAC
POWER OFF!  Make sure to use the correct unit according to the appropriate
voltage (115/230VAC).
Page 38
9.4 AutroFieldBus Connections
9.4.1 Connections to BS-420/BC-420 - Terminal Block (List 1)

Shielded cable required.
Terminal Function
L1.9 AutroFieldBus A
L1.11 AutroFieldBus A’
L1.13 AutroFieldBus CT A
L1.3 AutroFieldBus B
L1.5 AutroFieldBus B’
L1.7 AutroFieldBus CT B
L1.15 Earth
Terminal block L1 with shielded AutroFieldBus cable
L1.3
AFB Last AFB unit
L1.5
L1.7
L1.9
AFB A First AFB unit
L1.11
L1.13
L1.15
Page 39
9.4.2 Connections to Connector J2, Power Board BSF-400
S5 1 2
AFB Earth Fault Off OFF OFF
AFB Earth Fault On ON ON
J2 J26
1 AFB A
2 AFB A" 1 6
1 Alarm NO
3 AFB CT A 2 Alarm Com
J2 4 AFB Earth Fault Sense 3 RC (Remote test)
5 AFB B 4 Fault Relay NO
6 AFB B" 5 Fault Relay NC
6 Fault Relay Com
7 AFB CT B
8 AFB Earth Fault Sense
F1 A1 F2AL
J19 F2 A2 F2AL
+ 0V
A1
S1 Reset
8 Internal Fault
9.4.3 Example of the Interconnection of Several Power Cabinets

The example below shows the interconnection of two Power Cabinets
on the AutroFieldBus. Note that the AutroFieldBus always goes from
AFB A on the main terminal block inside BS-420/BC-420 to AFB B on
the J2 connector on the Power Board BSF-400, then from AFB A to
the next unit. The cable finally returns to AFB B on the main terminal
block.
Fire Alarm Control

Panel BS-420 / J2.5 J2.1 J2.5 J2.1
Controller BC-420 / J2.6 J2.2 J2.6 J2.2
BC-440
B A Power Cabinet B A
L1.9 A BP-405
L1.11 (Power Board
BSF-400)
L1.3 L1.5 B
Page 40
9.5 Connection of Network Cables (AutroNet)

Each panel provides two ports; Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2. AutroNet
consists of one of the following network topologies:
 AutroNet Redundant Star Topology
 AutroNet Single Star Topology
 AutroNet Ring Topology
9.5.1 AutroNet Redundant Star Topology

The illustration below shows an example of the fully redundant
standard AutroNet, where the following guidelines apply:
 Connect the Ethernet cables for Ethernet 1 to and from the

connections labeled Ethernet 1 (panels and Ethernet switches)
throughout the entire system.
 Connect the Ethernet cables for Ethernet 2 to and from the
connections labeled Ethernet 2 (panels and Ethernet switches)
throughout the entire system.
Ethernet ports on
Controller Board
BSA-400
Ethernet 2
Ethernet 1
Page 41
9.5.2 AutroNet Single Star Topology

As an option, AutroSafe 4 allows also single Ethernet connections to
one or several panels in a system if redundancy is not required.
Ethernet 1 must always be used for single Ethernet connections.
The example below is similar to the one in the previous chapter; all
panels have redundant connections to the system, except for the
Repeater Panel, which has a single Ethernet connection.
 Between the Repeater Panel and the Ethernet switch, make only a
single Ethernet connection to and from Ethernet 1.
 Connect the remaining Ethernet cables as described in the
previous chapter
For single Ethernet connections,

always use Ethernet port 1
Ethernet 1
Page 42
9.5.3 AutroNet Ring Topology

In an AutroNet Ring Topology all panels are connected to each other
forming a closed loop. The first panel is connected to the second, the
second is connected to the third, and so on (preferably from Ethernet
1 to Ethernet 2, from Ethernet 1 to Ethernet 2, from Ethernet 1 to
Ethernet 2 and so on).
A ring topology is a redundant network, as all panels will continue to

operate even with a single break or short-circuit on the ring.
Ethernet ports on
Controller Board
BSA-400
Ethernet 2
Ethernet 1
Page 43
9.5.4 Connection to Controller Board BSA-400
1 2
8 1
The BSA-400 board on all panels provides two separate 10/100Mbit

Ethernet ports. The connector is an RJ-45 modular jack, suitable for
shielded cable CAT5 which allows cable lengths up to 100m.
LED 1 Activity LED

LED 2 If ON, 100MBit/s, if OFF, 10MBit/s
9.5.5 Common Earth Connections

All panels must be connected to a common earth for EMC
compliance.
Fire Alarm Controller BU-BV-420

Control Panel BC-420 / BC-440
BS-420
BU-BV-420
2x2 2x2
24V 24V
Power Cabinet Operator

BP-405 Panel
BS-430
Shielded or armoured cable must be used for the 24V DC power

supply.
Page 44
9.6 RS-485 Connections to Terminal Block, List L1

Twisted pair, shielded cable is required.
Maximum 100Ω resistive loss.
Maximum total length 1200m.
Maximum cable capacitance 150 nF.
Terminal block list L1
RS-485
L1.4 RS-422/RS485 A+ RS485 A+

L1.6 RS-422/RS485 B- RS485 B-
L1.16 Serial Reference Serial Reference

J3.4 RS-422/RS485 A+ RS-422 X+
RX TX
J3.6 RS-422/RS485 B- RS-422 Z-
J3.8 RS-422 X+ RS-422 A+
TX RX
J3.10 RS-422 Z- RS-422 B-
J3.16 Serial Reference Serial Reference
Schematic of port equivalent:
+5v_SER_0
TX_422_X+
Isolation
8
TX_422_Z-
10
RX_422_A+
4
RX_422_B-
6
Signal Reference
16
The protection shown in the schematic of port equivalent above is

made for 1kV High Energy Surge. In addition, the connection is
protected against wrong connections between Serial Reference and
other signals (X->Signal ref, Z->Signal ref, A->Signal ref, B->Signal
ref) for voltage up to 29V DC.
Page 45

Terminal block list L1
RS-232
L1.12 RS-232 TX RS-232 RX

L1.14 RS-232 RX RS-232 TX
L1.16 Serial Reference Serial Reference
9.9 24V Power Connections
9.9.1 Connections to Controller Board BSA-400

24V power is supplied to connector J18 on the Controller Board
BSA-400 on all panels.
J18 From Power Board BSF-400
Redundant cabling:
Connector J18 on Description Connections to Power Board BSF-

Controller Board BSA-400 400
J18.1 +24V In 1 A1 +
J18.2 0V In 1 A1 0V
Interconnection
J18.3 +24V In 2 A2 +
J18.4 0V In 2 A2 0V
Single cabling:
Connector J18 on Description Connections to Power Board BSF-

J18.1 +24V In 1 A1 +
J18.2 0V In 1 A1 0V
Interconnection
J18.3 +24V In 2 A1 +
J18.4 0V In 2 A1 0V
Page 46
9.9.2 Connections to Power Board BSF-400

F1 A1 F2AL
J19 F2 A2 F2AL
+ 0V
A1
S1 Reset
8 Internal Fault
7 General Fault
6
+ 0V
AFB Com
X11
A2
5
High
4 Fuse Fault
3 Battery Fault
2 Mains Fault
X10
J18
Low
J24
1 Power ON
+ 0V
B1
F3 B1 AFB Adress (H & L)
F2AL
J23 F4 B2
+ 0V F2AL
B2
F5 C1
F2AL 1 Earth Fault Sense ON/OFF
J22 2 Battery relay (see manual)
3 AFB present
+ 0V
C1
F6 C2 4
F2AL 5 Battery present
6
1 6
ON
J21 S6 S2, Start on standby
OFF source (see manual)
+ 0V
C2
Charger +24V
Charger 0V
Earth
F8 Charger
F7 F8 F7 Battery
E-2868
BP-410/01 T10 T10
AH AH
BP-405/01 T5 T5
5 Therm.+ AH AH
4 Therm.- 5 1 J17 1 2 3 J25
3 PSF J20
2 -V BATT
1 Vcon + -
Output Connections to Description Intended to be used for:

BSF-400
A1 J19 +24V DC / 2A Monitored panel equipment.
0V
A2 J18 +24V DC / 2A Monitored panel equipment.
0V
B1 J24 +24V DC / 2A External equipment.
0V
B2 J23 +24V DC / 2A External equipment.
0V
C1 J22 +24V DC / 2A External equipment. 3 seconds break at initialization of
0V panel.
C2 J21 +24V DC / 2A External equipment. 3 seconds break at initialization of
0V panel.
Page 47
9.9.3 Power Connection Overview

BSS-311 is required when redundant connection is used.
4 -
BSA-400
Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420 /
+ +
J18
3
2 - - A2 Outputs
+ 2 x 24VDC/2A
1 +
Controller BC-420
- - A1
4
BSS-310A
(BSS-311)
3 -
2 +
+ +
1
- B2 Outputs
24VDC 24VDC
Ethernet - + 2 x 24VDC/2A
B1
switch + -
Power Cabinet BP-405

Ethernet -
switch + Power Board
BSF-400
Inf ormation/Repeater Panels
*
4 -
BSA-400
BU-BV-420 +
J18
BS-430
3 Outputs
- +
2 -
C2 2 x 24VDC/2A
+ w/interrupt
1 1 + at initialization
2 BU-BV-420 - C1 of panel.
3 BU-BV-420
4 BU-BV-420
Charger
Batt
1 2 3
Power to third party 24VDC/2A + -
equipment with input
+ -
voltage 18 – 32VDC 24VDC/2A
Batt Charger
connection
24V
* External panels type BU-BV-420 and BS-430
can be connected both to output A and B.
Devide total power to both A and B.
------ Connected if needed.
Page 48
9.10 Mains Power Connections

Power must not be applied before commissioning, refer to
When applying power during commissioning, always connect the

cables to the batteries in the Power Cabinet BP-405 first, then power
!
POWER OFF!
up the system shortly afterwards by connecting the mains cable to a
mains socket (230V/115V AC) or by switching the power ON from an
external main fuse box.
The connection of mains power (AC) to the Power Cabinet BP-405 is

shown below. Note that the isolation must be kept on the mains cable
as close up to the terminal points (L, N and ) as possible.
L
N
Page 49
Installing I/O Modules
10. Installing I/O Modules
10.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the mounting and removal of I/O
modules.
Note that the internal Power Module (BSS-310A) and the

Communication Module (BSL-310) are already mounted in a fixed
position when the product leaves the factory.
10.2 Front View of I/O Module
Front view when mounted on rail
Screw
terminal 10
Screw
terminal 1
Page 50
10.3 Mounting / Removing I/O Modules
10.3.1 General
Note! Make sure the mains power is OFF!
Note: The Power Module (BSS-310A)

must always be mounted first on the
rail - at the bottom - before any other
modules. The Communication Module
(BSL-310) is then mounted on top of BSL-310
the Power Module. If the optional Dual
Power Monitoring Module BSS-311 is BSS-310A
to be used, this module always has to
be mounted at the bottom – before (BSS-311, optional)
BSS-310A and BSL-310. Fixed Position
All other modules can be mounted in
arbitrary order on top of these
modules.
When the system is to be configured at a later point, note that the

AutroSafe Configuration Tool graphically shows the first module on
the top of the figure and the following in descending order. This
may be opposite to the physical mounting, and must be taken into
consideration when configuring the system. Also note that the
configuration tool does not show the BSS-311 and BSL-310.
10.3.2 Mounting
The connection block on the I/O module must be pointing to the right
when the module is to be inserted in a BS-420/BC-420 cabinet.
 Snap the right side of the

fastener onto the mounting
rail (1), then press the module
slightly inwards (2) until the
left side fastens.
 Then, carefully press the

module downwards as far
as possible. Make sure that the module is properly connected to
the module below.
Page 51
10.3.3 Removing
 Ensure the panel is not powered.
 Unplug the connection block.
 Use a screwdriver to carefully

lift the topmost module upwards
(1) until the connector between the
modules is free.
 Use the screwdriver to slightly

bend the left side of the
fastener towards left (2) until
it loosens, then remove (3) the
module.
 If necessary, continue removing

the next one in the same way.
10.3.4 Before Connecting Cables
 Before connecting cables, make sure that the mains power is not
!
POWER OFF!
connected.
10.4 Data Sheets - I/O Modules

The AutroSafe User Documentation provides data sheets for I/O
modules, including a short description of the I/O module, its
application, plus technical specifications and cabling.
Page 52
Dual Safety Installation
11. Dual Safety Installation

11.1 Dual Safety System Overview
An AutroSafe system using the Dual Safety concept consists of a
Primary System and a Secondary System. The purpose of the
concept is to ensure that the Secondary System takes over the control
of the detection loops if the Primary System or parts of it is lost for any
reason.
To achieve this, the redundant loop control interface AutroKeeper

BN-180 is required.
An AutroMaster can communicate with both the Primary and

Secondary System via AutroCom.
The connections that are to be used between the Primary/Secondary

System and the detection loops depend on distances and the number
of Loop Driver Modules/detection loops used.
11.2 Rules of Thumb

Note that these rules of thumb goes for both systems in a Dual Safety
configuration:
 Up to 6 Loop Driver Modules can be connected to one I/O stack

 Up to 12 Loop Driver Modules can be connected to one panel
directly (one I/O stack) if the cable length between the panel’s main
board AL_Com+ port and the I/O stack is less than 3 meters.
through AutroFieldBus (up to 12 I/O stacks). This solution has to
be used if the cable length between the panel’s main board and the
I/O stack exceeds 3 meters, but can also be used for cable lengths
less than 3 meters.
Page 53
11.2.1 Example 1: Connections Using AL_Com+ only

The distance from the Primary Panel to the Loop Driver Module is less
than 3 meters. An AL_Com+ flat ribbon cable is used between the
panel AL_Com port and the I/O stack (including the Loop Driver
Module).
The distance from the Secondary Panel to the Secondary Loop Driver
Module is less than 3 meters. An AL_Com+ flat ribbon cable is used
between the panel AL_Com port and the I/O stack (including the
Secondary Loop Driver Module).
Page 54
11.2.2 Example 2: Connections using both AL_Com+ and AutroFieldBus

The distance from the Primary Panel to the Primary Loop Driver
Module is less than 3 meters. An AL_Com+ flat ribbon cable is used
between the panel AL_Com port and the I/O stack (including the Loop
Driver Module).
The distance from the Secondary Panel to the Secondary Loop Driver
Module is more than 3 meters. An AL_Com+ flat ribbon cable
(maximum 3 meters) is used between the AutroFieldBus (AFB)
Protocol Converter BSD-321 and the I/O stack (including the
Secondary Loop Driver Module). The AFB Protocol Converter is
connected to the panel’s AFB. The AFB cable length can be up to
1000 meters. Booster equipment can be added to exceed the AFB
cable length even further.
11.3 Connections Overview

There are two AutroKeepers BN-180 for each detection loop in a Dual
Safety System (see next page). One must be assigned to the Primary
System and the other to the Secondary System. The BSD-321 (if
used) must be set to the Al_Com+ protocol (default).
The AutroKeeper is physically placed between the loop controller

(BSD-310) and the detection loop (one belonging to the Primary
System and one belonging to the Secondary System) and thus
controlling/providing the loop controller access to the detection loop.
Page 55
Page 56
Primary System Secondary System
Fire Alarm Control Panel Fire Alarm Control Panel

BS-420 BS-420
AutroFieldBus

Loop Driver Module AutroKeeper AutroKeeper Loop Driver Module Communication Module Termination Protocol Converter Termination
BSD-310 BN-180 BN-180 BSD-310 BSL-310 Block BSD-321 Block
-2 -16 -10 - 12 -14 -5 3 TX 3 TX 25 TX Port 0 AFB A 9 5 AFB B
1 2 1 2
OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN
7 RX 7 RX 26 RX Port 0 AFB A’ 11 6 AFB B’
+1 +15 +9 3 3 +11 +13 +4
10 GND 10 GND 27 GND Port 0 AFB B 3 1 AFB A
-5 -14 -12 -10 -16 -2
2 1 2 1 9 CTS 9 CTS 13 TX Port 1 AFB B’ 5 2 AFB A’
IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
+4 +13 +11 3 3 +9 +15 +1 1 INT 1 INT 14 RX Port 1
15 GND Port 1
16 IE Port 1
28 IE Port 0
BN-180 as Active BN-180 as Standby
Patented component to meet

the new SOLAS requirement
11.3.1 Connections – AutroKeeper BN-180
Pin Description
number
1 TTL COM Debug port (internal
use only)
2 TTL IN Debug port (internal
use only)
3 TTL OUT Debug port (internal
use only)
4 GND
5 24V IN Power In (Green LED)
6 0V IN Power In
7 FAILSAFE COM FailSafe Rel. (future)
8 FAILSAFE NO FailSafe Rel. (future)
9 OUTLOOP + To “first” Loop Unit
10 OUTLOOP - --“--
11 INLOOP + To “last” Loop Unit
12 INLOOP - --“--
13 OUT + To Loop Driver’s IN +
14 OUT - To Loop Driver’s IN -
15 IN + To Loop Driver’s OUT+
16 IN - To Loop Driver’s OUT -
DIN rail conn. 1 24V IN Power In

DIN rail conn. 2 0V IN Power In
DIN rail conn. 3 Not used
DIN rail conn. 4 Not used
DIN rail conn. 5 GND
11.3.2 Switch Settings – AutroKeeper BN-180

Dipswitch 1 determines whether the BN-180 in question is Primary or
Secondary.
Dip- Description (ON/OFF)

switch
1 “Ascription” (use one of each):
Off – Primary / On – Secondary
2 Off – Normal operation (Seen as AL_Com
unit)
On – Force Majeur (If Ascription
Primary: Active, Secondary: Standby –
automatic actions disabled)
3 When switched to On or Off the unit will
be reset within 5 seconds
Page 57
Cable Specifications
12. Cable Specifications

For the complete information on cable specifications, refer to Cable
Specifications, part number 116-P-ASIFGCABLESPEC/CGB
(file name: asafeifgcable_cgb).
Page 58
Service and Maintenance
13. Service and Maintenance

The AutroSafe Interactive Fire Alarm System provides a Log Menu,
which records all system events, i.e. fire alarms, prealarms, faults,
enablements/disablements, user operations and tests.
It is the system owner’s or authorized personnel’s duty to register all

events in a Control Journal.
13.1.1 Monthly Maintenance
Step Description √
1 Look through the log journal to find any possible irregularities.
2 Make sure that possible changes in the building structure or storage environment have not
affected the detectors’ capability to detect a potential fire.
3 Make sure that the detectors are not covered with paint or contaminated with dust or dirt.
Check the log for contaminated detectors (Service/Log menu).
4 Perform a visual inspection of the panels/cabinet.
5 Perform a simple test of display and panel functions
6 Test the sounders.
Page 59
13.1.2 Annual Service and Maintenance

The whole system (control panel, detectors, control functions) should
be inspected annually. An annual service inspection comprises the
following:
1 To test the panel indicator lights and internal buzzer, press and hold the Reset button for at
least 5 seconds. All indicators are lit and the buzzer is turned on. The test will automatically
stop. The lamp test can be performed in access level 1 (no use of key).
2 Test all operating keys by pressing each key (refer also to Operator’s Handbook):
All buttons will give a short "Beep" when pressed, except Mute button, Menu button and
Reset System button (plus the ones that are not supported, see below).
Mute Panel button

Silence Alarms button
Reset System button
Menu button
Close Window button
Alphanumeric keyboard
Manoeuvre buttons
Note that the left/right arrow buttons and the two buttons in the lowermost right hand corner
(indicated with a white line) are not yet supported:
3 Perform a visual and functional inspection of manual call-points and automatic detectors.
Check the log for contaminated detectors (Service/Log menu).
4 Disable any alarm transference to the Fire Alarm Routing Equipment -FARE output.
5 Activate the alarm system. Test all sounders by activating an alarm from a corresponding
manual call-point.
6 Test all control functions.
7 Activate alarms from at least one detector/manual call-point in each zone and a check that all
respective outputs are activated.
8 Test the action of any auxiliary operating functions (disabling, cancelling and resetting
buttons).
9 Check the alarm transference outputs by connecting from outgoing outputs (potential free
relay and 24V output) activated by alarm in a zone.
10 Check the fault warning function from detector zones by removing a detector in each zone.
Page 60
Activate a fault (remove battery fuse) and observe:
- the Fault indicator starts to blink
- a fault warning is displayed
- the internal buzzer is turned ON
- the Fault Warning Routing Equipment (FWRE) output is activated (if any)
11 Verify all conditions, i.e.:

- Fire Alarm condition
- Fire Warning condition
- Fault Warning condition
- Disablement condition
- Test condition
12 On completion of checks, ensure that only the green "Power" indicator is ON when the panel
is in its idle state (normal operation).
13 Enable alarm transference to the Fire Alarm Routing Equipment -FARE output.
The battery should be changed every 4 years. If a fault arises on the

panel that cannot be rectified, contact your nearest Autronica Fire and
Security office for qualified assistance.
13.1.3 SIL2 Approved Systems

For SIL2 approved systems, service and maintenance shall be carried
out according to the proof test intervals stated on the
AutroSafe 4 Oil&Gas SIL2 (G2) certificate with registration number
44 207 11 555929-001.
Page 61
14. Appendix A - Controller Board
BSA_400
14.1 Circuit Board Layout
S6
J3 J2
S7
J21
S5 J1
S3
J9
J16 J14
J10 J11
J5
X6 X4 S2
J17 J18
X5 X3
J12
J13
Label on cover
E-2878
To main Terminal Block. See
J3 manual for connections
J2 Ethernet 2
S6 1 2 3 J1 Ethernet 1
S6 RS-422 OFF OFF OFF

RS-485 ON ON ON
S7 S7 1 2 J14
Serial
Console RS-422 Termination ON OFF
ON
Port ON
RS-485 Termination ON OFF
Push
Button S3 1 2
Reset AFB EARTH Fault Off OFF OFF
J5 To BSL-310
AFB EARTH Fault On ON ON
USB OTG
0V 2 IN 4
2 x USB Host
24V 2 IN 3
J18
0V 1 IN 2
Panel ID 24V 1 IN 1
Panel Type
LCD Backlight
S2
Network ID
To Front Panel To LCD
Page 62
Appendix A - Controller Board BSA_400
14.2 Location inside Fire Alarm Control Panel BS-420
BSA-400
14.3 Description
The Controller Board BSA-400 is the main CPU which controls all
system functionality.
The system offers the following communication ports:

 2 Ethernet ports for AutroNet and/or AutroCom, plus downloading
of configuration data and system software
 1 AL_Com+ interface (loop communication)
 1 RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485 serial port for communication with
third party equipment (AutroCom /ESPA4.4.4/MODBUS/VDR)
 2 USB host ports for the connection of a printer and for the
connection of a memory stick for downloading configuration data
and system software
 Interface for the connection of display and front board
Page 63
14.4 Internal LED Indicators
D20 D21
BSA-400 D13 D17 D3
D23 D2 D18 D15
D22 D1 D19 D16
LED Colour Function

D1 Yellow SD-Card activity indicator
D2 Yellow USB Boot Time Rescue upgrade in progress
D3 Yellow System fault LED, ON when system is locked in system fault
D13 Green AutroFieldBus TX
D15 Green NA
D16 Green Power indicator
D17 Red AutroFieldBus RX
D18 Red NA
D19 Red Serial Port activity indicator
D20 Red System reset 5V
D21 Red System reset 3,3V
D22 Blue System heart beat
D23 Blue NA
14.5 Power Input Connector J18 (screw terminal)

BSA-400
J18
Connector J18 on Description Connection to Power Board BSF-

J18.1 +24V DC In 1 A1 +
J18.2 0V In 1 A1 0V
Interconnection
J18.3 +24V DC In 2 A2 +
J18.4 0V In 2 A2 0V
Page 64
14.6 Two-stage Push Button Reset (S5)
BSA-400
S5
 To shut down the system in a controlled manner, push less than 1

second.
 To perform a hard reset without needing to do a controlled
shutdown (the system is already in system fault condition), push
and hold down the reset button S5 (approximately 10 seconds)
until the red LED indicators D20 and D21 are lit for a short moment
and you hear a click from the relay.
14.7 USB Ports (J10, J11)
BSA-400
J10 J11
There are 2 standard USB full speed (480Mbit) host ports; type A
connector. The ports are to be used for connection of an optional
printer or a memory stick .
Each USB host port is limited to a maximum of 100mA load.
Page 65
14.8 Multifunction Serial Port Connector J3 -

AutroFieldBus and Fault Relay
A ribbon cable is connected between the Multifunction Serial Port
Connector J3 and the main terminal block L1(mounted on the DIN rail
inside the cabinet).
BSA-400
J3
Connector J3 on Description Connections to

Controller Board BSA-400 terminal block
(L1)
J3.1 GND L1.1
J3.2 GND L1.2
J3.3 AutroFieldBus B L1.3
J3.4 Multifunction Serial Port RS-422/RS485 A+ L1.4
J3.5 AutroFieldBus B’ L1.5
J3.6 Multifunction Serial Port RS-422/RS485 B- L1.6
J3.7 AutroFieldBus B Reference L1.7
J3.8 Multifunction Serial Port RS-422 X+ L1.8
J3.9 AutroFieldBus A L1.9
J3.10 Multifunction Serial Port RS-422 Z- L1.10
J3.11 AutroFieldBus A’ L1.11
J3.12 Multifunction Serial Port RS-232 TX L1.12
J3.13 AutroFieldBus A Reference L1.13
J3. 14 Multifunction Serial Port RS-232 RX L1.14
J3.15 GND L1.15
J3.16 Multifunction Serial Port Reference L1.16
J3.17 Fault Relay Normal Open L1.17
J3.18 GND L1.18
J3.19 Fault Relay Normal Closed L1.19
J3.20 Fault Relay Common L1.20
The built-in AutroFieldBus Master driver serves as a communication

protocol between the AutroSafe panel, the BSD-340 PowerLoop
drivers and BSD-321 protocol converters, plus Power Board BSF-400.
It provides a redundant field bus system with a ring loop topology.
The AutroSafe panels have one AutroFieldBus connected, and each

AutroFieldBus can host up to 31 bus units.
The AutroFieldBus has short-circuit detection/isolation technology

which ensures that only one AutroFieldBus bus unit will be lost in case
of internal failure (short-circuit).
Page 66
The ring loop topology ensures that no detectors/field units will be lost
due to a single break or short circuit of the AutroFieldBus cable.
The AutroFieldBus cable is normally 2-wire twisted pair category 5

copper cables, however, fibre optic cable is possible by use of
separate signal converters. The AutroFieldBus uses the same
guidelines as AUTROLON (AutroSafe version 3.8 and earlier), in
terms of cable lengths, fibre modem and boosters.
14.9 AutroFieldBus Connections
14.9.1 Ribbon Cable Connector BSA-400 to Terminal Block L1

Shielded cable required.
Terminal on BSA-400 Function Terminal Block List L1

J3.9 AutroFieldBus A L1.9
J3.11 AutroFieldBus A’ L1.11
J3.13 AutroFieldBus CT A L1.13
J3.3 AutroFieldBus B L1.3
J3.5 AutroFieldBus B’ L1.5
J3.7 AutroFieldBus CT B L1,7
BSA-400
Ribbon cable connector Terminal block L1
Page 67
14.10 Multifunction Serial Port Dipswitch Settings –

Switch S6 (RS-232, RS-422, RS-485)
BSA-400
S6
ON
123
Switch RS-232 RS-422 RS-485

S6.1 Not applicable OFF ON
S6.2 Not applicable OFF ON
S6.3 Not applicable OFF: Full duplex, two-way ON
simultaneous
communication.
ON: Half duplex
14.11 Multifunction Serial Port Dipswitch Settings –

Switch S7
BSA-400
S7
ON
12
Switch RS-232 RS-422 RS-485

S7.1 Not applicable ON ON
S7.2 Not applicable ON OFF
RS-422 requires two pair RS-485 requires only one

of cables; one for RX and pair of cables where TX/RX
one for TX. are common. Switch S7.1 is
used for the termination.
One switch is used for the S7.2 must be OFF.
termination of the RX line,
the other switch is used for
the termination of the TX
line. Both switches must
be ON.
Page 68
14.12 RS-485 Connections
14.12.2 Switch Setting – Switch S6 and S7

Switch RS-485
S6.1 ON
S6.2 ON
S6.3 ON
S7.1 ON
S7.2 OFF
Ribbon cable connector Terminal Block L1

RS-422/1 A+ J3.4 L1.4 X+
RS-422 B- J3.6 L1.6 Z-
RS-422 X+ J3.8 L1.8 A+
RS-422 Z- J3.10 L1.10 B-
Serial Reference 0V J3.16 L1.16 0V
Cable XGE-1/20-48

Switch RS-422
S6.1 OFF
S6.2 OFF
S6.3 OFF
S7.1 ON
S7.2 ON
Page 69
14.13.3 Schematic of port equivalent:
+5v_SER_0
TX_422_X+
Isolation
8
TX_422_Z-
RX_422_A+
RX_422_B-
Signal Reference

Switch RS-232
S6.1 Not applicable
S6.2 Not applicable
S6.3 Not applicable
S7.1 Not applicable
S7.2 Not applicable
Page 70
14.15 Serial Debug Connector J21

A standard AutroSafe programming cable XJA-029 is to be connected
to this connector. The interface uses RS-232 115,2kbaud 8N1.
BSA-400
J21
Connector Description Communication Parameters

J21.1 0V reference
J21.2 RX 115,2kbaud 8 data bit, none
parity, 1 stop bit
J21.3 TX
14.16 AL_Com+ Connector J5

BSA-400
AL_Com+ debug
J5 Connected to Communication
Module BSL-310.
Cable part number: XGE-1/10-50
Connector Description
J5.1 AL_Com+ CTS
J5.2 0VIN
J5.3 AL_Com+ RXD
J5.4 0VIN
J5.5 Not Connected
J5.6 0VIN
J5.7 AL_Com+ TXD
J5.8 0VIN
J5.9 AL_Com+ RTS
J5.10 0VIN
Page 71
14.17 LCD Backlight Connector J17

BSA-400
J17
4
1
Connector Description
J17.1 Backlight LED + 5V DC
J17.2 Backlight LED -
J17.3 Backlight LED -
J17.4 Backlight LED – 0V
14.18 Ethernet Ports (RJ-45 Connectors)

BSA-400
J2
1 2
J1
8 1
The BSA-400 board provides two separate 10/100Mbit Ethernet ports.

Each connector has 2 built-in status LEDs; Link and Act/Speed. The
connector is an RJ-45 modular jack, suitable for shielded cable CAT5
which allows cable lengths up to 100m.
Connector Connector Description

J1.1 J2.1 TX+, Transmit Data+
J1.2 J2.2 TX-, Transmit Data-
J1.3 J2.3 RX+, Transmit Data+
J1.4 J2.4 N.C.
J1.5 J2.5 N.C.
J1.6 J2.6 RX-, Transmit Data-
J1.7 J2.7 N.C.
J1.8 J2.8 N.C.
LED 1 Activity LED

LED 2 If ON, 100MBit/s, if OFF, 10MBit/s
Page 72
14.18.1 Ethernet Straight Through Cable
8 8
1 1
Name Pin Cable Color Pin Name

TX+ 1 White/Orange 1 TX+
TX- 2 Orange 2 TX-
RX+ 3 White/Green 3 RX+
4 Blue 4
5 White/Blue 5
RX- 6 Green 6 RX-
7 White/Brown 7
8 Brown 8
14.19 Fault messages Power Board BSF-400
Fault category: Power

Fault message Cause Remedy
BSF-400 – Power supply fault Power supply OK, but Re-insert power supply
General Fault LED blinking power supply cable(s) cables
unplugged
Power supply Replace Mean Well or
malfunction Power Box PSU unit.
BSF-400 – Mains fault Mains is disconnected, Re-insert mains plug,
Mains Fault LED blinking loss of power from mains check mains power
General Fault LED blinking source source
Mean Well PSU control Re-insert or replace
cable is control cable.
disconnected/broken
BSF-400 – Battery not connected Battery is disconnected Re-connect battery
Battery Fault LED blinking
General Fault LED blinking
Battery is short circuited Remove short circuit
BSF-400 – Battery fuse blown Battery fuse is blown Replace with appropriate
Fuse Fault LED blinking fuse
BSF-400 – Battery temperature sensor Battery temperature Replace battery
open circuit sensor cable is temperature sensor cable
Battery Fault LED blinking disconnected or broken
BSF-400 – Battery temperature sensor Battery temperature Remove short circuit
short circuit sensor cable is short
Battery Fault LED blinking circuited
BSF-400 Output [A1/A2/B1/B2/C1/C2] A short circuit or very Warning: BSF-400 will try
electronic fuse blown high current draw has to re-power automatically.
Fuse Fault LED blinking occurred on power Remove corresponding
General Fault LED blinking output. fuse before working with
faulty external equipment.
Remove short circuit and
press reset on AutroSafe
panel to reset electronic
fuse.
Page 73
Fault category: Power

Fault message Cause Remedy
BSF-400 Output [A1/A2/B1/B2/C1/C2] The fuse is blown. Replace with appropriate
fuse blown fuse
Fuse Fault LED blinking
BSF-400 Output [A1/A2/B1/B2/C1/C2] This may occur when Insert mains to charge
voltage to low. running on battery only batteries.
General Fault LED blinking and battery voltage is
below 18V.
This warning may occur Accept fault in AutroSafe.
when a fuse is removed
from an output with no
load.
BSF-400 Battery Relay Fault This warning may occur Connect battery, or put
during start-up if a dip switch 5 to OFF
battery is not connected position if no battery is to
be used
The relay fault warning Replace BSF-400 board.
may occure if there is a
hardware fault.
BSF-400 Battery voltage to low This message may occur Message will clear when
under start-up when charge current drops
battery voltage is to low, below 400mA.
i.e. charging current is
>1100mA.
Page 74
Appendix B - Power Supply
15. Appendix B - Power Supply

15.1 Power Cabinet and Power Units
AutroSafe 4 provides the following power cabinet and power units:
 Power Cabinet BP-405
 Power Unit BPS-405
 Power Unit BPS-410
15.1.1 Power Cabinet BP-405

The Power Cabinet BP-405 contains the following:
 24V/5A power supply (BPS-405, Meanwell Power Supply)
 2x12V, 18Ah batteries
For detailed information, refer to this chapter (Power Supply) and
datasheet.
15.1.2 Power Unit BPS-405

The Power Unit BPS-405 contains the following:
 24V/5A power supply
datasheet.

Note:
The BPS-410 Power Unit 24VDC/10A is delivered as two separate
part numbers:
 116-BPS-410 for 230VAC
 116-BPS-410/115 for 115VAC
The Power Unit BPS-410 contains the following:

 24V/10A power supply
 115VAC or 230VAC input
datasheet.
Page 75
15.2 Circuit Board Layout BSF-400
S5 1 2
J2 J26
1 AFB A
2 AFB A" 1 6
1 Alarm NO
3 AFB CT A 2 Alarm Com
4 AFB Earth Fault Sense 3 RC (Remote test)
5 AFB B 4 Fault Relay NO
6 AFB B" 5 Fault Relay NC
6 Fault Relay Com
7 AFB CT B
F1 A1 F2AL
J19 F2 A2 F2AL
+ 0V
A1
S1 Reset
8 Internal Fault
7 General Fault
+ 0V 6
5 AFB Com
High
X11
A2 4 Fuse Fault
3 Battery Fault
J24 J18 X10
Low
2 Mains Fault
1 Power ON
+ 0V
B1
F3 B1 AFB Adress (H & L)

F2AL
J23 F4 B2
F2AL
+ 0V
B2
F5 C1
F2AL 1 Earth Fault Sense ON/OFF
J22 2 Battery relay (see manual)
3 AFB present
+ 0V
C1
F6 C2 4
F2AL 5 Battery present
6
1 6
ON
OFF source (see manual)
+ 0V
C2
Charger +24V
Charger 0V
Earth
F8 Charger
F7 F8 F7 Battery
E-2868
BP-410/01 T10 T10

AH AH
BP-405/01 T5 T5
5 Therm.+ AH AH
4 Therm.- 5 1 J17 1 2 3 J25
3 PSF J20
2 -V BATT
1 Vcon + -
Page 76
15.3 Description
BSF-400 is a power monitor and controller board providing a
communication interface, AutroFieldBus. The board has also the
ability to operate stand alone with no communication. The fault relay is
energized as standard with its own watchdog.
The power board provides power to AutroSafe, AutroSafe’s existing

I/O module stacks, battery monitoring and charging, plus 24 voltage
contacts for other external equipment.
 2 x 24V outputs of 2A to AutroSafe panel

 2 x 24V outputs of 2A to I/O stack
 2 x 24V outputs of 2A to third-party equipment
 1 input for battery
 1 input for battery charger
 Communication
 Power control for battery
 Control signals for battery charger
 All internal voltage levels are monitored
 Temperature sensor for compensation of charger voltage
BSF-400 has short circuit protection on all outputs such that a short
circuit will not affect other outputs. Batteries that are connected will be
charged with temperature compensation to ensure long battery life
regardless of temperature (within the specified operating temperature
range).
All outputs on terminations A, B and C are specified to a maximum

current of 2A. There are no minimum power ratings for the outputs.
The maximum power that may be used from each output is 2A and
there is a current limiter implemented at 7A.
15.4 Power Block Diagram – Example
A1
BSA-400 BSA-400 BSA-400
A2
BSF- B1
400 B2
BSL-310
C1 BSS-310A
A power consumption
BSS-311 account must be done
C2
to ensure that max
delivery of power is
not exceeded.
External External
equipment: equipment:
max 2A max 2A
Page 77
15.5 Batteries
2
The recommended cable parameter for BSF-400 is minimum 1,5mm /
15,4 AWG.
There is no minimum requirement for drawing power.

The inputs for the battery and the charger are specified to handle up
to 10A. The fuses, F7 battery and F8 Charger, shall have 5A fuses.
Batteries that are to be used with BSF-400 are Fiamm batteries with
the maximum size of 18Ah. The minimum size of batteries if batteries
are connected is 7,2Ah.
The maximum current that may be drawn from the batteries when the
primary power source is disconnected is 5A for BPS-405.
There is no minimum requirement for drawing power. The maximum

power that may be drawn from BPS-405 is 3A.
Fuse F7:
Maximum battery current output when
I max A Charger,
mains disconnected
Battery
3A 5A T5AH
The maximum internal resistance for a battery connected to a

BSF-400 is 0,8Ω, any higher resistance than this will be detected as a
fault in the battery by BSF-400.
NOTE:
If power to the system is supplied exclusively from the batteries (in
case of a power supply failure), and the voltage is below 19V, the
Power Board BSF-400 will perform a controlled shutdown (i.e. the
power is switched OFF).
Page 78

The inputs for the battery and the charger are specified to handle up
to 10A. The fuses, F7 battery and F8 Charger, shall have 10A fuses.
Batteries that are to be used with BSF-400 are Fiamm batteries with
the maximum size of 18Ah. The minimum size of batteries is 12Ah.
The maximum current that may be drawn from the batteries when the
primary power source is disconnected is 10A for BPS-410.
The maximum power that may be drawn from BPS-410 is 8A.
Fuse F7:
Maximum battery current output when
I max A Charger,
mains disconnected
Battery
8A 10A T10AH
The maximum internal resistance for a battery connected to a

BSF-400 is 0,6Ω, any higher resistance than this will be detected as a
fault in the battery by BSF-400.
NOTE:
If power to the system is supplied exclusively from the batteries
(in case of a power supply failure), and the voltage is below 19V,
the Power Board BSF-400 will perform a controlled shutdown (i.e.
the power is switched OFF).
15.6 Battery Charging

The charging voltage is temperature controlled, so optimal charge for
each temperature is maintained.
Charge current for the BPS-405 is also controlled, so that the charging
voltage will decrease when the charge current reaches 2A.
A “Battery voltage too low”-warning will display on AutroSafe systems

connected to the BPS-405 or BPS-410 via AutroFieldBus. The
message will clear when charge current drops below 400mA.
Attention: The battery temperature sensor must be placed on the

batteries. If the sensor is placed in warmer or colder places, the
charging voltage will be wrong, and lower battery capacity and/or
shorter battery life may be expected.
o
The charging voltage at 25 C is 27, 2 V DC.
Note that when the BSF-400 board is turned OFF and batteries are
connected to the battery termination, the leak current of the batteries
is 6mA.
Page 79
15.7 Button S2 – Start on S2 on Standby Source

By pressing button S2 one second, the system can be started (without
mains source) from the battery when the battery voltage is >20V DC.
Note that, if the battery voltage is less than 20V DC, the button will
have no affect (hardware controlled).
Troubleshooting:
In some cases the voltage can be slightly above 20V DC and drop
rapidly to below 20V DC. The relay will then tend to chatter. In this
case, it is recommended that the system is not started until the battery
is fully charged.
BSF-400 V F2AL 5 Battery present

6
1 6
ON
OFF
S2 source (see manual)
+ 0V
C2
Charger +24V
Charger 0V
Earth
F8 Charger
F7 F8 F7 Battery
E-2868
BP-410/01 T10 T10
AH AH
BP-405/01 T5 T5
5 Therm.+ AH AH
4 Therm.- 5 1 J17 1 2 3 J25
3 PSF J20
2 -V BATT
1 Vcon + -
S2:
Start on
standby source
Page 80
15.8 Configuration Settings

The BSF-400 board may be used in several different configurations.
The board is configured by means of two switches:
 Dipswitch S5 and S6 (refer to dipswitch tables, 0)
 Rotary switches X10 and X11 - AutroFieldBus address switch.
Each Power Board is given a unique address.
If for any reason the settings on dipswitch S6, X10 or X11 have been
changed, the BSF-400 must be restarted by pressing the reset button
S1 for this change in order to be taken into account.
The power has two modes of user interaction; standalone (S6.3 OFF)
or with communication to the AutroSafe system.
S5 1 2
Dipswitch S5
J2
1 AFB A
2 AFB A" 1 6
1 A
3 AFB CT A 2 A
4 AFB Earth Fault Sense 3 R
5 AFB B 4 F
6 AFB B" 5 F
6 F
7 AFB CT B
F1
J19 F2
+ 0V
A1
S1 Reset
8
7 S1 Reset button
6
+ 0V
X11
A2
5
High
4 AutroFieldBus
3 Address Switch
2
X10
J18
Low
J24 X10, X11

1
+ 0V
B1
F3 B1 A
F2AL
J23 F4 B2
F2AL
+ 0V
B2
F5 C1
F2AL 1 Earth Fa
J22 2 Battery
3 AFB pre
+ 0V
C1
F6 C2 4
F2AL 5 Battery
6
1 6
ON
J21 S6 Dipswitch S6
OFF
+ 0V
C2
Charger +24V
F8 Charger
F7 F8 F7 Battery
BP-410/01 T10 T10
AH AH
BP-405/01 T5 T5
5 Therm.+ AH AH
4 Therm.- 5 1 J17 1
3 PSF J20
2 -V BATT
1 Vcon + -
Page 81
15.9 Dipswitch table – S5 and S6

Dipswitch table – S5
S5.1 S5.2 Function

OFF OFF AutroFieldBus earth fault OFF
ON ON AutroFieldBus earth fault ON
Dipswitch table – S6
Switch Name Comment

S6.1 Earth Fault ON: Earth fault monitoring
activated
OFF: Earth fault monitoring
deactivated
S6.2 -- NA
S6.3 AutroFieldBus ON: AutroFieldBus connected
OFF: AutroFieldBus not
connected
S6.4 Not used NA
S6.5 Battery ON: Battery connected
OFF: Battery not connected
S6.6 Power Unit Type ON: BPS-405
OFF: BPS-410
Page 82
15.10 Connectors
Connector Description BPS-405 / BPS-410
J25 Power Supply To BSP-405 (Mean Well Power Supply)
J20 Battery To Battery 27,3VDC charging
connector
J17 Temp. Applies to BPS-405 only.
sensor/Mean Temperature sensor (close to battery) and Mean
Well Control Well PSU
(1-3) from power, (4-5) temp. sensor
J26 1-3 Powernet Applies to BPS-410 only.
control Control wires for power supply.
J26 4-6 Fault Relay Applies to both BPS-405 and BPS-410.
Fault Relay (NO, NC, com) Fault output.
J19 Output A1 24V/2A (BSA-400 Vin1 +/0V)
J18 Output A2 24V/2A (BSA-400 Vin2 +/0V)
J24 Output B1 24V/2A, general power output
J23 Output B2 24V/2A, general power output
J22 Output C1 24V/2A with interrupt at init
J21 Output C2 24V/2A with interrupt at init
The power outputs have different properties. They can all deliver 2A
each (limited by total power available).
Output Description
Output A These will always be ON. Will be turned OFF by a
short- circuit only.
Output B These are initially ON, but may be switched OFF/ON
from AutroSafe.
Output C These will be turned OFF during start-up of BSF-400
(initialization). May be switched OFF/ON from
AutroSafe. Power to I/O modules.
Page 83
15.11 Fault Relay Watchdog J26

The fault relay on the BSF-400 board has its own watchdog. If the
CPU stops for any reason the watchdog will turn over the fault relay if
it is not fed within 1 second.
If for any reason the BSF-400 restarts, it takes 5 seconds before the
fault relay is in the correct position:
 J26.4 (normally open contact): closed contact when the unit is not
supplied with power or there is a fault on the unit
 J26.5 (normally closed contact): closed when no faults exist
 J26.6 (common): common for fault relay
Fault relay
NO J26.4
CPU Watch
dog NC J26.5
COM J26.6
Note that the fault relay will not be turned over for communication
faults on the AutroFieldBus.
The green and red LED beneath the cover are indicators for AFB-RX
and – TX. Hearbeat is indicated when these LEDs are blinking
simultaneously. Rapid blinking indicates heavy traffic on the
AutroFieldBus. If the red LED is weak and the green one is not lit,
there is no communication between the BSF-400 board and the
AutroFieldBus.
LED number / Colour Mechanic name (E-

Description
/ Schematic reference 2868)
Power ON This LED signifies that the BSF-400 has power and
1. Green
will be OFF for 20 ms every second.
2. Yellow Mains Fault Will blink if power supply lacks 230V AC connection.
Battery Fault Blinking LED; for all battery faults, except when a
3. Yellow
battery fuse is blown
Fuse Fault Blinking LED for all fuse faults and also for all
4. Yellow
electronic fuse faults.
AutroFieldBus Com The LED is lit shortly if AutroFieldBus
5. Yellow
communication is received or transmitted.
6. Yellow For future use.
General Fault Blinking LED if there are one or more faults in the
7. Red
power supply system.
Internal Fault Blinking LED if there exist one or more internal faults
on the BSF-400. This includes temperature on the
8. Yellow BSF-400 out of bounds.
Internal faults are mostly PCB errors. This LED
blinks in a much faster cycle than the others.
All blinking LEDs, except where otherwise stated, will blink with 0,5
seconds ON and 0,5 seconds OFF.
Page 84
15.12 Battery Resistance Measurement

Every fourth hour, battery impedance measuring is conducted.
This is conducted by lowering the PSU voltage so that all loads are
powered from the batteries for a period of 60 seconds, then a built in
resistor is turned ON for 2 seconds. BPS-405/BPS-410 will then
measure the voltage increase between the resistor ON and OFF and
thus calculate the battery resistance. This measurement includes the
wires to and from the battery.
The battery high resistance fault is given when the total resistance of
the battery and battery cables is:
Type Resistance
Power Unit BPS-405 0.8Ω
Power Unit BPS-410 0.6Ω
 If such a fault is given, check the cable resistance or replace the

batteries.
15.13 Electronic fuses
15.13.1 Power outputs

Power outputs A1, A2, B1, B2, C1 and C2 are protected by both
electronic and regular fuses. The electronic fuses will trip if a current
between 3.5A and 7A is drawn. The electronic fuse will turn OFF
power within approx. 10ms of a short circuit. The BSF-400 will try to
turn ON power 3 times with ~50s interval between each try.
If an external fault is not resolved, BSF-400 will not try to re-power

more than 3 times. A reset on an AutroSafe panel or pushing reset
button S1 will force the BSF-400 to retry.
IMPORTANT:
To be safe, remove regular fuse before troubleshooting external faulty
equipment.
Page 85
15.13.2 Battery Input

The battery input is protected by an electronic short-circuit detector
and a regular fuse. If a short circuit is detected, the battery relay will
turn OFF within approx 50ms. The AutroSafe AutroFieldBus system
will then report “Battery not connected”.
15.14 Part of an AutroFieldBus Network

As a part of an AutroFieldBus network, the power module is
configured before start-up using dipswitches, some data, for example,
“Low voltage”-warning is given from an AutroSafe configuration via
AutroFieldBus.
Diagnostic outputs are given onboard with LEDs and alarm relay, and
on AutroSafe panels with audible alarms and display messages.
The LEDs and fault relay will not indicate any failure before the
AutroSafe has AutroFieldBus connection and the AutroSafe system
has been initialized.
15.15 Power Unit BPS-405 / BPS-410 as Standalone

In the standalone system, user input is given during installation only,
using dipswitches onboard. Set dipswitch S6.3 OFF to set the power
supply in standalone mode.
Diagnostic outputs are given onboard with LEDs and fault relay.
Page 86
Page 87
Autronica is a leading innovator, manufacturer and supplier of fire safety equipment. Our
products ensure safety in applications on land and sea worldwide. The company is owned by
United Technologies Corporation (UTC) and employs more than 380 people with great skill and
experience in the developing, manufacturing and marketing of fire safety equipment.
Autronica Fire and Security AS is an international company based in Trondheim, a dynamic city
known as the technological hotspot of Norway.
Protecting life, environment and property

Haakon VIIS gt. 4, NO-7041 Trondheim, Norway | Tel: +47 90 90 55 00 | Fax: +47 73 58 25 01
System Description and
Operation
AutroSafe Maritime Gas Detection
116-P-BS200MG/XGB, 2016-02-11, Autronica Fire And Security AS

COPYRIGHT ©
This publication, or parts thereof, may

not be reproduced in any form, by any
method, for any purpose.
Autronica Fire and Security AS and its

subsidiaries assume no responsibility
for any errors that may appear in the
publication, or for damages arising
from the information in it. No
information in this publication should
be regarded as a warranty made by
Autronica Fire and Security AS. The
information in this publication may be
updated without notice.

publication may be trademarks. They
are used only for identification.
System Description and Operation, AutroSafe Maritime Gas Detection, 116-P-BS200MG/XGB, 2016-02-11,
Autronica Fire and Security
Table of Contents
1. Introduction ...................................................................... 1
1.1 About the Handbook .......................................................................... 1
1.2 The Reader ....................................................................................... 1
1.3 Reference Documentation................................................................. 1
2. Terms, Abbreviations/Acronyms and Definitions ......... 2
3. Brief Introduction ............................................................. 3
4. General Description ......................................................... 5

4.1 AutroSafe Maritime Gas Detection .................................................... 5
4.2 Distributed System Topology ............................................................ 5
4.2.1 System Architecture ................................................................ 5
4.2.2 AutroNet .................................................................................. 7
4.2.3 AutroFieldBus .......................................................................... 8
4.3 Response Time ................................................................................. 8
4.4 Configuration ..................................................................................... 8
4.5 Communication to External Systems ................................................ 9
4.5.1 Modbus Protocol Communication for C&E Data to Control
System .................................................................................... 9
4.5.2 AutroSafe AutroCom Protocol ................................................. 9
4.6 PowerLoop (BSD-340) ...................................................................... 10
4.7 Detectors and Field Devices ............................................................. 11
4.7.1 Gas Detectors ......................................................................... 11
4.8 PowerLoop Driver BSD-340 .............................................................. 11
4.8.1 Description .............................................................................. 11
4.8.2 Overview ................................................................................. 12
4.8.3 Connections ............................................................................ 12
4.8.4 Earthing and Shielding ............................................................ 13
4.8.5 Capacity / Limitations .............................................................. 13
4.9 AutroPoint Maritim Gas Detectors ..................................................... 14
4.10 PowerLoop 4-20 mA Input Unit BN-342 ............................................ 14
4.10.1 Description .............................................................................. 14
4.10.2 Versions .................................................................................. 14
4.10.3 Overview ................................................................................. 15
4.10.4 Connection – Current Source ................................................. 15
4.10.5 Connection – Current Sink ...................................................... 16
4.11 Outputs .............................................................................................. 16
4.11.1 Programmable Digital Outputs in Panel (BSJ-310
Module) ................................................................................... 16
4.11.2 Programmable EOL Monitored 24VDC Outputs (BSB-
310) ......................................................................................... 16
4.12 Inputs ................................................................................................. 17
4.12.1 BSE-310 .................................................................................. 17
4.12.2 BSE-320 .................................................................................. 17
4.13 AutroMaster Application/Description ................................................. 18
5. Gas Functionality............................................................. 20
5.1 Inhibit Point ........................................................................................ 20
5.2 Set Alarm Limits ................................................................................ 20
5.3 Get Measurement Values.................................................................. 20
5.4 Support for Common Trouble Output ................................................ 20
5.5 Support for Gas Detectors (4-20 mA input)....................................... 20
5.6 Language .......................................................................................... 21
6. Panel Overview ................................................................ 22

6.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 22
6.1.1 Panel Variants ......................................................................... 22
6.1.2 Indication Devices ................................................................... 22
6.2 Maritime Gas Panel ........................................................................... 23
6.3 Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 .............................................................. 24
6.3.1 System Mode .......................................................................... 24
6.3.2 Information Mode .................................................................... 24
6.4 Loop Panels ...................................................................................... 25
6.4.1 System Loop Panel BU-110 .................................................... 25
6.4.2 Information Loop Panel BV-110 .............................................. 25
6.5 The Menu Display ............................................................................. 26
6.6 Adjusting the Display Contrast .......................................................... 26
6.7 Indication Devices ............................................................................. 27
6.7.1 Upper Section ......................................................................... 27
6.7.2 The Operator Section (lower left section) ............................... 28
6.8 Operating Buttons ............................................................................. 29
6.8.1 Operator Panels (upper and lower section) / Repeater
Panel (upper section) .............................................................. 29
6.8.2 Information Panel .................................................................... 32
6.9 Internal Buzzer .................................................................................. 33
6.9.1 Maritime Gas Panel BS-420MG.............................................. 33
6.9.2 Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 (system/information mode) ........ 33
6.9.3 System Loop Panel BU-110 .................................................... 33
6.9.4 Information Loop Panel BV-110 .............................................. 33
7. Operation Mode ............................................................... 34

7.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 34
7.2 Conditions in Operation Mode ........................................................... 35
7.3 Alarm Levels ...................................................................................... 35
7.4 Access Levels ................................................................................... 35
8. Menu Mode ....................................................................... 36

8.1 How to Enter Menu Mode.................................................................. 36
8.2 The Menu Mode Display ................................................................... 36
8.3 Buttons Used to Operate the Menu ................................................... 37
8.4 Action Digits in Menu Mode............................................................... 37
8.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................. 37
8.4.2 Action Digits Table .................................................................. 37
8.5 How to Operate in Menu Mode ......................................................... 38
9. Menu Structure ................................................................ 38
10. Show Status ..................................................................... 40

10.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 40
10.2 Show Status Menu ............................................................................ 40
10.3 Show Status - Alarms ........................................................................ 41
10.4 Show Status – Alarm Warnings ........................................................ 41
10.5 Show Status - Faults ......................................................................... 41
10.6 Show Status - Disablements ............................................................. 41
10.7 Show Status - Detection Zones in Test ............................................. 42
10.8 Show Status – Activated Outputs ...................................................... 42
10.9 Show Status - Active Sensors ........................................................... 42
10.10 Show Status - Inhibited Points .......................................................... 42
11. Disabling .......................................................................... 43

11.1 General .............................................................................................. 43
11.2 Disable Menu .................................................................................... 43
11.3 Indications on the Operator Panel ..................................................... 44
11.4 Disabling Activated / Deactivated Components ................................ 44
11.5 Disabling Detection Zones ................................................................ 44
11.6 Disabling Points ................................................................................. 44
11.7 Disabling Fire Alarm Devices ............................................................ 45
11.8 Disabling Fire Alarm Routing Equipment .......................................... 45
11.9 Disabling Outputs .............................................................................. 45
11.10 Disabling Fault Warning Routing Equipment .................................... 46
11.11 Disabling Carriers .............................................................................. 46
11.12 Disabling Immediate Output Actioning .............................................. 46
12. Enabling ........................................................................... 47

12.1 General .............................................................................................. 47
12.2 Enable Menu ..................................................................................... 47
12.3 Enabling Activated / Deactivated Components ................................. 48
12.4 Enabling Detection Zones ................................................................. 48
12.5 Enabling Points ................................................................................. 48
12.6 Enabling Fire Alarm Devices ............................................................. 48
12.7 Enabling Fire Alarm Routing Equipment ........................................... 49
12.8 Enabling Outputs ............................................................................... 49
12.9 Enabling Fault Warning Routing Equipment ..................................... 49
12.10 Enabling Carriers ............................................................................... 49
12.11 Enabling Immediate Output Actioning ............................................... 49
13. System Menu.................................................................... 50

13.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 50
13.2 System Menu .................................................................................... 50
13.3 How to Enter Access Level 3 / Set Password ................................... 51
13.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................. 51
13.4 How to Change Language................................................................. 51
13.5 How to Initialize the System .............................................................. 51
13.6 Cancel Inhibited Points...................................................................... 52
13.7 Day / Night Timers............................................................................. 52
13.7.1 Starting / Stopping Automatic Day / Night
Operation from the Control Panel ........................................... 52
13.7.2 Overriding Automatic Day / Night Operation from the
Control Panel .......................................................................... 52
14. Service Commands ......................................................... 53
14.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 53
14.2 Service Menu .................................................................................... 53
14.3 Testing ............................................................................................... 54
14.3.1 Testing Detection Zones ......................................................... 54
14.3.2 Testing Outputs ....................................................................... 55
14.4 Event Recording – Log Menu ............................................................ 60
14.4.2 The Log Setup Menu............................................................... 61
14.5 Loop Commands ............................................................................... 62
14.5.1 Disable Loop ........................................................................... 62
14.5.2 Enable Loop ............................................................................ 62
14.6 Report ................................................................................................ 63
14.7 Upgrade ............................................................................................. 63
14.7.1 Upgrade SW ............................................................................ 64
14.7.2 Upgrade Config ....................................................................... 64
14.7.3 Export Config .......................................................................... 64
14.7.4 Export Log ............................................................................... 64
14.7.5 View Upgrade Status .............................................................. 65
14.7.6 Reboot System ........................................................................ 65
14.8 Remote Access ................................................................................. 66
14.9 Dual Safety ........................................................................................ 66
15. Gas Commands ............................................................... 67

15.1.1 Inhibit Point ............................................................................. 67
15.1.2 Cancel Inhibit Point ................................................................. 69
15.1.3 Set Alarm Limits ...................................................................... 71
15.1.4 Get Measurement Values ....................................................... 73
16. Troubleshooting .............................................................. 75

16.1.1 Examples of Fault Messages .................................................. 75
17. Appendix .......................................................................... 76

17.1.1 PowerLoop, BSD-340, Gas Detection Loop ........................... 76
Introduction
1. Introduction
1.1 About the Handbook
This document provides a description of the AutroSafe Maritime Gas
Detection System.
It provides a total overview of a such system, including:

 a general description of the system architecture
 system units
 requirements
 system functionality
 preinstallation and projecting guidelines
 use of the PowerLoop Calculator Tool
 troubleshooting
1.2 The Reader

This handbook is intended for engineers, projecting consultants, sales
personnel and technical personnel responsible for the projecting,
installation and commissioning of a Martime Gas Detection System.
1.3 Reference Documentation

The table below shows an overview of the standard technical
marketing documentation for AutroSafe. Reference is made
throughout this handbook to topics covered by this documentation (the
name of the handbook and part number are explicitely stated where a
reference is made).
Document Name Part number File name

Installation Handbook 116-P-ASAFE-INSTALL/DGB asafeinstall_dgb
Commissioning Handbook 116-P-ASAFE-COMMISS/EGB asafecommiss_egb
Wall Chart 116-P-ASAFE-GASWALLCHA/LGB asafegaswallcha_lgb
Cable Specifications 116-P-ASIFGCABLESPEC/CGB asafeifgcable_cgb
Page 1
Terms, Abbreviations/Acronyms and Definitions
2. Terms, Abbreviations/Acronyms
and Definitions
Term Abbr/ Definition
Acron
AutroCom The Autronica communication protocol between AutroSafe and
AutroMaster or other third party systems.
AutroFieldBus AFB The Autronica serial interface and low level protocol for field devices
(loop controllers and power units / AutroSafe).
AutroMaster The Autronica top-level graphical presentation system.
ISEMS ISEMS: Integrated Safety and Emergency Management System
AutroNet The system’s local area network.
Cause & Effect C&E Logic functions performed in the panel.
End of Line EOL Typically used for End of Line resistors for monitoring of
inputs/outputs.
Fault Warning FWRE Intermediate equipment which routes a fault warning signal from (B)
Routing to a fault warning signal receiving station.
Equipment
Human Machine HMI Graphical interface for the operator/user.
Interface
Fire Protection FPE Fire control or fighting equipment, e.g. extinguishing installation.
Equipment
I/O I/O Input/Output
PowerLoop The Autronica loop communication protocol for high power gas and
flame detectors. 2-wire loop for both power and communication.
System Unit A unit that is directly connected to AutroNet.
Software SW Software
Note:
Many terms and abbreviations in this handbook include the
word “Fire” as they refer to EN 54 standards and regulations.
Note that the standard menu structure for fire detection systems
also applies to the Maritime Gas Panel.
The AutroSafe Maritime Gas System only detects gas alarms.

Therefore, disregard the word “Fire” in all contexts.
Page 2
Brief Introduction
3. Brief Introduction
The AutroSafe Maritime Gas Detection System described in key
words is as follows:
 All detectors are interactive addressable devices with intelligent

communication. Non-addressable detectors can be connected via
a 4-20mA interface.
 Field devices have a built-in calibrated self-test to verify and

confirm their ability to perform correctly. This can be considered as
supplemental to – and can be used instead of – manual testing and
inspection routines.
 Gas Detectors can be connected to the AutroSafe Panel by using a

2-wire loop structure (PowerLoop). The PowerLoop provides both
power to, as well as interactive communication with the detectors.
Studies have shown that a Gas Detection Control System’s cable
requirement can be reduced with 30-60% by utilizing this concept
as opposed to conventional systems.
 The system is a modular and distributed system providing

maximum flexibility. The AutroNet communication facilitates the
possibility to link cause and effect across panels within the same
AutroNet. In other words, any gas detector connected to any panel
can activate any output associated to any panel. Each panel can
have up to 12 custom AutroSafe I/O modules. Within the limitations
of the system, the system designer can freely select the type and
number of modules to be used.
 There are a number of versatile communication options available:

 Physical: Ethernet, RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, Al_Com loop,
AutroFieldBus, PowerLoop and either hardwired or fibre-optic
based AutroNet (Ethernet).
 Protocols: Modbus RTU Slave or Master, Modbus TCP/IP
Slave or Master, ESPA 4.4.4. and AutroCom (Autronica’s
proprietary protocol).
Page 3
Brief Introduction
A typical AutroSafe Maritime Gas System is shown below:
 Fully integrated PowerLoop detectors are connected to the two-

wire PowerLoop, no additional interfaces are required.
 Any 4-20mA devices can be connected to the system’s PowerLoop

by means of the BN-342 4-20mA interface.
 Automatic addressing of detectors – No switch settings required.
Page 4
General Description
4. General Description
4.1 AutroSafe Maritime Gas Detection

Refer to illustration in Chapter 4.2.1; a typical topology for the
AutroSafe Maritime Gas system.
Up to a maximum of 15 addressable Gas detectors can be connected

to each PowerLoop, depending on power load and cable
length/specifications. Each AutroSafe Maritime Gas Control Panel can
support one AutroFieldBus ring, which is capable of handling up to 31
PowerLoop drivers.
Detectors with a 4-20mA signal transferral can be connected to the

PowerLoop by means of the BN-342 interface unit.
4.2 Distributed System Topology

The system is distributed, meaning that panels can be situated in local
equipment- or instrument rooms close to the detectors. The system is
linked together by use of the AutroNet network.
4.2.1 System Architecture

AutroSafe 4 operates on a high-speed and fully redundant Ethernet-
based network solution; AutroNet, providing extremely fast data
transmission. A maximum of 64 system units (panels, controllers) can
connect to the AutroNet. The main circuit board in each single
panel/cabinet provides two Ethernet ports, enabling redundancy.
The Maritime Gas Control Panels will be connected through a

dedicated TCP/IP network. Exact topology to be finalized during
detailed design. The network has the ability to share a common Cause
and Effect (C&E), making us able to carry out logic operations across
different areas. The Maritime Gas Panels are also able to share logic
functions across networks by means of plant wide actions performed
by a centralized operator station.
All detection and activation, Cause and Effect, can be done locally for
each area, i.e. each area can be an independent self-contained
system.
The figure below shows how AutroMaster operator stations are used
to monitor the entire network.
Page 5
General Description
Using AutroMaster operator stations to monitor different subnets
One or more AutroSafe Gas Alarm Control Panels are located in the
designated area as applicable.
I/O are connected via I/O modules inside the panel or I/O units
mounted on the field loops.
Example of I/O information:

• Cargo Pumps
• Valves
• Dampers
• Doors
• Audible & Visual alarms
The table below shows the key information for the AutroSafe system.
Maximum number of Standard

System
AutroSafe Maritime Gas panels per system (connected to the local area network; 64
AutroNet) – BS-420MG/BC4xx
Modules per gas alarm control panel / controller 12
Loop units per Powerloop 15
AutroFieldBus units connected to AutroFieldBus 31
Ethernet ports per fire alarm control panel / controller 2
USB host ports per fire alarm control panel / controller 2
Page 6
General Description
4.2.2 AutroNet
A network solution (AutroNet) with more than two panels requires the
use of switches. Only Phoenix Ethernet switches are approved and
supported by Autronica Fire and Security AS.
For approved switches refer to System Decription, Phoenix Ethernet

Switches.
The switch type and the number of switches depend on the actual
installation / network design (number of panels and the distances
between the panels/switches).
AutroSafe uses a redundant network and for increased safety

switches in the two networks should be powered from different
sources.
The figure below shows a typical network system.
If the transmission length between two Ethernet switches exceeds 100

meters, a fibre optic cable can be used to achieve longer distances.
An Ethernet switch equipped with a multi-mode or single-mode fiber
optic port is required.
AutroNet networks are formed between panels for data exchanging

throughout the system. This solution provides I/O status availability at
any panel connected to the same network. The top-level DCS or HMI
communication link can therefore be connected to any panel in an
AutroNet, or to any switch in the network directly.
Page 7
General Description
4.2.3 AutroFieldBus
AutroFieldBus is used to connect the BSD-321 protocol converter,
power supplies and the BSD-340 Powerloop driver module to the
AutroSafe Panel. An AutroFieldBus interface communicates with all
these devices.
The BSD-321 module provides a way to remotely connect I/O

modules to an AutroSafe panel.
Point Gas Detectors and 4-20mA interfaced gas detectors can be

connected to the PowerLoop driver, BSD-340, via a 2-wire loop.
The BSD-340 PowerLoop module and the BSD-321 module can be

powered locally. They can be located inside the cabinet or in the field,
in close proximity to the gas detectors – thus further reducing cable
requirements. Refer to PowerLoop description in Chapter 0.
4.3 Response Time

The system’s response time for the first alarm entering the system is ≤
2 seconds, for all type of gas detectors.
The maximum response time from first alarm entering the system until
it is processed and reported via AutroCom is ≤ 2 seconds, refer to
table below.
Signal Hardware Response time

Alarm Output module < 2 sec
Alarm AutroCom < 2 sec
Alarm Panel display < 1 sec
Analoge value AutroCom 2 sec (0.5 Hz)
4.4 Configuration
Configuration files for AutroSafe are produced by means of the
AutroSafe Configuration Tool. This is a special software package that
runs on any modern PC with Windows. Refer to the AutroSafe
Configuration Help System integrated into the AutroSafe Configuration
Tool for details.
Page 8
General Description
4.5 Communication to External Systems
4.5.1 Modbus Protocol Communication for C&E Data to Control System

AutroSafe can support single or dual Modbus RTU interfacing
communication with Control Systems. AutroSafe can act as both
Modbus Slave or Modbus Master and the options for connection are
two-wire RS-232 and four wire RS-422 or two-wire RS485. Also
Modbus TCP/IP can be used and allow for up to six instances for each
AutroSafe panel. The Modbus interface provides status information
from the Gas Detection Control System to other control- or
presentation systems.
AutroSafe System status is also transferred. Available commands are

Silence sounders, Reset, set digital output and set time and date. For
further details, refer to the installation and commissioning handbook
for the Modbus interface.
4.5.2 AutroSafe AutroCom Protocol

AutroCom is an Autronica proprietary protocol for AutroSafe, which is
designed to allow the AutroSafe Panel to communicate with external
systems directly. The AutroCom protocol can be transferred on many
physical layers, including RS-232, RS-422, RS-485 and Ethernet. The
control system supplier must implement this protocol to be able to
read it. An AutroCom implementation gives the most extensive
functionality in communication performance between AutroSafe and
other systems.
Page 9
General Description
4.6 PowerLoop (BSD-340)

PowerLoop is a two-wire addressable loop used to interface point
Gas Detectors to the Maritime Gas Panel via the AutroFieldBus. Up to
15 devices may be connected in one addressable loop, depending on
the power consumption of the field devices and the cable topology.
PowerLoop can source a total of 100W (30VDC) to the devices

attached to the loop. It is possible to connect up to 15 field devices to
one PowerLoop: The number and placement of the detectors
connected to each loop has to be calculated during the design phase
as this depends on the power consumption of the connected units,
loop length and dimensions of the cable.
The diagram shows a selection of direct interfaced detectors and

4-20mA interface units connected to the BSD-340 PowerLoop driver.
A maximum of 31 PowerLoop modules can be connected to one

AutroSafe. A combination of BSD-340 modules can be connected in
one AutroFieldBus ring to the Maritime Gas Panel.
Page 10
General Description
4.7 Detectors and Field Devices
4.7.1 Gas Detectors

IR point Gas Detectors etc. connect to PowerLoop modules, type
BSD-340, each of which are capable of handling up to a maximum of
15 detectors on each PowerLoop, depending on the power
consumption of the field equipment and the loop topology. The two-
wire PowerLoop provides intelligent communication and DC power to
the detectors.
4.7.1.1 IR Point HC Gas Detectors

The AutroPoint Maritime Gas Detector is fully integrated by means of
built-in intelligent interface featuring a self-test function. The detector
can transmit analogue information and can also provide maintenance
data.
4.7.1.2 Toxic Gas Detectors

AutroTox Gas Detectors are connected to the PowerLoop by means of
a 4-20mA interface unit, type BN-342. Hot swapable sensor cells for
various gas types.
4.7.1.3 Other 4-20 mA units

Any 4-20mA process transmitter unit can be connected to the
AutroSafe PowerLoop via an BN-342 unit. Intelligent detectors with
internal self-diagnostics are able to provide a general fault signal via
the 4-20mA signal transferal in case of a malfunction.
4.8 PowerLoop Driver BSD-340
4.8.1 Description
The PowerLoop Driver BSD-340 functions as a protocol converter
between AutroFieldBus and PowerLoop. It consists of a PowerLoop
interface for power and communication, and an AutroFieldBus
interface towards an AutroFieldBus Driver
(AutroSafe panel internal).
The PowerLoop is a two-wire bus capable of delivering 30VDC/ 100W

connected in ring topology and is galvanically isolated from the rest of
the system. The PowerLoop interfaces detectors and other loop units
including a 4-20mA interface.
The BSD-340/1 provides a service port which is used for

commissioning and maintenance.
Page 11
General Description
The AutroFieldBus address is set by switches. The AutroFieldBus

requires shielded and twisted-pair cables, category 4, 5 or 6. For more
information, refer to Cable Specification,
116-P-ASIFGCABLESPEC/CGB (file: asifgcablespec_cgb).
There are three versions:

 BSD-340/1Rack mounted version
 BSD-340/2 Rail mounted version
 BSD-340/Ex Field mounted version
For further information, refer to data sheets.
4.8.2 Overview
4.8.3 Connections
Note:
AutroFieldBus is not polarity-dependent.
PowerLoop is polarity-dependent.
Page 12
General Description
AutroFieldBus
Out In
A A' B B'
11 12 13 14 15 16
CT CT
1
3 PE
24V BSD-340
4 PE
5 IE
2
IE
6 7 8 9 10
A+ A- B+ B-
NC
Out In
PowerLoop
Note: “CT” is used as a reference in case segments of the AFB is left

floating when Boosters or Fibre modems are used. This termination is
normally left open. See “System Shielding and Earthing” in
AutroSafe’s System Description (116-P-ASAFE-SYSTEMD/EGB) for
further directions.
4.8.4 Earthing and Shielding

Shielded cable is required for the AutroFieldBus and PowerLoop, and
the shielding shall be connected to the instrument earth (IE) at one
end of the loop. Any armouring shall be connected to the protective
earth (PE) at multiple points. Refer to AutroSafe’s Installation
Handbook (116-P-ASAFE-INSTALL/DGB) for detailed description of
shielding of cables.
4.8.5 Capacity / Limitations

Generally, the following applies:
 Maximum 15 detectors can be connected to each PowerLoop.

 May require forced cooling, dissipates up to 30W when fully
loaded.
 No branches allowed on PowerLoop or AutroFieldBus.
The total power consumption to PowerLoop units, detectors and cable

loss must be verified by the PowerLoop Calculator (part of the
AutroSafe Configuration Tool).
 See also datasheet for BSD-340.
Page 13
General Description
4.9 AutroPoint Maritim Gas Detectors

The AutroPoint HC300PL (PowerLoop version) and AutroPoint HC-200
are diffusion-based, infrared combustible gas detectors that provides
continuous, fixed monitoring of flammable hydrocarbon gases from 0 to
100% Lower Explosive Limit. Standard device outputs include an
electrically isolated 4-20 mA signal with HART communication protocol,
and RS-485 serial communication. Serial communication protocols
supported include MODBUS and ASCII. An optional relay output board
with two programmable alarm relay outputs and one fault relay output is
available.
For further information, refer to data sheet 116-P-HC300PL/CGB (file

name hc300pl_cgb) and datasheet 116-P-HC200/CGB (file name
hc200_cgb).
4.10 PowerLoop 4-20 mA Input Unit BN-342
4.10.1 Description
The PowerLoop 4-20mA Input Unit BN-342 is a general purpose
PowerLoop interface designed for third party detectors connected to
the AutroSafe Maritime Gas System.
The PowerLoop is a two-wire power and signalling bus connected in

ring topology and is galvanically isolated from the rest of the system.
The unit communicates with AutroSafe using the PowerLoop protocol.

The unit has a 4-20mA input galvanically isolated from the
PowerLoop.
For further information, refer to data sheets.
4.10.2 Versions
 BN-342/EX: EEx me version including 9,5W DC/DC for external
detector power supply
 BN-342/1: 19” 3U rack version, bare PCB with 19” rack front panel,
no DC output
 BN-342/2: DIN rail version, bare PCB in a open DIN rail box, no
DC output
Page 14
General Description
4.10.3 Overview
4.10.4 Connection – Current Source
Page 15
General Description
4.10.5 Connection – Current Sink
4.11 Outputs
4.11.1 Programmable Digital Outputs in Panel (BSJ-310 Module)

Discrete open collector outputs can be used for hardwired signals.
BSJ-310 modules, which fit in any AutroSafe BS-420MG or Controller
BC-420 panel, can be used for this purpose. In addition 24V DC
relays can be supplied for each output, which will provide volt-free
contacts if required. Each BSJ-310 module has eight open collector
outputs. Any detector within an AutroNet network can control any
output within the same network.
Delayed action and voting can be programmed for these outputs. For
example such outputs can be used for digital signals to the Control
System (inputs).
4.11.2 Programmable EOL Monitored 24VDC Outputs (BSB-310)

End-of-line resistor monitored 24V DC outputs can be used to drive
horns, sirens, bells, beacon and strobes etc. The BSB-310 module
provides four 1A automatic fused outputs. Maximum load per module
is 3A in total. Any detector within an AutroNet network can control any
output within the same network. The BSB-310 outputs are specially
designed for sounders and bells, thus programming facilities include a
variety of options like;
 SOLAS function (Safety Of Life At Sea)
 Delayed action
 Voting
 Digital output, monitored
Page 16
General Description
4.12 Inputs
4.12.1 BSE-310
The input module BSE-310 provides four monitored inputs for digital
input devices and other controlling inputs.
Typical applications are monitoring of switches, relays and contacts.
4.12.2 BSE-320
The Input module BSE-320 provides 8 non-monitored and galvanically
isolated inputs for digital input devices and other controlling inputs.
Page 17
General Description
4.13 AutroMaster Application/Description
AutroMaster is a remote monitoring and control

system that enables full operation of the AutroSafe
Maritime Gas Detection System. All alarms, faults,
inhibits, overrides and outputs can be monitored and
controlled from AutroMaster.
If the connection between the system and

AutroMaster should go down, the AutroSafe system
will operate as normal as it can function as a fully
autonomous system.
The AutroMaster provides an intuitive graphical

control and monitoring interface helping you to save
time when every second counts.
The interface provides an overview of the monitored area (gas

installations) in graphical form with the possibility to display and
control a broad range of systems, in addition to the AutroSafe
Maritime Gas Detection System.
Status information is displayed in real-time with easy-to-understand

graphical representation. A trend facility is available to monitor the
performance of Detectors.
AutroMaster dynamically presents values for gas density with different

colours in the monitored area – making it easy to perform the
necessary actions.
AutroMaster provides the possibility of customer specific information in

the monitored area in information layers.
Navigation around the monitored area is easily done via the

navigation pad and the use of the zoom function – giving possibility to
display everything in great detail.
Power/water supply networks, sprinkler systems, emergency lights,

escape routes, fire doors or any other object which may be relevant in
case of an emergency can be displayed. These layers can be toggled
on/off in order to simplify overviews and present only the information
of interest.
The AutroMaster offers comprehensive log functionality by allowing

users to create reports and logs of various properties and information
from the system. Operators can create historical logs for the system
and/or individual units between specified dates, analogue values read
from detectors, disablement data, configuration data, version
information and fault/alarm information. The report generator provides
the operator with a simple method of creating a cost-effective system
log for maintenance and documentation purposes.
Page 18
General Description
The following options are available for report creation:

 History
 Reports of events from the system and connected subsystems
(alarms, faults, disablements, etc.) during specified periods of
time
 Analogue Values
 Reports measured values from detectors within ranges and
during given periods of time
 Disablements
 Reports on all currently disabled groups or a given group
 Configurations
 Reports a comparison of the current configuration implemented
in AutroMaster with a backed-up configuration
 Versions
 Reports comparisons of the present configured options
(symbols, functions, etc.) with backed-up configurations
 Miscellaneous
 Generates a report without any parameters regarding alarms
and/or faults
Example of detector trending in AutroMaster.
AutroMaster provides users with information about system units in

terms of recorded values and events, showing development over time.
This to help to indicate problems and isolate faults/sources of
(unwanted) alarms.
Page 19
Gas Functionality
5. Gas Functionality
5.1 Inhibit Point

All loop input units can be inhibited. When one or several points are
inhibited, the point(s) will not signal alarm to outputs. An inhibited point
will however present low/high alarm on all panels and AutroCom as
usual. This includes panel buzzer, panel LEDs and panel LCD display.
It is only possible to inhibit a unit from the panel menu or via

AutroCom. An inhibited point will be inhibited until the unit is un-
inhibited by a manual operation or by timeout. Inhibit status will be
indicated by a panel LED.
5.2 Set Alarm Limits

By using the Set Alarm Limits (via the menu) is possible to change a
gas detector’s alarm limit for Low Alarm and High Alarm (password
restricted).
5.3 Get Measurement Values

By using the Get Measurement Values (via the menu) it is possible to
get analogue measurement values for a selected gas detector.
Analogue values can be monitored on the panel or on the

AutroMaster.
5.4 Support for Common Trouble Output

The Common Trouble Output can be connected to a BSB-310,
BN-310 or a BSJ-310 I/O module. The output is activated if any kind of
fault occurs in the Operation Zone to which it is connected. In addition,
any disablement or point inhibition within the Operation Zone will
cause the unit to be activated.
5.5 Support for Gas Detectors (4-20 mA input)

The AutroSafe Gas Detection System supports the use of gas
detectors that are to be connected to the PowerLoop via the
PowerLoop 4-20mA Input Unit BN-342. This interface includes a user-
configurable type that may be used to interface detectors with a 4-20
mA output signal.
Page 20
Gas Functionality
5.6 Language
The panels prepared for the gas market are available in English only
(no localized-language variants exist).
Note. In order for Maritime Gas functionality to be available, “Eng. Oil

& Gas” must be selected in the language menu in the AutroSafe
Configuration Tool (Select Language).
Page 21
Panel Overview
6. Panel Overview
6.1 Introduction
6.1.1 Panel Variants

The user interface and operation of the Maritime Gas Panel
BS-420MG and the Operator Panel BS-430 are identical. The panel is
therefore referred to as the operator panel throughout this handbook.
The Information Panel serves as an indication device only.

The LED indicators are identical to the ones on the upper section of
the operator panel, but the panel provides different buttons.
6.1.2 Indication Devices

During normal operation when the power is ON, the Power indicator
always displays a steady green light.
Apart from this, only indicators relevant to the actual condition are
visible. For example, if a fault is present the fault indicator will have a
yellow light.
Page 22
Panel Overview
6.2 Maritime Gas Panel

All alarm handling and system features can be configured, controlled
and monitored from the panel.
Each panel is assigned to one Operation Zone (refer to «Zonal

Definitions» in Appendix). Relative to its own zone, a panel is local,
while it is remote to operation zones which are not encompassed by
the local zone. All events and actions occurring in a particular
operation zone must be handled from a local panel.
The panel displays information on events occurring in all operation

zones. However, the type of events and the level of details of the
given information depends on which operation zone the information is
related to. Local panels will list all detection zones in alarm state.
Remote operator panels will list remote alarms only, and function as
«indication only» devices.
The panel consists of two main sections. The upper section, and the
lower section which is the Operator Part.
Page 23
Panel Overview
6.3 Repeater Panel BU-BV-420

The Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 serves for both system mode (level 2
access) and an information mode
Settings on a dipswitch determines the type of panel. Each panel type

is described in the following chapters.
6.3.1 System Mode

The Repeater Panel in system mode is intended to give information
related to alarms in the relevant Operation Zone and allow technical
personnel to operate alarms. The panel is identical to the upper
section of the operator panel.
The panel is used to silence and resound sounders, and to reset

alarms within a defined operation zone.
Each panel is assigned to one operation zone. Relative to its own

zone, a panel is local while it is remote to all other operation zones.
All events and actions occurring in a particular operation zone must be
handled from a local panel.
The whole system can be reset from this panel, provided that the
panel's relation to the operation zone is defined this way.
The panel displays information on alarms occurring in all operation

zones. However, the level of details of the given information depends
on which operation zone the information is related to.
6.3.2 Information Mode

The Repeater Panel in information mode is intended to give additional
information related to the defined Operation Zone(s). The LED
indicators are identical to the ones on the upper section of the
operator panel, but the panel provides other buttons (Next Window
and Lamp Test).
Panels are distributed throughout the system to give the general

public information related to alarm situations. The panels serve as
indication devices only.
The panel can display minimum information on alarms, warnings,

faults, disablements and tests. No further details are available. Each
of the conditions are presented in a separate condition window, in one
mode only.
Page 24
Panel Overview
6.4 Loop Panels
6.4.1 System Loop Panel BU-110

From the System Loop Panel BU-110 it is possible to mute the panel’s
internal buzzer, silence/resound sounders/bells etc. and reset the
system.
The panel can be configured (by means of the configuration tool) to

show detection zones and point information in an alarm situation, or
detection zones only.
Only points in alarm are shown in the display. Faults and

disablements are indicated by LED indicators. The total number of
detection zones in alarm will always be shown.
By operating the More Events Button, it is possible to scroll through

and view detailed information of the first 64 alarms (or 32 first alarms,
if the panel is configured to show both detection zones and points).
6.4.2 Information Loop Panel BV-110

The Information Loop Panel BV-110 serves as an indication device
only. It provides information related to the defined operation zone(s).
The panel can be configured (by means of the configuration tool) to

show detection zones and point information in an alarm situation, or
detection zones only.
By operating the More Events Button, it is possible to scroll through

and view detailed information of the first 64 alarms (or 32 first alarms,
if the panel is configured to show both detection zones and points).
The panel can store up to 6 faults and 6 disablements. The total

number of faults and disablements in the system will always be
shown, but it is only possible to scroll through and view detalied
information of the first 6 faults and disablements (using the More
Events Button).
Page 25
Panel Overview
6.5 The Menu Display

During Normal Operation, the backlight in the menu display is always
on. The menu display has 16 lines of 40 characters.The display is
divided into several display windows showing different types of
information.
6.6 Adjusting the Display Contrast

The display contrast can be adjusted (applies to BS—420MG).
 To increase the contrast, press and hold down the More Events
button, while pressing the red Silence Alarms button (or Next
Window button) .
 To decrease the contrast, press and hold down the More Events
button, while pressing the green Reset System button.
More Events Button
Front Push Buttons
Page 26
Panel Overview
6.7 Indication Devices
6.7.1 Upper Section
ALARM
The red alarm indicator shows that one or more detection
zones within the operating zone of the Operator Panel are
in alarm state.
 Blinking red light:
In the event of an alarm.
 Steady red light:
All audible and visual indicators activated by the alarm
condition have been deactivated by operating the
Silence Alarms button. The control and indicating
equipment still remain in the alarm condition.
External Alarm Output

Steady red light when the message is sent to a remote
device.
Fault More Events

The yellow Fault Warning indicator shows the presence In the event of more than one alarm.
of a fault within the operation zone of the operator The red More Events indicator shows that several detection
panel. zones within an operating zone are in the fire alarm state.
 Blinking light  Blinking red light:
Unaccepted fault warnings exist. In the event of an alarm. The audible and visual indicators
 Steady light are still in active state.
All fault warnings are accepted.  Steady red light:
The Silence Alarms button has been pressed. All audible
Function Disabled and visual indicators activated by the alarm are no longer
active. The control and indicating equipment still remain in
Steady yellow light when one or more of the following
the alarm condition.
components within the operation zone of the operator
panel are in the disabled state:
 function delayed
 individual points
 detection zones
 alarm zones
 Audible and visual indicators, Fire Alarm Routing
Equipment, Fire Protection Equipment and Fault
Warning Routing Equipment.
Testing
Steady yellow light when one or more detection zones
within the operation zone of the operator
panel have been manually set to the test state.
System Fault
Steady yellow light when a system fault within the
operating zone of the operator panel is present.
Power
Steady green light when power is ON.
Page 27
Panel Overview
6.7.2 The Operator Section (lower left section)
Function Delayed
Steady yellow light indicates that Immediate Output Actioning has been disabled (manual operation in
Menu Mode), i.e. a delay period is active for audible and visual indicators or Fire Alarm Routing
Equipment (FARE). Configurable.
Alarms Fault
Yellow light when a fault is detected on one or more audible and visual indicators. The Fault indicator
will also have a yellow light. Blinking (not accepted) / Steady (accepted).
External Alarm Fault

Yellow light when a fault is detected on Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE). The Fault indicator
will also have a yellow light. Blinking (not accepted) / Steady (accepted).
Alarm Disabled
Steady yellow light when one or more audible and visual indicators are disabled. The Function
Disabled indicator has also a steady yellow light.
External Alarm Disabled

Steady yellow light when the signal to Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE) has been disabled. The
Function Disabled indicator has also a steady yellow light.
Detector Inhibit
Steady yellow light if any points are inhibited.
Local Mode
Blinking yellow light if contact to the presentation system is lost. The Fault indicator will also blink and
a fault message will be shown.
Both indicators will have a steady yellow light if the fault message is accepted. If a connection has
been lost and is repaired again, a fault message is shown and the fault message and both indicators
will blink until the fault is accepted, on which both indicators will be turned off and the fault will
disappear.
Page 28
Panel Overview
6.8 Operating Buttons
6.8.1 Operator Panels (upper and lower section) /

Repeater Panel (upper section)
More Events Button (Front Push Button)

Front Push Buttons
Utility Buttons
(BS-420 / BS-430)
Alphanumeric Keyboard
(BS-420 / BS-430)
Manoeuvre Buttons
(BS-420 / BS-430)
Page 29
Panel Overview
6.8.1.1 Front Push Buttons
Front Push Buttons

Button Designation Access
Level
Mute Panel Used to mute the panel. Timeout. 1
(black) (/Mute Int. Buzzer).
The Backlight Brightness can be toggled between
high and low by holding the Silence Buzzer button for
5 seconds until audible beep (access level 1).
Silence Alarms Used to silence Fire Alarm Devices (audible and 2
(red) visual indicators) and cause lamps to go steady.
Timeout.
Reset System Used to reset the system. 2
(green) In addition, a lamp test can be performed by pressing
and holding the Reset button for at least 5 seconds.
The lamp test is performed in access level 1 (no use
of key).
More Events Used to scroll downwards among events in currently 2
(black) active window (scroll page by page). Possible only if
there are more alarms than possible to display in the
window.
6.8.1.2 Utility Buttons

Applies to the BS-420 / BS-430.
Utility Buttons
Button Designation
Menu (black) Used to toggle between Operation Mode and Menu Mode.
Operation Mode (operate button) >> Menu Mode (operate button or
time-out) >> Operation Mode.
Close Window Used to move back one level / show previous picture if the display is
(black) not showing information on the top level.
Page 30
Panel Overview
6.8.1.3 Alphanumeric Keyboard

The alphanumeric keyboard includes the numbers 1 to 9, the letters a
to z and other feature keys (see table below).
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Button Designation
0 The number 0.
Space key Used to enter a space between words.
6.8.1.4 Manoeuvre Buttons
Manoeuvre Buttons
Button When accessible (mode) Description
Enter When the cursor is on a list The properties of a selected unit is
item. shown.
The selected menu page on the display is
shown if the item is a submenu.
Accepts the selected function if the item
is a function.
When the cursor is on an Used to select/approve a selection
item in a single select list. (parameter) or return.
Used to scroll lines up or down.
Used to change numerical values.
Up/down
arrow
buttons
Back / Used to cancel an input character
Cancel (backspace).
Page 31
Panel Overview
6.8.2 Information Panel
Front Push Buttons
More Events Button
Front Push Buttons

Button Designation Access
Level
Mute Panel Used to mute the panel, i.e. silence the internal 1
(black) buzzer. Timeout.
(Information Loop Panel: The Mute Panel button is
named Silence Buzzer. The Backlight Brightness can
be toggled between high and low by holding the
Silence Buzzer button for 5 seconds until audible
beep (access level 1).
Next Window Used to step to the next condition window (only 1
(red) windows with active information are displayed). After
all windows have been shown, the first window is
displayed. When a timeout on no operation has been
ended, the highest prioritized window is displayed.
Lamp Test Used for testing the LED indicators. All indicators are 1
(green) lit for 5 seconds, and the LCD (display) will show a
pattern to verify all pixels (will turn all white, then all
black).
More Events Used to scroll pages of information related to the 1
(black) selected condition window, if there are more events
than the display can show.
Page 32
Panel Overview
6.9 Internal Buzzer

All panels provide a buzzer which is activated differently depending on
the panel in question. See the following chapters for information on
the buzzer behaviour for the different panels.
Generally, each condition may have its own sound pattern. If more
than one condition is present simultaneously, the buzzer will reflect
the condition which has the highest priority.
The buzzer can be silenced by pressing the Mute Panel button.
If the reason for the buzzer signal still exists, the buzzer will resound
after a predefined time.
6.9.1 Maritime Gas Panel BS-420MG

The internal buzzer is activated in the cases of:
 System Fault
 Faults
 Alarm
 Prealarm
 Early Warning
6.9.2 Repeater Panel BU-BV-420 (system/information mode)

The internal buzzer on the BU-BV-420 panel is activated in the cases
of:
 System Fault
 Alarm
6.9.3 System Loop Panel BU-110

The internal buzzer on the BU-100 panel is activated in the cases of:
 Alarm
 Internal System Fault
 Communication Fault
6.9.4 Information Loop Panel BV-110

The internal buzzer on the BU-100 panel is activated in the cases of:
 Alarm
 Fault
 Internal System Fault
 Communication Fault
Page 33
Operation Mode
7. Operation Mode
7.1 Introduction
The operator panel can be in either Operation Mode or Menu Mode.
When no one is operating the panel and no button has been pressed,
the panel will always be in Operation Mode.
The display may look as follows in the panel’s idle state.
19:23
Total: 3
AUTROSAFE
SelfVerify
Note that an alarm, a disablement, test or fault will always be indicated

on the display when such events occur.
NOTE:
All events that may occur are presented in Operation Mode.
All handling of events, i.e. Silence Alarms, Accept and
System Reset takes place in Operation Mode.
It is possible to enter Operation Mode in two different ways.

 initial mode (start up) - idle state
 when pressing the menu button in Menu Mode, which will leave
menu mode from all menu levels
Page 34
Operation Mode
7.2 Conditions in Operation Mode

In Operation Mode, the system can be in quiescent condition (lowest
priority), or the system can be in one or any combination of the
following conditions:
 alarm condition (highest priority)

 warning condition (including prealarm and early warning)
 fault warning condition
 disablement condition
 test condition
7.3 Alarm Levels

A detector may signal different levels of alarm, indicating the amount
of gas currently present. These are;
 Alarm Level (the highest level)
 Warning, including:
 Prealarm Level
 Early Warning
Whenever a detector detects a transition from one alarm level to

another, this event is reported to the system as an Early Warning,
Prealarm or Alarm signal, which in turn will initiate the appropriate
actions.
7.4 Access Levels

All user interface controls are classified as belonging to one of the four
different access levels described below:
Access Access Remedy Description

Level
1 No key or password Freely accessible. All mandatory indications are visible at
required. access level 1 without prior manual intervention.
2 Access by key. Accessible by persons having a specified responsibility for
safety.
3 Password restricted. Accessible by persons trained and authorized to do

reconfiguration of site specific data and maintenance
according to the manufacturer’s published instruction.
4 Mechanical tool. Accessible by persons doing repair work and changing
firmware.
Page 35
Menu Mode
8. Menu Mode
8.1 How to Enter Menu Mode

To enter the Menu Mode from operation mode or the panel’s idle
state, the Menu button must be pressed. The menu has 5 different
menu selections, including SHOW STATUS, DISABLE, ENABLE,
SYSTEM and SERVICE.
NOTE:
If an alarm condition occurs when you are in Menu Mode,
you have to press the Menu button to re-enter Operation
Mode in order to activate the Silence Alarms button and the
Reset button.
8.2 The Menu Mode Display

In Menu Mode the display only needs one window showing the
selected part of the system menu. The information field at the lower
part of the display is reserved to give the operator information on the
different actions that can be performed from the alphanumeric
keyboard (Action Digits), or short fault messages. This field is always
highlighted.
If there is an alarm condition, the last alarm detected and the total
number of present alarms will be shown below the information field.
Main Menu Structure
Main Menu
Show Status
Disable
Enable
System
Service
Page 36
Menu Mode
8.3 Buttons Used to Operate the Menu

In addition to the Menu button, the following buttons are used during
operation (refer to chapter 6.8):
 the alphanumeric key pad (digits 0 to 9)

 the ENTER button
 the up/down arrow buttons
 the Close Window button used to move back one level / show
previous picture (if the display is not showing information on the
top level)
 the Back/Cancel button used to cancel an input character
(backspace).
If no button is operated within a preconfigured timeout (operation

mode / menu mode 25 seconds) or the menu button is operated, the
menu will be terminated and the operator panel will re-enter operation
mode.
8.4 Action Digits in Menu Mode
8.4.1 Introduction
When operating in Menu Mode, special Action Digits will appear in the
highlighted information field at the lower part of the display. These
digits show which action the operator may perform.
Digits 1 to 4 on the alphanumeric keyboard are dedicated for

the different actions (Action Digits).
8.4.2 Action Digits Table

The Action Digits in Menu Mode are listed in the table below.
Action Digits
Action Digit When action is available Used to…..
ENABLE Available in the Show Disablement • enable the selected disabled
Menu. component.
PRINT DATA Optional. • print the selected data.

Available in the Show Status Menu
(optional).
READ Available in the Log Menu. • read the selected events
FORWARD forward page by page (if
more than one page).
READ Available in the Log Menu. • read the selected events
BACKWARDS backwards page by page (if
more than one page).
Page 37
Menu Structure
8.5 How to Operate in Menu Mode

All menu selections represent a digit. To enter a menu selection, you
simply have to press the corresponding digit. Then you can either;
 use the keyboard to enter text into an input field
or
 press the ENTER button and use the up/down arrows to move the
cursor to the desired selection.
9. Menu Structure
Note:
The menus in the following chapters are based on the standard

menu structure for AutroSafe fire detection and gas
applications, therefore, they include fire and gas functionality.
Please note that Fire Alarm Devices (FAD) relate to audible and
visual indicators.
Page 38
Menu Structure
Page 39
Show Status
10. Show Status
10.1 Introduction
The Show Status menu is accessed from the main menu in Menu
Mode.
The menu gives the current status of the following conditions:

 Alarms
 Alarm Warnings
 Faults
 Disablements
 Detection Zones in Test
 Activated Outputs
 Active Sensors
 Inhibited Points
10.2 Show Status Menu
Page 40
Show Status
10.3 Show Status - Alarms

This menu gives detailed information on the current status of fire
alarms in the system. It provides the following information:
 the location
 the exact time of activation
 an identification of the detectors (address)
 the type of detectors (gas detectors)
 all detectors in alarm
 all activated outputs
10.4 Show Status – Alarm Warnings

This menu gives detailed information on the current status of Alarm
Warnings (Prealarms / Early Warnings) in the system. It provides the
following information:
 the location
 the exact time of activation
 an identification of the detectors (address)
 the type of detectors (gas detectors)
 all detectors in Alarm Warning
10.5 Show Status - Faults

This menu gives detailed information on the current status of faults in
the system. It provides the following information:
 the location
 an identification of the address
 the nature of the fault
 a detailed text
10.6 Show Status - Disablements

This menu gives detailed information on the current status of the
disablements in the system. It provides detailed information on the
disablement of the following:
 Detection Zones
 Points (gas detectors)
 Fire Alarm Devices (audible and visual indicators)
 Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE)
 Outputs (FPE)
 Fault Warning Routing Equipment (FWRE)
 Immediate Output Actioning
 All
Page 41
Show Status
10.7 Show Status - Detection Zones in Test

This menu gives detailed information on the zones in test mode.
10.8 Show Status – Activated Outputs

This menu gives detailed information on activated outputs.
10.9 Show Status - Active Sensors

Not applicable for Maritime Gas.
10.10 Show Status - Inhibited Points

This menus gives detailed information on inhibited points.
Page 42
Disabling
11. Disabling
11.1 General
From the Disable menu you can disable the following:
 Detection Zones
 Points (gas detectors)
 Outputs
 Carriers
When disabling components, a disablement time is given. The

disablement time can be increased for already disabled components
by entering the disable menu.
For information on Disablement Sources, refer to chapter Feil! Fant

ikke referansekilden..
11.2 Disable Menu
Page 43
Disabling
11.3 Indications on the Operator Panel

When one or several disablements exist, the Function Disabled
indicator on the Operator Panel will show a yellow steady light. The
panel’s display will indicate that a disablement exists (as shown in the
example below).
19:23
DISABLEMENTS Total: 1
DISABLED DZs Total: 1
1 CANTEEN
11.4 Disabling Activated / Deactivated Components

When you disable an active component, for example, a sounder
issuing an alarm signal, the component will immediately switch to the
OFF state without any user notification and/or confirmation cause.
A disablement of a deactivated component, for example, a sounder

not issuing an alarm signal, will have no immediate effect on system
operation.
Both activated and deactivated disabled components will remain

switched off until enabled.
11.5 Disabling Detection Zones

When you disable a Detection Zone - all points within the specified
detection zone will be disabled. A detection zone will not be indicated
as disabled unless all points within the zone have been disabled.
A disablement time can be set. When the disablement time expires,

the detection zone will automatically be enabled. The detection zone
can also be enabled manually from the Enable Menu.
11.6 Disabling Points

When you disable a Point (gas detectors), no alarm signal or fault
signal from this point will be sent in the event of an alarm / fault.

the point(s) will automatically be enabled. The point(s) can also be
enabled manually from the Enable Menu.
If all points in a detection zone are disabled, the detection zone will be
indicated as disabled. If at least one point within this detection zone is
Page 44
Disabling
enabled manually, the detection zone will be indicated as enabled. If

the points are given different disablement times, the detection zone
will be automatically indicated as enabled when the first point is
enabled (i.e. when the point with the shortest disablement time is
enabled).
11.7 Disabling Fire Alarm Devices

When you disable a Fire Alarm Device (audible or visual indicator), the
output which controls the FAD will be disabled. The FAD will thus give
no audible indication.
You can disable a single unit (audible or visual indicator) / alarm

circuit, or all units (FADs) in a selected Alarm Zone.
the FAD(s) will automatically be enabled. The single FAD or all FADs
in a selected Alarm Zone can also be enabled manually from the
Enable Menu.
11.8 Disabling Fire Alarm Routing Equipment

When you disable Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE), the output
which controls such equipment will be disabled. In the event of an
alarm, no fire alarm signals / fault signals will be sent to the fire
brigade.
the Fire Alarm Routing Equipment will automatically be enabled. The
equipment can also be enabled manually from the Enable Menu.
11.9 Disabling Outputs

When you disable outputs which control Fire Protection Equipment
(FPE), in the event of an alarm / fault, no signals will be sent to trigger
the equipment. You can disable a single output, or all outputs in the
Operation Zone.

the outputs which control Fire Protection Equipment will automatically
be enabled. The outputs can also be enabled manually from the
Enable Menu.
Page 45
Disabling
11.10 Disabling Fault Warning Routing Equipment

When you disable Fault Warning Routing Equipment (FWRE), the
output which controls such equipment will be disabled. In the event of
a fault, no fault warning signals will be sent to, for example, the
security firm.

the Fault Warning Routing Equipment will automatically be enabled.
The equipment can also be enabled manually from the Enable Menu.
11.11 Disabling Carriers

A Carrier is a loop unit hosting one or several subunits.
When you disable a Carrier, the Carrier itself and all its subunits
(functions) will be disabled. It is also possible to select and disable
one or several subunits belonging to a Carrier.
Enablement can be performed manually from the Enable Menu, or will

occur automatically when a defined disablement time expires.
When the Enable command is executed or the disablement time

expires, the Carrier and all its subunits (functions) will be enabled -
with the exception of subunits that have been disabled from other
disablement sources, for example, by means of a disable input device.
The subunits that have been disabled from other sources must also be
enabled by means of the same sources.
11.12 Disabling Immediate Output Actioning

In an alarm situation, the actioning of outputs in a Delayed Action
detection zone can be delayed. To achieve a delay, Immediate
Output Actioning must be disabled.
It is possible to disable immediate output actioning for all Day / Night

areas or for selected Day / Night areas.
Note: A Day / Night area encompasses one or more detection zones

within the same operation zone.
The delay affects the actioning of outputs to Fire Alarm Devices

(audible and visual indicators), Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE)
and/or Fire Protection Equipment (FPE).
Note that an alarm from a manual call-point will normally (point delay
OFF) give immediate ouput actioning even though the immediate
output actioning has been disabled.
The function is useful in situations where you want to disable

immediate output actioning at special periods to avoid causing any
unnecessary disturbance.
Page 46
Enabling
12. Enabling
12.1 General
From the Enable menu you can enable the following:
 Detection Zones
 Points (fire detectors, manual call points)
 Outputs
 Carriers
12.2 Enable Menu
Page 47
Enabling
12.3 Enabling Activated / Deactivated Components

Setting the arm state of a disabled deactivated component to
ENABLED will have no immediate effect on system operation. The
component will remain deactivated until its activation state is set to an
active state (on alarm or on command).
12.4 Enabling Detection Zones

When you enable a Detection Zone - all points within the specified
detection zone will be enabled - except for those that are individually
disabled as described in the subsequent chapter. A detection zone will
not be indicated as enabled unless at least one point within the zone
is enabled.
12.5 Enabling Points

When a Point (gas detectors) is enabled (manually or when the
disablement time expires), alarm signals will be sent from this point in
the event of an alarm.
If all points in a detection zone are disabled, the detection zone will be
indicated as disabled. If at least one point within this detection zone is
enabled, the detection zone will be indicated as enabled. If the points
are given different disablement times, the detection zone will be
automatically indicated as enabled when the first point is enabled (i.e.
when the point with the shortest disablement time is enabled).
12.6 Enabling Fire Alarm Devices

When you enable a Fire Alarm Device (audible or visual indicator), the
output which controls the audible or visual indicator will be enabled.
The FAD will now give an audible indication.
You can enable a single unit (audible or visual indicator) / alarm

circuit, or all units (FADs) in a selected Alarm Zone.
Page 48
Enabling
12.7 Enabling Fire Alarm Routing Equipment

When you enable Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE), the output
which controls such equipment will be enabled. In the event of an
alarm, fire alarm signals may be sent to the fire brigade (configurable).
12.8 Enabling Outputs

When you enable outputs which control Fire Protection Equipment
(FPE), in the event of an alarm, signals will be sent to trigger the
equipment. You can enable a single output, or all outputs in the
Operation Zone.
12.9 Enabling Fault Warning Routing Equipment

When you enable Fault Warning Routing Equipment (FWRE), the
output which controls such equipment will be enabled. In the event of
a fault, fault warning signals will be sent to, for example, the security
firm.
12.10 Enabling Carriers

A Carrier is a loop unit hosting one or several subunits.
When you enable a Carrier manually or when a disablement time has

been set and expires, the Carrier itself and all its subunits (functions)
will be enabled - with the exception of subunits (functions) that have
been disabled from other disablement sources, for example, by means
of a disable input device. The subunits that have been disabled from
other sources must also be enabled by means of the same sources.
12.11 Enabling Immediate Output Actioning

When enabling Immediate Output Actioning, there will be no delay on
the actioning of outputs to Fire Alarm Devices (audible and visual
indicators) and/or Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE) in zones
configured as Delayed Action Detection Zones, Delayed Coincidence
Detection Zones or SOLAS Detection Zones.
It is possible to enable immediate output actioning for all Day / Night

areas or for selected Day / Night areas.
Page 49
System Menu
13. System Menu
13.1 Introduction
The System Menu allows authorized personnel to:
 set/change date and time
 view the current program version and project information
(identification, customer name, version of site configuration data
and configuration tool)
 enter or leave access level 3 (to reconfigure or maintain site
specific data), set/change password
 printer; feed paper
 change language (toggle between English / local language)
 manually initialize the system
 cancel inhibited points
 start / stop automatic Day / Night Operation, show timers Not
applicable.
Only users with access level 2 (key), 3 (password restricted) or a

higher access level are allowed to do changes in the system menu.
13.2 System Menu
Page 50
System Menu
13.3 How to Enter Access Level 3 / Set Password
13.3.1 Introduction
This menu describes how to enter/leave Access Level 3 and to set a
new password (requires Access Level 3). All user interface controls
are classified as belonging to one of the four different access levels
described below:
Access Access Remedy Description

Level
1 No key or password Freely accessible. All mandatory indications are visible at
required. access level 1 without prior manual intervention.
2 Access by key. Accessible by persons having a specified responsibility for
safety.

firmware.
13.4 How to Change Language

This menu allows you to determine the language which is to be used
(English / local language) for a panel. A change in language has to be
done locally on each panel.
13.5 How to Initialize the System

The AutroSafe system is automatically initialized when the panel is
turned on. However, in certain cases it may be necessary to manually
initialize the panel.
Page 51
System Menu
13.6 Cancel Inhibited Points

In an alarm situation, an inhibited point will not signal alarms to
outputs, but only present alarms, prealarms and early warnings on all
panels and AutroCom as usual (see Service Menu, Inhibit Point,
chapter 15.1.1).
This menu allows you to globally cancel all inhibited points (global
override function), meaning that all outputs that are configured to be
activated in an alarm situation will be activated.
13.7 Day / Night Timers
13.7.1 Starting / Stopping Automatic Day / Night

Operation from the Control Panel
From the Control Panel, it is possible to Start or Stop the automatic
day / night operation in the System Menu. After activation (Start) of the
automatic day/night operation, the affected Operation Zones will be
set to their correct state (Disabled or Enabled Immediate Output
Actioning) according to the specified schedules.
After deactivation (Stop) of the automatic day/night operation, the

affected Operation Zones will be left in its current state in respect to
Disabled/Enabled Immediate Output Actioning
13.7.2 Overriding Automatic Day / Night Operation from the Control Panel
It is possible to override the automatic day / night operation from the
control panel by stopping the Day / Night Timers, and then issuing
Enable / Disable Immediate Output Actioning commands manually.
Page 52
Service Commands
14. Service Commands
14.1 Introduction
From the operator panel you can perform service commands. To use
the Service Commands, access level 3 is required.
Access Level Access Remedy Description

firmware.
14.2 Service Menu

The Service Menu includes the following submenus:
NOTE:
The menu is called “Oil and Gas Commands” but these commands
are also intended for maritime Gas systems.
Dual Safety commands do not apply to Maritime Gas.
Page 53
Service Commands
14.3 Testing
The Test Menu allows you to test Detection Zones (detectors and
manual call-points) and Outputs.
14.3.1 Testing Detection Zones
14.3.1.1 Indications on the Operator Panel

During testing, the Testing indicator on the Operator Panel will show a
yellow steady light. The panel’s display will always indicate that a test
is being performed. The zones in test mode are also shown.
14.3.1.2 Entering Test Mode

To be able to manually test points (detectors or manual call-points)
without automatic actioning of Fire Protection Equipment (FPE), Fire
Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE) or Fire Alarm Devices (audible and
visual indicators), detection zones can be set in test mode (ENTER
TEST MODE). If a detection zone has been set to test mode, any
point connected to this zone can be tested (with, for example, test
gas) without automatic actioning (i..e. audible indication) from
sounders, bells, etc.
In the SHOW STATUS menu (main menu selection 1), you can now
verify that a point you have tested (for example, a detector you have
tested with test gas) operates properly - without audible indication.
As shown on the example below, a message on a status line will

appear (Alarm test), indicating that the alarm signal has been sent
from the tested point (in this example, P2, optical detector).
The zones in test mode will always appear on the display. From here,
you can also enter the SHOW STATUS menu directly.
In test mode, the automatic timeout (default 25 seconds in operation

mode / menu mode) is 20 times the default timeout (i.e. up to 500
seconds) provided that no alarms occur within the timeout period.
Page 54
Service Commands
14.3.1.3 Leaving Test Mode

The procedure below describes how to leave test mode for a selected
zone (LEAVE TEST MODE).
NOTE:
To ensure that all selected detection zones leave Test Mode after carrying out this
procedure, press the reset button on the front panel.
14.3.2 Testing Outputs
14.3.2.1 Manual Test ON

The subsequent chapters describe how to test;
 Other Outputs
Outputs activated by “Manual Test ON” will be kept active, i.e. reset
will not deactivate. An ongoing test can be terminated by use of the
Manual Test OFF menu.
14.3.2.2 Manual Test ON- Fire Alarm Devices (audible and visual
indicators)
This chapter describes how to test Fire Alarm Devices. The test
requires Access Level 3 (password restricted).
When the test is initiated, a test signal will be sent to all Fire Alarm
Devices within the selected Alarm Zone. The duration of the signal
and the interval between each signal are configurable (normally 1
second ON and 30 seconds OFF).
The test signal is given the lowest priority. In the event of an alarm,
the alarm signal will thus override the test signal.
14.3.2.3 Manual Test ON- Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE)

The test is similar to the test for Fire Alarm Devices (audible and
visual indicators) and it requires Access Level 3 (password restricted).
For detailed description, refer to 14.3.2.2.
When the test is initiated, a test signal will be sent to all Fire Alarm
Routing Equipment (FARE) within the Operation Zone (if there are
several Operation Zones, the signal will be sent to FARE in all
Operation Zones). The duration of the signal and the interval between
each signal are configurable (normally 1 second ON and 30 seconds
OFF).
Page 55
Service Commands
14.3.2.4 Manual Test ON- Fault Warning Routing Equipment (FWRE)

The test is similar to the test for Fire Alarm Devices (audible and
visual indicators) and it requires Access Level 3 (password restricted).
For detailed description, refer to 14.3.2.2.
When the test is initiated, a test signal will be sent to all Fault Warning
Routing Equipment (FWRE) within the Operation Zone (if there are
several Operation Zones, the signal will be sent to FARE in all
Operation Zones). The duration of the signal and the interval between
each signal are configurable (normally 1 second ON and 30 seconds
OFF).
14.3.2.5 Manual Test ON - Other Outputs

This chapter describes how to test other outputs. The test requires
Access Level 3 (password restricted).
When the test is initiated, a test signal will be sent.
NOTE:
Before this test is performed, make sure that all extinguishers
(or other similar equipment) that are to be tested are
disconnected. During the test, use a measuring instrument to
measure the output on the Fire Protection Equipment that is to
be tested.
14.3.2.6 Manual Test OFF

The subsequent chapters describe how to terminate an ongoing test
for
 Other Outputs
Page 56
Service Commands
14.3.2.7 Manual Test OFF- Fire Alarm Devices (audible and visual
indicators)
This chapter describes how to terminate an ongoing test for Fire Alarm
Devices.
Step Actions to be taken Display Indication
1 To enter the Main Menu, press the Menu button

MENU
19:23
Total: 3
1 SHOW STATUS
2 DISABLE
3 ENABLE
4 SYSTEM
5 SERVICE
2 To select SERVICE, press 5.

SERVICE
19:23
1 TEST
2 LOG
3 LOOP COMMANDS
4 REPORT
5 UPGRADE
6 REMOTE ACCESS
7 DUAL SAFETY
8 OIL & GAS COMMANDS
3 To select TEST, press 1.

SERVICE 19:23
TEST
1 DETECTION ZONE TEST (EN 54)

2 OUTPUT TEST
4 To select OUTPUT TEST, press 2.

SERVICE
OUTPUT TEST
19:23
1 MANUAL TEST ON
2 MANUAL TEST OFF
Page 57
Service Commands
5 To select MANUAL TEST OFF, press 2.

SERVICE
MANUAL TEST OFF
19:23
1 FIRE ALARM DEVICES

2 FIRE ALARM ROUTING EQUIPMENT
3 FIRE WARNING ROUTING EQUIPMENT
4 OTHER OUTPUTS
6 To select FIRE ALARM DEVICES, press 1.

SERVICE
MANUAL TEST OFF>FAD
19:23
Alarm Zone name:
ATTIC
GROUND FLOOR
HOUSE
7 Use the keyboard to enter text into the input box

- SERVICE
MANUAL TEST OFF>FAD
19:23
OR ,- as shown in this example:

Alarm Zone name:
To select the Alarm Zone Name, press

ATTIC
GROUND FLOOR
HOUSE
then scroll downwards or upwards by pressing
8 To accept the selected Alarm Zone and

terminate the test, press SERVICE
MANUAL TEST OFF
19:23
1 FIRE ALARM DEVICES

2 FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
3 FIRE WARNING ROUTING EQUIPMENT
4 OTHER OUTPUTS
Page 58
Service Commands
14.3.2.8 Manual Test OFF - Fire Alarm Routing Equipment (FARE)

The procedure to terminate an ongoing test for Fire Alarm Routing
Equipment is similar to the procedure for Fire Alarm Devices.
14.3.2.9 Manual Test OFF - Fault Warning Routing Equipment (FWRE)

The procedure to terminate an ongoing test for Fault Warning Routing
Equipment is similar to the procedure for Fire Alarm Devices.
14.3.2.10 Manual Test OFF – Other Outputs

The procedure to terminate an ongoing test for other outputs is similar
to the procedure for Fire Alarm Devices.
NOTE: When the test is terminated, make sure that all

extinguishers or other similar equipment are properly
connected.
Page 59
Service Commands
14.4 Event Recording – Log Menu
Page 60
Service Commands
14.4.1.1 Events
To be able to analyse system behaviour for service and maintenance
purposes, a number of events are recorded.
The table below gives an overview of these events and the detailed
information that can be shown on the panel’s display, or on a printout.
Event Detailed Information

Alarms • Date, time and identity of detection zones entering the Alarm state.
Prealarms • Date, time and identity of detection zones entering the Prealarm state.
Early Warnings • Date, time and identity of detection zones entering the Early Warning
state.
Faults • Date, time and identity of subject (individual component, group, zone)
issuing a fault warning signal.
Enable/Disable • Date, time and identity of subject (individual component, group, zone)
entering the disabled state.
• Date, time and identity of subject (individual component, group, zone)
exiting the disabled state.
User Operations • The date, time and operation zone identity of the operation of push
buttons; RESET and SILENCE ALARMS.
• The date, time and operation zone identity of the operation of;
ALARM_DISABLE, REACTIVATE, RESOUND, INIT, ACTIVATE_ALARM,
ENABLE IMM_ACT, DISABLE_IMM ACT, SET_TIME.
• The date, time and event id (detection zone identity, fault identity etc) of all
operations of ACCEPT.
Tests • Date, time and identity of all manually initiated tests.
All Events • All events
Log Setup • Read parameters, read filter, clear log.
14.4.2 The Log Setup Menu

The submenu Log Setup includes the menu selections Read
Parameter, Read Filter and Clear Log.
In this menu you can determine how the information is to be presented

when you enter menu selections 1-8 in the LOG menu. You can, for
example, setup the LOG menu so that only alarms from a specific
date/time will be shown when you enter LOG ALARMS (menu
selection 1 in the LOG menu).
Read Parameters
This menu selection allows you to determine the read parameters:
 Read mode, including; Most recent, Continue, From time
 From Date and Time
 Read Direction (forward/backwards)
 Number of Entries
Read Filter
This menu selection allows you to determine the units that are to be
logged (for example, Points, audible and visual indicators, Loop units
etc.).
Page 61
Service Commands
Note that when leaving the Control Menu, Read Parameters and Read
Filter are reset to default values.
Clear Log
This menu selection allows you to clear the entire Log Menu for all
events previously recorded.
14.5 Loop Commands

Loop Commands
Disable Loop
Enable Loop
14.5.1 Disable Loop

This menu allows you to disable one loop at a time without interrupting
the system. This can be useful during maintenance, when detectors
are changed on the loop etc.
Note that only points "remember" their original Enable / Disable state.
14.5.2 Enable Loop
This menu allows you to enable one loop (a selected loop) at a time
without interrupting the system.
Page 62
Service Commands
14.6 Report
14.7 Upgrade
Upgrade
Upgrade SW
Upgrade Config
Export Config
Export Log
View Upgrade Status
Reboot System
NOTE:
When upgrading the system by means of a USB memory
stick, do not remove the USB stick from the USB port until
you are sure that the upgrade procedure is completed.
Enter the menu “View Upgrade Status” to follow the
progress and verify that the procedure is completed.
For detailed information on Upgrading procedures, refer to

Page 63
Service Commands
14.7.1 Upgrade SW
This menu allows you to upgrade the system software version.
Note that before executing this command, the USB memory stick with
the correct and valid system software file must be inserted into one of
the USB ports. After the stick is inserted, wait at least 5 seconds
before executing the command. To view the upgrade status, the View
Upgrade Status command can be used.
The Reboot System command has to be run after an upgrade of the

system.
14.7.2 Upgrade Config

This menu allows you to upgrade the configuration.
Note that before executing this command, the USB memory stick with
the correct and valid configuration file must be inserted into one of the
USB ports. After the stick is inserted, wait at least 5 seconds before
executing the command. To view the upgrade status, the View
Upgrade Status command can be used.
The Reboot System command has to be run after an upgrade of the

system.
14.7.3 Export Config

This menu allows you to export the configuration from the system
panel to the USB memory stick (exported files).
Note that before executing this command, the USB memory stick must
be inserted into one of the USB ports. After the stick is inserted, wait
at least 5 seconds before executing the command. To view the
upgrade status, the View Upgrade Status command can be used.
14.7.4 Export Log

This menu allows you to export the log from the system panel to the
USB memory stick (exported files).
Note that before executing this command, the USB memory stick must
be inserted into one of the USB ports. After the stick is inserted, wait
at least 5 seconds before executing the command. To view the
upgrade status, the View Upgrade Status command can be used.
Page 64
Service Commands
14.7.5 View Upgrade Status

This menu allows you to view the status of any of the above
commands, including; Upgrade SW, Upgrade Config, Export Config
and Export Log.
NOTE:
Always enter the menu “View Upgrade Status” to follow the
progress and verify that the procedure is completed.
14.7.6 Reboot System

This menu allows you to reboot all panels in the entire system. This
command has to be run after an upgrade of the system.
Note that in Dual Safety systems, only panels belonging to either the
Primary or Secondary system will be rebooted, depending on which
system the panel in question belongs to.
Page 65
Service Commands
14.8 Remote Access

Remote Access
Web Access On
Web Access Off
This command allows you to access a web site where you can
perform system service functions from a computer via the Ethernet
connections.
When the necessary connections are done, you can turn web access
ON and OFF by means of this command. Note that each time remote
access is turned ON, it will automatically be turned OFF after a period
of 12 hours (12 hours timeout).
14.9 Dual Safety

Page 66
Gas Commands
15. Gas Commands

NOTE:
The menu is called “Oil and Gas Commands”, but the commands are
also intended for maritime gas systems.
15.1.1 Inhibit Point

This menu allows you to inhibit points. When one or several points are
inhibited, the point(s) will not signal alarm to outputs. An inhibited point
will however present an alarm, prealarm and early warning on all
panels and AutroCom as usual. This includes panel buzzer, panel
LEDs and panel LCD display.
It is only possible to inhibit a unit from the panel menu or via

AutroCom.

19:23
MENU Total: 3
1 SHOW STATUS
2 DISABLE
3 ENABLE
4 SYSTEM
5 SERVICE

19:23
SERVICE
1 TEST
2 LOG
3 LOOP COMMANDS
4 REPORT
5 UPGRADE
6 REMOTE ACCESS
7 DUAL SAFETY
3 To select OIL & GAS COMMANDS, press 8.
Page 67
Gas Commands
4 To select INHIBIT POINT, press 1.

SERVICE
INHIBIT POINT
19:23
1ab12
1mc3
1mc6
1od1
1od2
1od4
1od5

- SERVICE
INHIBIT POINT
19:23

1ab12
To select a point, press 1mc3
1mc6
1od1
1od2
then scroll downwards or upwards by pressing 1od4
1od5
6 To accept the selected point, press

SERVICE
INHIBIT POINT
19:23
1ab12
Inhibit Time:
Hours:
Min.:
7 Enter hours, then press
Enter minutes, then press
To execute the command (accept the inhibit

time), press
once more
Page 68
Gas Commands
15.1.2 Cancel Inhibit Point

This menu allows you to cancel all or selected inhibited points.

19:23
MENU Total: 3
1 SHOW STATUS
2 DISABLE
3 ENABLE
4 SYSTEM
5 SERVICE

19:23
SERVICE
1 TEST
2 LOG
3 LOOP COMMANDS
4 REPORT
5 UPGRADE
6 REMOTE ACCESS
7 DUAL SAFETY
4 To select CANCEL INHIBIT POINT, press 2.

SERVICE
CANCEL INHIBIT POINT
19:23
1ab12
1mc3
1mc6
1od1
1od2
1od4
1od5
Page 69
Gas Commands

- SERVICE
19:23

1ab12
To select a point, press 1mc3
1mc6

SERVICE
19:23
1ab12
Execute cmd.
7 To execute the command, press
Page 70
Gas Commands
15.1.3 Set Alarm Limits

The Set Alarm Limits command allows you to change a gas detector’s
alarm limit for Low Alarm and High Alarm.

19:23
MENU Total: 3
1 SHOW STATUS
2 DISABLE
3 ENABLE
4 SYSTEM
5 SERVICE

19:23
SERVICE
1 TEST
2 LOG
3 LOOP COMMANDS
4 REPORT
5 UPGRADE
6 REMOTE ACCESS
7 DUAL SAFETY
4 To select SET ALARM LIMITS, press 3.

SERVICE
SET ALARM LIMITS
19:23
Name: _
Gas Detector
Type:
Page 71
Gas Commands

- SERVICE
19:23
SET ALARM LIMITS

Name:
To select a point, press
Gas Detector
Type:

SERVICE
19:23
SET ALARM LIMITS
Name: Gas Detector
Type: AutroPoint HC200
Value: EU: Status: Low: High:

Normal
7 Use keyboard to enter low value, press

SERVICE
19:23
SET ALARM LIMITS
Name: Gas Detector

Normal 40
8 Use keyboard to enter high value, press

SERVICE
19:23
SET ALARM LIMITS
Name: Gas Detector

Normal 40 100
9 To execute the command (accept the high-low

values for the point), press SERVICE
19:23
SET ALARM LIMITS
Name: Gas Detector

Normal 40 100
Page 72
Gas Commands
15.1.4 Get Measurement Values

This menu allows you to get measurement values from gas detectors.

19:23
MENU Total: 3
1 SHOW STATUS
2 DISABLE
3 ENABLE
4 SYSTEM
5 SERVICE

19:23
SERVICE
1 TEST
2 LOG
3 LOOP COMMANDS
4 REPORT
5 UPGRADE
6 REMOTE ACCESS
7 DUAL SAFETY
4 To select GET MEASUREMENT VALUES, press

4. SERVICE
GET MEASUREMENT VALUES
19:23
Name: _
Gas Detector
Type:
Page 73
Gas Commands

- SERVICE
19:23

Name:
To select a point, press
Gas Detector
Type:

SERVICE
19:23
Name: Gas Detector
Value:
7 Use keyboard, press
8 Use keyboard, press
9 To execute the command (accept the

measurements for the point), press
Page 74
Troubleshooting
16. Troubleshooting
16.1.1 Examples of Fault Messages
POINT FAULTS
BN-342
Fault reason
Low temp shut down X

Low temp warning X
High temp warning X
High temp shut down X
Low voltage shut down X
Low voltage warning X
High voltage warning X
High voltage shut down X
CPU supply voltage monitor X
4-20mA current underrange X
4-20mA currnet overrange X
Memory fault X
General fault X
Beam blocked
Dirty optics
Overrange
General warning
Maintenance
Oi fault
Low voltage fault
Temperature out of range
High energy detected
High energy fault
Non-ratio mode fault
Oi calibration fault
No Oi Hi Energy Fault
General fault
EE checksum error
Clock fault
Flash checksum error
ROM/EEPROM Mismatch
RAM error
A-D Overflow
SPI fault
A-D fault
Low voltage reset fault
WDT fault
Early clean optics
Clean optics
Sensor failure
User defined 1
Used defined x
User defined 15
Page 75
Appendix
17. Appendix
17.1.1 PowerLoop, BSD-340, Gas Detection Loop

Typical connection diagram - PowerLoop.
Page 76
Appendix
Page 77
Autronica is a leading innovator, manufacturer and supplier of fire safety equipment. Our
products ensure safety in applications on land and sea worldwide. The company is owned by
United Technologies Corporation (UTC) and employs more than 380 people with great skill and
experience in the developing, manufacturing and marketing of fire safety equipment.
Autronica Fire and Security AS is an international company based in Trondheim, a dynamic city
known as the technological hotspot of Norway.
Protecting life, environment and property

Haakon VIIS gt. 4, NO-7041 Trondheim, Norway | Tel: +47 90 90 55 00 | Fax: +47 73 58 25 01
Installation Guide
Searchpoint Optima Plus Installation Guide
MAN0838 2108M0509
Issue 2 09/08
Searchpoint Optima Plus

Infrared Point Gas Detector
1
Searchpoint Optima Plus Installation Guide Issue 2 09/08
MAN0838 2108M0509
Contents
1 Introduction 3
2 Safety 4
3 Mechanical Assembly 5
3.1 Using a Standard Junction Box 5
3.2 Using a DVC100 Series Termination Unit 5
3.3 Using a DX100 Series Termination Unit 6
4 Installation 7
4.1 Mechanical Installation 7
4.2 Electrical Installation 9
4.3 Electrical Installation Schematics 12
4.3.1 Junction Box Connection 12
4.3.2 Junction Box and SHC-1 Protection Device Connection 12
4.3.3 Certification label details 13
5 Outline Specification 14
2
MAN0838 2108M0509
1 Introduction
This guide provides the installation personnel with the basic information necessary
to mechanically install the Searchpoint Optima Plus system units and make the
necessary electrical connections.
This guide is not intended to replace the associated Searchpoint Optima Plus
Operating Instructions (2108M0501) which contains the full safety, installation,
commissioning, maintenance and fault finding instructions.
These procedures assume that consideration of the location and mounting of the
system units has already been taken into account in accordance with the guidelines in
the Operating Instructions.
The following diagram shows a typical system configuration and identifies the
main parts.
DVC/DX Termination
Unit (or other
junction box)
Field Cable/
Conduit IS Socket
SHC-1 Handheld
Calibrator
When used for
calibration and
diagnostics purposes
the Hand-Held
Interrogator
SHC-1 allows digital
communication with the
Optima. It is connected
to the Optima via
the IS Socket on
the Termination Unit
DVC100 or via the SHC
Protection Device for
other junction boxes.
3
MAN0838 2108M0509
2 Safety
Ensure that you read and understand these instructions BEFORE installing or
operating any part of the Searchpoint Optima Plus.
Please pay particular attention to the Safety Warnings.
WARNINGS
1. For installations in the UK, the Code of Practice SELECTION,
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS FOR USE
IN POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES should be strictly observed.
General recommendations are given in BS5345: Part 1: 1989.Specific
requirements for flameproof (Type ‘d’), intrinsically safe (Type ‘i’) and increased
safety (Type ‘e’) protection are given in BS 5345: Part 3: 1979, BS5345: Part 4:
1977 and BS5345: Part 6: 1978 respectively.
For installations in North America, the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70 -
1990) or later issues should be strictly observed.
Elsewhere the appropriate local or national regulations should be used.
2. The Code of Practice regarding SELECTION, INSTALLATION, USE
AND MAINTENANCE OF APPARATUS FOR THE DETECTION AND
MEASUREMENT OF COMBUSTIBLE GASES (OTHER THAN FOR MINING
APPLICATIONS OR EXPLOSIVES PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURE) must
be complied with. Refer to BS6959:1988 in the UK or the appropriate local or
national regulations.
4
MAN0838 2108M0509
3 Mechanical Assembly
This section details the basic mechanical assembly information and important
dimensions necessary for installation.
3.1 Using a Standard Junction Box
Note: The mounting plate is supplied separately.
3.2 Using a DVC100 Series Termination Unit

Refer to Quick Start Guide 2104M0408 DVC100 (I) MK2 or 2104M0409 DVC100 (M)
MK2, or DX100 Series Technical Handbook 2104M0701 for more detailed information.
Searchpoint Optima Plus M20 Blanking Plug
M20 Blanking Plug
Handheld Interrogator
Socket
5
MAN0838 2108M0509
3.3 Using a DX100 Series Termination Unit

Refer to Quick Start Guide 2104M0702 (DX100 I) or 2104M0703 (DX100 M), or DX100
Series Technical Handbook 2104M0701 for more detailed information.
6
MAN0838 2108M0509
4 Installation
Searchpoint Optima Plus is designed to allow installation to be performed by a single
operator. The installation procedure is split into mechanical installation and electrical
installation.
4.1 Mechanical Installation

Note: Installation of Searchpoint Optima Plus does not require the unit to be opened.
There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit. Do not attempt to open or dismantle
the unit.
1) Ensure that the correct attachments and accessories for the application have been
fitted (refer to operating manual (2108M0501 for further details).
2) Searchpoint Optima Plus must be mounted horizontally, as this greatly reduces the
risk of obscuration due to build up of dirt and moisture on the optical surfaces.
Ensure the area immediately surrounding the sensor is free from objects that could
hinder the free flow of air around it.
3) Secure the junction box onto the mounting surface, using the Junction Box
Adaptor Plate if required. Searchpoint Optima Plus must be installed with its long
axis horizontal in order for the standard weather protection to operate correctly
and to prevent water from settling on the optical surfaces (see below). The Optima
unit should therefore only be screwed into a threaded entry that is in a vertical
wall of the junction box. The deluge/heat shade (supplied as standard) should also
be fitted.
3 7
7
MAN0838 2108M0509
4) Feed the unit’s wires carefully through the chosen junction box entry and offer up
it’s threaded boss to the entry. Screw the unit into the junction box until it is secure
and the semi-circular pattern of holes on the front of the weather protection are on
the bottom (see below). For M25 entries, the boss should go right through the wall;
whilst for 3/4 NPT entries, the boss should lock off on the taper. If getting the holes
in the right orientation requires more rotation than is readily achievable, remove the
weather protection and rotate it through 180 degrees.
5) Using a multimeter, check that the voltages on the +24V, and 4-20mA connections
with respect to 0V are less than +32V DC.
6) Using a multimeter, check and that there is no 110V or 230VAC on the
connections.
7) Wire up the unit’s electrical connections in accordance with Section 4.2, taking
note of the general recommendations upon electrical installation. For electrical
installation schematics see Section 4.3.
8) Ensure that all cable entries are either used or plugged in strict accordance with
the relevant certification requirements and local codes of practice.
9) Verify the correct installation and operation of the unit using the SHC-1 handheld
interrogator. If a DVC100 or DX100 junction box has been used, testing can be
performed without the need for a hot work permit. Alternatively, if a basic junction
box has been used, electrical connections can be made to the terminals inside the
box using the SHC protection device. This will ordinarily require a hot work permit.
8
MAN0838 2108M0509
4.2 Electrical Installation

Searchpoint Optima Plus complies with the European EMC requirements set out
in standards EN50270. In order to maintain compliance with these standards it is
essential that the electrical installation of Searchpoint Optima Plus is engineered
appropriately.
Electrical installation standards and practices vary for different countries, companies
and hazardous area approvals. It is the responsibility of the electrical installation
design authority to determine the applicable standards / practices and ensure
compliance with them. When designing electrical installations for Searchpoint Optima
Plus it is recommended that the design authority considers the following:-
1) Ideally, the cases of units should not be connected to electrically noisy (dirty)
metalwork or conductors. Preferably, the case (internally connected to the unit’s
green / yellow GND wire) should be connected to a low noise instrument
(clean) earth.
2) Preferably, the field cable screen should be connected to the unit’s green / yellow
GND wire, providing a single, continuous earth screen connected to a low noise
instrument (clean) earth. This connection must not be allowed to complete an earth
loop or connect instrument earth to safety earth.
3) If armoured cable is being used it is necessary to prevent safety (dirty) earth from
becoming connected to instrument (clean) earth via the continuity plate in the field
junction box. This is most easily achieved by the use of insulating cable glands for
the field cable entry.
4) For UL / CSA certified installations it is not practical to isolate the unit’s case from
safety (dirty) earth. The unit and its junction box should be earthed in a manner that
complies with the certification requirements.
5) Any earth / ground bonding arrangement employed should ensure that the
maximum peak voltage between the unit’s case earth and any field cable
conductor is less than 350V. This includes conditions where transient surge
voltages are generated by lightning or the switching of heavy electrical plant.
Surge voltages in excess of 350V can cause permanent damage to the unit’s RFI
filters and such damage is not covered by warranty.
6) Earthing / grounding arrangements that employ multiple protective earths or
earth grids significantly increase the likelihood of large transient surge voltages
being generated between a unit’s case earth and the field cable conductors.
7) If it is suspected that the earth / ground bonding arrangement employed will not
prevent voltages between the unit’s case earth and any field cable conductor
from exceeding 350V it is strongly recommended that surge suppression devices
be installed close to the unit. Suitable, certified surge suppression devices include
MTL’s TP-48-I-NDI and Pepperl & Fuchs. FN-LB-1. Two of these devices are
sufficient to provide protection of the +24V, 0V, 4-20mA and RS485 (A) connections
to a unit.
8) In general, correctly engineered star earthing arrangements minimise earth current
crosstalk and noise, improving the reliability and performance of instrumentation.
9) Low noise instrument (clean) earth should only be connected to safety earth
(usually dirty) at a single point on a site / installation. This connection should be
made in such a manner that it does not introduce noise onto the instrument earth.
9
MAN0838 2108M0509
10) The entire length of the field cabling connected to a unit should be screened /
shielded. This screen / shield should be connected to a low noise instrument
(clean) earth at a single end. (The screen / shield can be connected to the unit’s
earth in the junction box, provided that this is isolated from all other earths /
grounds.)
11) For installations where the field cable conductors run through conduit or armour
connected to safety (dirty) earth, the conduit or armour should not be considered
as a sufficient screen / shield. A separate cable screen / shield, connected to a low
noise instrument earth should be employed.
12) The screens / shields of field cabling should not be connected in a manner that
creates earth loops or that will result in the screens / shields carrying large currents
from heavy plant or equipment.
13) The use of a single, screened / shielded cable for each field device ensures good
screening / shielding and reduces crosstalk. Cabling arrangements that use a
single cable to connect a number of field devices compromise screening and
increase the potential for crosstalk. Such arrangements should only be employed
if the electrical installation design authority is confident that this will not adversely
affect the reliability or performance of the system.
14) Any electrical interference induced onto the conductors of a 4-20mA loop by
the installation must be kept below the levels necessary to comply with the general
requirements of EN50054 or other applicable gas detector performance
requirements / standards. In practice, this means that peak noise currents induced
on the current loop should be no greater than +/- 0.25mA. If peak noise currents
larger than this are induced on the current loop it is possible that spurious gas
readings, alarms and faults will be reported by the control system monitoring the
current loop.
15) The 0V rail of a control card / control system is often connected directly to one side
of the 4-20mA input’s current sensing resistor. In such instances, any electrical
noise on the 0V rail can be considered to be directly connected to the
4-20mA input. In order to reduce the likelihood of such noise adversely affecting
the performance of a gas detection system it is desirable to keep noise on the 0V
rail to a minimum. Safety earth / ground frequently carries a high level of electrical
noise and it is therefore advisable not to connect the 0V rail to safety earth /
ground. If the 0V rail cannot be isolated from earth it is advisable to either connect
it to a low noise instrument (clean) earth or through a path that presents a high
impedance to noise on the earth.
16) For installations in Europe, all electrical equipment connected to the system should
comply with EN50081 and EN50082 or EN50270. For non-European installations,
electrical equipment connected to the system should comply with applicable
national or international EMC standards.
17) Searchpoint Optima Plus is designed to operate correctly with supply voltages
down to 18V. When supplied with 18V, the maximum current drawn by a single
Searchpoint Optima Plus unit will be 250mA. The field cabling conductors should
have sufficient cross sectional area to ensure that when a unit is drawing 250mA
the voltage reaching it does not fall below 18V. For a control room voltage of 24V,
the maximum round loop cable resistance must therefore be 24 Ohms. Round loop
cable resistances greater than those necessary to ensure that units always receive
at least 18V may result in unreliable operation.
10
MAN0838 2108M0509
18) Ideally, the 24V supply reaching units should be free from large transients,
fluctuations or high frequency noise. Transients or fluctuations which take the
supply voltage outside of the 18-32V range may result in units switching off and
re-booting.
19) In order to reduce the likelihood of radio frequency interference affecting
the operation of units it is recommended that neither units nor their cabling are
installed in close proximity to the antennae of high powered radio, radar or satellite
communication equipment.
11
MAN0838 2108M0509
4.3 Electrical Installation Schematics

This section details the basic electrical installation information. Refer to the
Searchpoint Optima Plus Operating Instructions (2108M0501) for more detailed
information.
4.3.1 Junction Box Connection
4.3.2 Junction Box and SHC-1 Protection Device Connection
12
MAN0838 2108M0509
4.3.3 Certification label details

An explanation of the information shown on the equipment certification label is
shown below:
Manufacturer's
Trademark & Product Explosion Protection Certified Ambient
Address Certification Code
Name Mark & Equipment Temperature Range
Group Category
Test House Trade Mark

Certification Warning
Serial Number & MOD State
Number
Year of Ident Number of
Manufacture ATEX Notified Body
CE Mark - Conforms to
all applicable
European Directives
13
MAN0838 2108M0509
5 Outline Specification
Measurement Range: 0-100% LEL
Operational and Certified Temperature Range: -40°C to +65°C
Power Supply: 18 to 32Vdc (24Vdc nominal)
Power Consumption: <4.5W max
Current Demand: <235mA at 18V
<190mA at 24V
<155mA at 32V
Outputs:
Analogue: 4-20mA, non-isolated, current
source or sink. (Default
configuration is current source).
Maximum 4-20mA Loop Resistance 600 Ohms
Output Signals
Measuring Range (0-100% FSD): 4-20mA
Inhibit: 1 to 3mA (Default 2mA)
Warning: 0 to 6mA (Default 3mA*)
Fault: 0mA
Over-range: 20 to 21.5mA (Default 21mA)
Certification Approvals
ATEX: BAS99ATEX2259X
II 2GD EEx d IIC
T100°C (Tamb -40°C to +55°C)
T135°C (Tamb -40°C to +65°C)
UL: Class I, Div 1, Groups B,C & D.
-40°C to +65°C
Performance approvals: EN61779
BVS 03 ATEX G 016 X.
See DETECTABLE GASES
(section 11.1) for table of
approved gases. Approval only
valid for 4-20mA output
EMC Compliance: EN50270:1999
Environmental Protection: IP66/67
Vibration: 10 Hz to 30 Hz, 1.0mm total
excursion; 31 Hz to 150 Hz,
2 g acceleration peak.
EN 61779-1:2000 section
4.4.13.2.2.
Dimensions: Length: 165mm
Diameter: 73mm
Weight: 1.6kg
Material: 316 stainless steel.
*Note for ATEX compliance the warning value should not be set between 3 and 5mA
14
MAN0838 2108M0509
Find out more

www.honeywellanalytics.com
Contact Honeywell Analytics:
Europe, Middle East, Africa, India

Life Safety Distribution AG
Wilstrasse 11-U31
CH-8610 Uster
Switzerland
Tel: +41 (0)44 943 4300
Fax: +41 (0)44 943 4398
gasdetection@honeywell.com
Americas
Honeywell Analytics Inc.
405 Barclay Blvd.
Lincolnshire, IL 60069
USA
Tel: +1 847 955 8200
Toll free: +1 800 538 0363
Fax: +1 847 955 8208
detectgas@honeywell.com
Asia Pacific
Honeywell Analytics Asia Pacific
#508, Kolon Science Valley (I)
187-10 Guro-Dong, Guro-Gu
Seoul, 152-050,
Korea
Tel: +82 (0)2 2025 0300
Fax: +82 (0)2 2025 0329
analytics.ap@honeywell.com
Technical Services
ha.emea.service@honeywell.com Issue 02 – 09/2008
H_MAN0838_ 2108M0509_EMEAI
09/08_A03025
12366
www.honeywell.com © 2008 Honeywell Analytics

15
Operating Instructions

with optional HART® output
MAN0905_Issue 6_05/15 Searchpoint Optima Plus with optional HART® output
2108M0550
1. Safety Warnings and Information
WARNINGS
1. Installation must be in accordance with the recognized standards of the appropriate authority in
the country concerned. For Europe see EN60079-14, EN60079-29-2, and EN61241-14. For
installations in North America, the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) should be strictly observed.
Elsewhere the appropriate local or national regulations should be used.
2. Searchpoint Optima Plus is designed for installation and use in Zone 1 or 2 hazardous areas
(International) and for Class 1 Division 1 or 2 area applications (North America).
3. Do not modify or alter the construction of the product as essential safety and certification
requirements may be invalidated.
4. In order to maintain electrical safety, the product must not be operated in atmospheres with more
than 21% oxygen.
Cautions
During usage, as some test gases may be hazardous, outlets from gassing accessories should exhaust to a
safe area.
Use of the Searchpoint Optima Plus outside of the specified range of operating conditions will invalidate
certification and product approval.
CSA performance approval only covers the gas detection function.
Special Conditions of Use

In order to comply with the ATEX Certification, the following special conditions of use must be adhered to: -
1. The integral supply cables must be mechanically protected and terminated in a suitable terminal or
junction facility.
2. The cover fixing screws shall be stainless steel grade A4-80 minimum (only use Honeywell supplied
screws).
2
2108M0550
Contents
Section Page
1.SAFETY WARNINGS AND INFORMATION 2
1.1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 7
1.2 BATTERIES 8
1.3 DISPOSAL 8
1.3.1 Searchpoint Optima Plus 8
1.3.2 Packaging 8
1.4 INFORMATION 9
2 INTRODUCTION 9
2.1 SEARCHPOINT OPTIMA PLUS 10
2.2 SEARCHPOINT OPTIMA PLUS OPTIONS 11
2.3 TERMINATION UNIT OPTIONS 12
2.4 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS 13
2.5 WEATHER PROTECTION ACCESSORIES 13
2.6 GASSING ACCESSORIES 14
2.7 MOUNTING ACCESSORIES 15
3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 17
3.1 SITING 17
3.2 INSTALLATION 17
3.2.1 Standard Installation 18
3.2.2 Installation with a flow housing (sampling system) 19
3.2.3 Sampling system using Remote Gassing Cell (RGC) 20
3.2.4 Installation in a duct 20
3.2.5 Installation of gassing pipes for Remote Gassing Cell 23
4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 24
4.1 POWER SUPPLY 24
4.2 CABLING RECOMMENDATIONS 25
4.3 EARTH REGIMES 25
4.4 CONNECTIONS 27
5 OPERATION 29
5.1 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION 29
5.2 HART® OPERATION DURING FAULT 29
6 COMMISSIONING 30
6.1 FIRST TIME SWITCH ON 30
7 MAINTENANCE 31
7.1 INTRODUCTION 31
7.2 INSPECTION 31
7.3 INSPECTION OF A UNIT FITTED WITH A FLOW HOUSING 31
7.4 BUMP TEST (GAS CHALLENGE) 32
7.5 BUMP TEST (GAS CHALLENGE) WITH REMOTE GASSING CELL (RGC) 33
3
2108M0550
Contents
8 USE OF THE SHC1 HANDHELD INTERROGATOR 34
8.1 INTRODUCTION 34
8.2 SHC1 CONNECTION 34
8.3 SHC1 OPERATION 36
8.4 STATUS INDICATION 37
8.5 SHC1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT 37
9 COMMISSIONING USING SHC1 HANDHELD INTERROGATOR 38
9.1 INTRODUCTION 38
9.3 CLEAR FAULTS OR WARNINGS 39
9.4 FIX THE 4-20 MA OUTPUT 39
9.5 TEST 4-20 MA LOOP INTEGRITY 40
10 MAINTENANCE USING SHC1 HANDHELD INTERROGATOR 41
10.1 INTRODUCTION 41
10.2 INSPECTION 41
10.6 RE-ZERO SEARCHPOINT OPTIMA PLUS 44
10.7 CALIBRATION 45
10.8 INVESTIGATION OF FAULTS OR WARNINGS 46
11 USE OF THE HART® COMMUNICATIONS 47
11.1 GENERAL 47
11.2 CONNECTION 47
11.3 SEARCHPOINT OPTIMA PLUS USER INTERFACE 47
11.3.1 Access Levels and Password Protection 47
11.3.2 Menu Structure 48
11.3.3 Menu Navigation 50
11.3.4 Error Reporting 50
12 COMMISSIONING USING HART® COMMUNICATIONS 51
12.3 USER CONFIGURATION 52
12.3.1 Change the Password 52
12.3.2 Configure HART® Operation during Fault 53
12.3.3 Set the Time and Date 53
12.3.4 Configure Warning, Inhibit and Overrange Signal Levels 54
12.4 CONFIGURE DEVICE IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION 54
12.5 FIX THE 4-20 MA OUTPUT 55
12.6 TEST 4-20 MA LOOP INTEGRITY 56
12.7 CALIBRATE THE 4-20 MA LOOP 56
12.8 CONFIGURE INTERNAL ALARM THRESHOLD 57
12.9 SIMULATION 57
12.10 CLEAR FAULTS OR WARNINGS 58
4
2108M0550
Contents
13 MAINTENANCE USING HART® COMMUNICATIONS 60
13.2 INSPECTION 60
13.6 RE-ZERO SEARCHPOINT OPTIMA PLUS 64
13.7 CALIBRATION 64
13.8 STORE CALIBRATION INFORMATION 65
13.9 INVESTIGATION OF FAULTS OR WARNINGS 66
14 PROBLEM SOLVING 67
14.1 TROUBLESHOOTING 67
14.2 WARNING AND FAULT MESSAGES 71
14.3 FURTHER ASSISTANCE 72
15 SPECIFICATIONS 73
15.1 SPECIFICATIONS 73
15.2 AVAILABLE GAS CALIBRATIONS 74
15.2.1 Hydrocarbon version of Searchpoint Optima Plus 74
15.2.2 Ethylene version of Searchpoint Optima Plus 77
15.3 CROSS INTERFERENCE TO OTHER GASES AND VAPOURS 78
16 ORDERING INFORMATION 79
17 WARRANTY SUMMARY 82
18 CERTIFICATION AND APPROVALS 83
18.1 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 83
18.2 HAZARDOUS AREA CERTIFICATION 83
18.2.1 ATEX 83
18.2.2 UL 83
18.2.3 InMetro (Brazil) 83
18.2.4 CSA 84
18.2.5 FM 84
18.2.6 CU-TR Ex (Eurasian) Approval – XTC Version 84
18.2.7 CCCF (China) 84
18.2.8 IECEx 84
18.3 PERFORMANCE APPROVALS 84
18.3.1 ATEX 84
18.3.2 FM 85
18.3.3 Russian Pattern Approval (Metrology) - XTC Version 85
18.4 MARINE APPROVALS 86
18.5 SHC1 HANDHELD INTERROGATOR HAZARDOUS AREA CERTIFICATION 86
18.5.1 ATEX 86
18.5.2 IECEx 86
19 APPENDIX 1 – SHC1 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS 87
19.1 CHANGING THE TARGET GAS 87
19.2 SELF TEST 88
5
2108M0550
Contents
20 APPENDIX 2 – HART® ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS 89
20.1 CHANGING THE TARGET GAS 89
20.2 SET HART® LOOP CURRENT MODE 91
21 APPENDIX 3 – SPECIAL NOTES FOR HONEYWELL MC TOOLKIT USERS 92
22 APPENDIX 4 – END OF LIFE BATTERY REMOVAL 93
23 APPENDIX 5 - HART® COMMANDS USED 94
23.1 UNIVERSAL COMMANDS 94
23.2 COMMON-PRACTICE COMMANDS 94
23.2.1 Supported Commands 94
23.2.2 Burst Mode 94
23.2.3 Catch Device Variable 94
23.3 DEVICE-SPECIFIC COMMANDS 95
6
MAN0905_Issue 6_05/15 Searchpoint Optima Plus with optional HART® output MAN0905_Issue 6_05/15 Searchpoint Optima Plus with optional HART® output
Operating Instructions Operating Instructions
2108M0550 2108M0550
1. Safety Warnings and Information 1. Safety Warnings and Information

1.1 How to use this manual
This manual contains three sets of instructions for Searchpoint Optima Plus - as a stand alone unit, when 1.2 Batteries
@&V@ @!\"® communications. Use the guide below to | * * +
+3
Battery Description Battery Type Location Replaceable
Stand alone unit
Size 6LR61 (PP3) Alkaline SHC1 Handheld Interrogator Yes
Chapters 1-5 Introduction, Installation and Operation
Size CR2032 Lithium Manganese Dioxide Searchpoint Optima Plus No
Chapters 6-7 Commissioning and Maintenance
&V<3V * ' &
Batteries contain various active ingredients which store electrochemical energy and can be dangerous if
they contact your skin.
With SHC1 Handheld Interrogator
Removal and Disposal Information:
&=3V> @&V'& J
The product documentation includes instructional information of the proper removal of
&V<3V * ' & * ? =~ ! ;<`" *
Appendix 1 Additional Functions that according to local laws and regulations the battery installed within your product
should be disposed of separately from household waste. When the battery reaches its
With HART® communications end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities.
&VV3V @!\"®, Commissioning and Maintenance 1.3 Disposal
&V<3V * ' &
Appendix 2 Additional Functions 1.3.1 Searchpoint Optima Plus
When Searchpoint Optima Plus reaches the end of its life it should be disposed of in accordance with local
Searchpoint Optima Plus with XNX Universal Transmitter regulations.
When using Searchpoint Optima Plus with the XNX Universal Transmitter, this manual and the
$K$ " " +3 +3
Chapters 1-4 Introduction and Installation
Chapter 7 Maintenance • Stainless steel
&V<3V * ' & • Various epoxy resins
• Various glasses
For Commissioning and Operation please use the XNX Universal Transmitter manual (part number • Various engineering plastics
Vkk=J>=`
• Various rubbers
• Printed circuit boards
"$K$ " @!\"® communications and will not re-transmit the
Searchpoint Optima Plus communications. Please refer to the XNX Universal Transmitter manual for the
@!\"® commands and menu structure. See Appendix 4 for instructions on battery removal.
Note: This manual is for use with Searchpoint Optima Plus units of mod state 9 and above. 1.3.2 Packaging
Searchpoint Optima Plus packaging is made from cardboard. Facilities for recycling are widely available.
Note: Translations of this manual in various languages are available, either on the CD accompanying the
product or at our website. Navigate to www.honeywellanalytics.com and use the Document Download utility.
It may be necessary to register to view all of the available documents.
7 8
2108M0550 2108M0550
1. Safety Warnings and Information 2. Introduction

1.4 Information 2.1 Searchpoint Optima Plus
This manual is for use with Searchpoint Optima Plus, Searchpoint Optima Plus XTC, Searchpoint Optima
X and Searchpoint Optima Z units of mod state 9 and above. For Searchpoint Optima X and Searchpoint Searchpoint Optima Plus is an infrared hydrocarbon gas detector suitable for use in hazardous areas. It has
Optima Z please also refer to the supplementary information sent with the product. #&#;'!"#$'L &!
@ ! X * It uses the principle of infrared absorption to detect hydrocarbon gases and vapours in various
J concentration ranges.
The reader of this Operating Manual should ensure that it is appropriate in all details for the exact
* *'@ ! Standard weather Searchpoint Optima Plus has a robust
protection stainless steel enclosure with an ingress
protection level of IP66 and IP67.
" J+ '
has an M25 or ¾ NPT mounting thread.
WARNING
Searchpoint Optima Plus has a 4-20 mA

signal output that corresponds to 0-100
%FSD. Output values below 4 mA
indicate fault, warning and inhibit.
Certification label
product or property damage. Searchpoint Optima Plus is supplied
*
target gas. A wide selection of gases
* > V>>L#L'
well as some ppm range options. The
# * ''@ ! Gas measuring path
> V>> *
assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document or their consequences. exclusively for use in sampling systems.
@ ! * * Mounting thread
in the content of this document. (M25 or ¾ NPT)
} ' Inlet / outlet for
* '@ ! *X remote gassing Optional remote gassing cell (use for
cell gas testing or % v/v monitoring)
Honeywell Analytics reserve the right to change or revise the information supplied in this document

! " @&V@ ' *
or Honeywell Analytics. ' * ! '
®
@!\" * @!\"® handheld device
or from a central control room.
Note: Searchpoint Optima Plus can be installed, commissioned and functionally tested using only the
! " ! # " $ %%&'( %
Interrogator, HART® communications or the XNX Universal Transmitter.
9 10
2108M0550 2108M0550
2. Introduction 2. Introduction
2.2 Searchpoint Optima Plus Options 2.3 Termination unit options
Searchpoint Optima Plus is available in an ethylene version which is optimised for the detection of certain " '
solvents. required, whether digital communications will be used and additional features such as a local display.
Searchpoint Optima X is a variant of Searchpoint Optima Plus exclusively for use in sampling systems. HALO Junction Box*
A fast speed of response is made possible by minimising the volume of the sample cell. Please contact • ATEX, IECEx approvals
@ !
• Ex e enclosure
• One M25 and three M20 cable entries
Searchpoint Optima Z is a variant of Searchpoint Optima Plus optimised for the detection of the solvents
• Visual status indication (Normal, Warning, Fault, Alarm, Inhibit)
; @ !
for further details of this variant. K3 @!\"® handheld device (optional)
! * @!\"® over 4-20 mA communications. XNX Universal Transmitter
!"#$'#&#;'L'&!
• Five ¾ NPT or M25 cable entries
L
• Non-intrusive access using magnetic switches
@!\"® communications
K3 @!\"® handheld device (optional)
• Modbus communications (optional)
• Relays (optional)
DVC 100 Series Termination Unit

• ATEX, IECEx approvals
• Ex e enclosure
• One M25 and two M20 cable entries
K3 @&V@
• Modbus communications (optional)
Honeywell Analytics Junction Box

• ATEX, IECEx approvals
• Ex e enclosure
• One M25 and three M20 cable entries
@&V@ @& ? `
#$"%& & ' ()

L'&!
• Two ¾ NPT cable entries
@&V@ @& ? `
&@ ! *
11 12
2108M0550 2108M0550
2.4 Commissioning and Maintenance Tools % (- ?:V>=|>:=>` Dust Barrier?:V>=|>:~k`
SHC1 Handheld Interrogator

"@&V@
Searchpoint Optima Plus. It can be connected directly to a DVC100 series termination unit (non-intrusive),
*; @& ?X
required).
' '
• Portable
• Intrinsically safe
@ !
Provides increased protection Prevents the ingress of dust or oil
®
against torrential rain and driven mist and protects the optics in very
HART communication option sea-spray. Recommended for wet or exposed locations. Fits under
* @!\"® over 4-20 mA communication. exposed installations in maritime the Standard Weather Protection.
' ' locations or areas where monsoon This accessory will increase the
& @!\"® @!\"® host or tropical rain conditions are detector’s response time.
experienced. Also provides protection
& @!\"® protocol
against steam and can be used in

2.5 Weather protection accessories This accessory will increase the
detector’s response time.
Searchpoint Optima Plus has a range of weather protection accessories designed to protect the optical
@ 2.6 Gassing Accessories
Analytics to discuss the most suitable weather protection for a particular application.
Searchpoint Optima Plus has a range of accessories designed to assist with gas testing.
As standard, Searchpoint Optima Plus is supplied with Standard Weather Protection, Dust Barrier and

Calibration Cap?:V>=|>::` Gassing Cover?:V>=>:~=`
Standard Weather Protection % "+ , Inlet

?:V>=|>:` ?:V>=>:~`
Outlet
Used to achieve accurate calibration Used to apply gas to Searchpoint

Provides the best compromise Provides additional protection against of Searchpoint Optima Plus. Requires *
between response time and heavy rainfall, wash downs and direct all weather protection to be removed functional checking. Fits over the
protection. Suitable for indoor, sunlight. except dust barrier. standard weather protection. (For
outdoor and duct mounting calibration, use the Calibration Cap).
applications
Caution: The Calibration Cap and the Gassing Cover must be removed after use.
13 14
2108M0550 2108M0550
Flow Housing?:V>=|>:=:`Remote Gassing Cell?:V>=|>:<>` European Duct Mounting Kit – Metric Threads (2104B0349)
Inlet This kit enables M25 versions of Searchpoint

Gassing
Junction Points Optima Plus to be conveniently mounted inside
Box a duct. Electrical connections are made to the
detector via a junction box which is mounted
Searchpoint outside of the duct. Test gas can be applied to the
Optima detector via the gassing points provided.
Junction
Box
Bracket Note: the detector must have the Remote Gassing
' !+
Duct
Mounting
Plate
Outlet
For use in sampling system applications. #*

J + to be applied remotely for performing
aluminium, with stainless steel nozzles, bump tests. Useful for units installed in
outside diameter 6 mm. Searchpoint ducts or inaccessible areas. Required for US Duct Mounting Kit – NPT Threads (2442-0016)
^ > V>> ?
housing. system only). Searchpoint Optima X has
a special version of the RGC.
/ 78
2.7 Mounting Accessories
Junction Box Adaptor Plate (04200-A-1040)
The Junction Box Adaptor Plate enables low

gland clearance junction boxes to be used without
the Searchpoint Optima Plus fouling on the wall
' ; @
! |;?>>=>3!3>V>>`
has mounting points for the DVC100 and DVC100
J:
This kit enables ¾ NPT versions of Searchpoint Optima Plus to be conveniently mounted inside a duct.
Electrical connections are made to the detector via a junction box which is mounted outside of the duct.
Test gas can be applied to the detector via the gassing points provided.
% ! %%-/ "' !+
15 16
2108M0550 2108M0550
3. Mechanical Installation 3. Mechanical Installation

3.2.1 Standard Installation
WARNING
Installation must be in accordance with the recognized standards of the appropriate authority in the 1. Select a suitable entry in the junction box - Searchpoint Optima Plus must be mounted horizontally.
country concerned. For Europe see EN60079-14, EN60079-29-2, and EN61241-14. For installations " J:~K"? `
in North America, the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) should be strictly observed. Elsewhere the
appropriate local or national regulations should be used. 2. Secure the junction box to the mounting surface in the required orientation. Refer to individual junction
box instructions for mounting information.
3. Remove the junction box lid.
4. Fit the Searchpoint Optima Plus detector to the junction box.
3.1 Siting Ensure that the junction box thread is compatible with the Searchpoint Optima Plus thread.
0 %&!% 1 2 !# %"%% + !% ! +3!
The placement of gas detectors should be determined following the advice of experts having specialist avoid cross-threading.
knowledge of gas dispersion, experts having knowledge of the process plant system and equipment
involved, safety personnel and engineering personnel. The agreement reached on the location of detectors 56 % + " %% !% $ %2 "
should be recorded.
Note: M25 versions should be secured using a locknut. See diagram below.
Guidance on the positioning of gas detectors to provide the best detection coverage is contained in
Enclosure / Junction Box
#&#K>>k3:k3: &
consults these Codes of Practice when determining where detectors are to be located.
Lock Nut
' +3
1. Searchpoint Optima Plus must be mounted horizontally to reduce the risk of contamination building up
on the optical surfaces.
: * 3<>&
~&
warranty.

& #;
to report a fault and may cause permanent damage.
< * * #K>>k3:k3V Sealing Washer
install units in locations where the vibration exceeds this level.
~ B *' * Ensure that the Standard Weather Protection is in the correct orientation, with the semi-circle of holes at the
condensation, which could build up on the optical surfaces. # % ! + !% ! %;%2!
6. In extreme environmental conditions, consider the use of additional weather protection options %"%(<=%!! 056 %% + %
(see Introduction, Weather Protection Accessories). compressed to maintain the IP rating.
@ !
➩
3.2 Installation
Note: Searchpoint Optima Plus must be mounted horizontally to reduce the risk of contamination building
up on the optical surfaces.
The Standard Installation section describes general mounting and installation. Additional information is
provided for using Searchpoint Optima Plus in a sampling system or a duct, and for the use of the Remote
Gassing Cell.
✔
17 18
2108M0550 2108M0550

~ } ;<; % 7 8 =78>
>%& % ?"! % #! %# %& ;%2!
with the longer overhang extending beyond the Standard Weather Protection. Ensure the clamp does not "> V>> '> >>'>>> > <>>'>>>
cover the gas venting slot of the Standard Weather Protection. exclusively for use with the Remote Gassing Cell (RGC) in sampling systems.
6mm o/d
} * *;* Sampling systems should be designed to comply with the Searchpoint Optima Plus operating conditions,
IP rating. for example, sample temperature, cleanliness, water content, dust content etc.
7. Fit approved blanking plugs to the unused junction box cable entries as required to maintain the The RGC has inlet and outlet gassing pipes with outer diameter 6 mm. The cell is not directional so either
pipe can be used as the inlet.
= } ; *
k " &<?# ` >%&!% 1 2 # %0 " @ %%!!
gassing pipes are used. The gassing pipes for the RGC are the ones which support the retaining nuts for the
10.Replace the junction box lid.
Weather Protection or the Flow Housing.
;<< - = ) ' +3
V J; ^ *>
Inlet : !^ *
6mm o/d 3. If possible, use negative pressure to avoid the risk of pressurisation affecting the gas reading.
4. The choice of sampling lines should be appropriate to the application.
3.2.4 Installation in a duct
European Duct Mounting Kit – Metric Threads
Caution: Take note of the requirements on earthing given in Chapter 4. Earth loops should be
Outlet avoided.
Gassing
Sampling systems should be designed to comply with the Searchpoint Optima Plus operating conditions, Junction Points
for example, sample temperature, cleanliness, water content, dust content etc. Box
' +3 Note: In order to make use of the gassing
Searchpoint
Optima points provided, the Searchpoint Optima Plus
1. Flow rate should be between 0.7 litres per minute and 2 litres per minute. Junction #!+ %%-
Box / "'B(<3J
: !^ * Bracket
3. If possible, use negative pressure to avoid the risk of pressurisation affecting the gas reading.
4. The choice of sampling lines should be appropriate to the application. Duct
Mounting
Plate
19 20
2108M0550 2108M0550

250 US Duct Mounting Kit – NPT Threads
(? %

250
250
Note 2: The cutout in the duct should
be 230mm x 230mm.
188
125
63
Note: In order to make use of the gassing points provided, the Searchpoint Optima Plus unit must be factory
63 %%-/ "'B(<3J
125
'& + !Q % 6
188
250
" X * +3
1. Cut a square 230mm by 230mm hole in the duct wall. Drill the holes required to attach the mounting
plate to the duct wall.
2. Place the Searchpoint Optima Plus unit on the side of the mounting plate where the threaded bushes Note: Dimensions shown
protrude and feed the wires through the central hole. in inches.
L * *
the junction box.
4. Screw the unit into the junction box until the assembly is secure with the mounting plate trapped
between the box and the Searchpoint Optima Plus.
5. Add the appropriate support bracket and bolt to the junction box.
6. Blank off any unused support bushes.
7. Remove the covers from the ends of the gassing cell inlet tubes.
= ! * *
9. Fasten the mounting plate to the wall of the duct, ensuring that the seal is compressed.
V>} * *;*
and IP rating.
11. Fit approved blanking plugs to unused junction box cable entries as required to maintain the
" X * *+3

1. Cut a square 6” by 6” hole in the duct wall. Drill the holes required to attach the mounting plate to the
V:} ; *
duct wall.
V" &<?# `
2. Place the Searchpoint Optima Plus unit on the side of the mounting plate where the threaded bushes
protrude and feed the wires through the central hole.
L * *
the junction box.
21 22
2108M0550 2108M0550
3. Mechanical Installation 4. Electrical Installation

4. Screw the unit into the junction box until the assembly is secure with the mounting plate trapped 4.1 Power supply
between the box and the Searchpoint Optima Plus.
5. Remove the covers from the ends of the gassing cell inlet tubes.
" *V= :
6. Attach the gassing tubing to the ends of the gassing cell inlet tubes. The maximum power consumption is 5 W. The maximum loop resistance is 600 :. The minimum loop
7. Fasten the mounting plate to the wall of the duct, ensuring that the seal is compressed. @!\"® operation is 230 :.
= } * *;* ! ! +" (<V !%Y ! 6:.
and IP rating. The table below gives the total power consumption for Searchpoint Optima Plus with some common
k } *X *;* junction box options.
and IP rating.
V>} ; * Termination unit Total power consumption including Searchpoint Optima Plus
VV" &<?# ` HALO** 6W
XNX 10 W
3.2.5 Installation of gassing pipes for Remote Gassing Cell DVC100 series 6W
Honeywell Analytics Junction Box 5W
Remote Gassing Cell
High Concentration # V= 'X
(v/v cell) Nozzles account the voltage drop due to cable resistance.
" ; * +
7 ? =@ Q @ > "
#; +
>%! + " V !BV! J% ! #" (<
V !BV ! J%%Y #" # %! !
ZV ![% " \V !%!B]! !J
2! % ! 6;>%! $ % !%
" B^2VJ6(<^_<B !J
The Remote Gassing Cell (RGC) is used for functional response checking (bump testing) when the &%Y !# !B-J^Z_<^:((: per core, (allowing for
* "\]& * component variations, losses, etc.).
+3 The following tables show the maximum cable distances between the controller and Searchpoint Optima
Plus for a 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG*) core cable, for different termination unit options, assuming a voltage drop of
V 3 V in each core. The tables are examples only and actual cable parameters and source power supply
voltage for the application should be used to calculate the maximum cable distance allowed at the
: ; 3
installation site.
3. Ensure that the exhaust vents well away from the Searchpoint Optima Plus to avoid affecting the gas
reading.
Total power Max Cable Length for 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG*) core
< @ * \]&#;
consumption (Cable resistance 12.7 :/km (20.4 :/mile))
Termination unit Metres Feet
HALO** 6W 709 2326
XNX 10 W 433 1421
DVC100 series 6W 709 2326
Honeywell Analytics Junction Box 5W 866 2841
*nearest equivalent
& ! " % #

&@ ! *
23 24
2108M0550 2108M0550
4. Electrical Installation 4. Electrical Installation

4.2 Cabling recommendations ' +3
"* * ' General recommendations
" ' * * 1. In general, correctly engineered star earthing arrangements minimise earth current crosstalk and noise,
For example, three-core copper cable, with screen (90% coverage) and suitable mechanical protection (e.g. improving the reliability and performance of instrumentation.
steel wire armour or conduit). : " ' *
B @!\"® communications, there are some additional considerations. In particular, low and reduces crosstalk.
* * } * @!\"® Communication L *
} * installation. This connection should be made in such a manner that it does not introduce noise onto the
instrument earth.
4.3 Earth regimes

Field Cabling
V " * * "
Any earthing regime employed must avoid earth loops. shield should be connected to a low noise instrument earth at one end.
" +3 : " * *

• Searchpoint Optima Plus has an earth wire (green and yellow) for connection to protective earth. 3. If armoured cable is being used it is necessary to prevent the armour becoming connected to the screen
This is connected to the enclosure and isolated from the other wires. Maximum voltage between earth
and the other wires is 500 V. < } *
• There is an earthing point on the outside of the Searchpoint Optima Plus enclosure for connection to ' * !*
protective earth. Alternatively, an earth connection can be made via the mounting thread, e.g. to conduit, ' *
a metal junction box, or a continuity plate in a plastic junction box.
• Searchpoint Optima Plus does not require an instrument earth connection. Maximum voltages
V ! ; X*
Circuitry Searchpoint Optima Plus Enclosure
* ~>>"
surge voltages are generated by lightning or the switching of heavy electrical plant. Earthing
Power, Signal and X
Communications Wires * * *
* *
may exceed 500 V it is strongly recommended that surge suppression devices be installed close to
the unit.
& #! " ! ! 5>`q >2<? 2{0!% q
0`3(&" ! % #!%!| "+ ! ! +
Interference and noise

Earth Wire 1. For installations in Europe, all electrical equipment connected to the system should comply with
(Green / Yellow) EN50270. For non-European installations, electrical equipment connected to the system should comply
RFI Protection with applicable national or international EMC standards.
Three options to connect to protective earth:- Filters : ! < :> !* *
1. Green / Yellow Earth wire kept below the levels necessary to comply with the requirements of EN60079-29-1 or other applicable
2. External Earth point ' X
3. Mounting Thread Protective Earth
induced on the current loop should be no greater than ±0.25 mA.
"> <3:> !
current sensing resistor. Electrical noise on this rail is therefore directly connected to the 4-20 mA
input. In order to avoid additional noise being induced on the 0 V rail, it should not be commoned with
the protective earth, which frequently carries a high level of electrical noise.
< ':< * '^
noise.
25 26
2108M0550 2108M0550
4. Electrical Installation 4. Electrical Installation

5. In order to reduce the likelihood of radio frequency interference affecting the operation of units it is Searchpoint Optima Plus Current Sink Connection
recommended that neither units nor their cabling are installed in close proximity to the antennae of high
powered radio, radar or satellite communication equipment.
4.4 Connections
Wire Colour Connection Purpose

Red +24 Vdc +ve Supply
Black 0 Vdc -ve Supply
White 4-20 mA Output Signal
Orange RS485 A SHC1 Communication
Blue RS485 B SHC1 Communication
Green/Yellow Earth Protective Earth
Note: Searchpoint Optima Plus is reverse polarity protected.

The connection diagrams below show Searchpoint Optima Plus connected in current sink or current source
mode.
Note: Searchpoint Optima Plus will automatically detect whether it should operate in current sink or current
source mode.
Searchpoint Optima Plus Current Source Connection
27 28
2108M0550 2108M0550
5. Operation 6. Commissioning
During normal operation, the 4-20 mA output represents 0-100 %FSD. The output is linear. Read this chapter if the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator or the HART® communications
Analogue output below 4 mA represents diagnostic information. If the Searchpoint Optima Plus measures are not being used.
a negative gas reading, the analogue output will remain at 4 mA until the negative gas warning threshold
is reached (-3 %FSD to -6 %FSD depending on the gas being measured) at which point it will signal a
Warning. 6.1 First Time Switch On
K+ * *
YZ + during commissioning.
Status Current output
Fault < 1 mA Note: During commissioning the 4-20 mA output can be monitored either at the control room or locally
with a multimeter. When connecting or disconnecting a multimeter, power off the Searchpoint Optima Plus,
Warning 3 mA otherwise the unit will indicate a latched warning that the 4-20 mA loop was broken. If this occurs it can be
Gas Reading 4 – 20 mA cleared by re-cycling the power.
Overrange 21 mA
V | '
Inhibit 2 mA
are in accordance with Section 4.
: ! &X *V= :
The tolerance on the nominal current output value is ± 0.2 mA.
J <3:> ! ' * +3
During Warning status, the Searchpoint Optima Plus will continue to monitor gas, and will revert to Gas
Reading status if a gas reading is detected.
If a Warning is indicated, schedule maintenance to investigate and rectify the cause. If left unattended, the Current output Duration
X }' * ^
< 1 mA <5s
"B ' * * @!\"® communications, or by
@ ! } # +3 2 ± 0.2 mA < 60 s
4 ± 0.2 mA ongoing
Parameter Range
Note: If gas is present, the unit will indicate a gas reading.
Warning* 0 mA to 6 mA
% \~( ! !% ; "0+# %
Inhibit 1 mA to 3 mA % !+!%%; "0 '%(># % "
Overrange 20 mA to 21.6 mA
Searchpoint Optima Plus is factory calibrated and it is not necessary to calibrate or gas test it during
* For ATEX compliance, the warning value should not be set > 3 and < 5 mA. If the warning value is set @ X
higher than 4 mA, the output signal will toggle between the warning value for 1 s and the current gas the unit is functioning, please see Chapter 7 Maintenance, Bump Test for instructions.
reading for 9 s.
5.2 HART® Operation during Fault
@!\"® V ! ' @!\"® version of
}@!\"® communications will not work.
*} @!\"® to be 1 mA.
" * ?& @!\"®& '&
@!\"® Operation during Fault).
29 30
2108M0550 2108M0550
7. Maintenance 7. Maintenance
Read this chapter if the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator or the HART® communications V !} ' *X ^
are not being used. housing.
3 *
< ^ "
7.1 Introduction of the O-ring.
5. Clean any dust or contaminants from the optics using mild detergent and a soft cloth or cotton bud.
Do not use solvents or abrasive cleaners.
" ; #&#K>>k3:k3:
or other local or national regulations for guidance on establishing an appropriate maintenance routine. # 3 * ^ ' 3
go below the retaining nuts, are clean and in good condition. Replace if in doubt.
^ ^
Inspection How to check and clean the unit
= \33
9. Cycle the power to clear any faults or warnings that may have been generated by cleaning.
Bump Test (Gas Challenge) How to carry out a gas test using the Gassing Cover
Bump Test (Gas Challenge) with RGC How to carry out a gas test using the Remote Gassing Cell
[^ ( / =8 >
7.2 Inspection Searchpoint Optima Plus can be functionally checked using an appropriate test gas.
Searchpoint Optima Plus should be inspected periodically and cleaned if necessary. The required frequency
Caution: Gas readings will be generated during this procedure. Take appropriate action at the control
of inspection will depend on local site conditions and will need to be established through experience.
and monitoring system to inhibit signals.
Caution: Gas readings may be generated during this procedure. Take appropriate action at the
>% % # (%#"
control and monitoring system to inhibit signals.
Note: During testing the 4-20 mA output can be monitored either at the control room or locally with a
1. Inspect the Searchpoint Optima Plus unit, its junction box and cabling for any signs of physical damage.
multimeter. When connecting or disconnecting a multimeter, power off the Searchpoint Optima Plus,
: V !} ' otherwise the unit will indicate a latched warning that the 4-20 mA loop was broken. If this occurs it can be
Standard Weather Protection. cleared by re-cycling the power.
B * * '
clean or replace weather protection.
1. Fit a Gassing Cover to the Searchpoint Optima Plus.
4. Inspect the Dust Barrier and clean or replace if required.
5. Remove the Dust Barrier and inspect the optics.
: ! V V~ >3>
3. Check that the Searchpoint Optima Plus responds to the test gas. The reading should be within
7. Replace the Dust Barrier and Standard Weather Protection.
±20 % of the target.
= & * *
Note: If the gas reading is not acceptable for the application, re-zero the Searchpoint Optima Plus and
[; \ ] % >%&'( % "%->® communication or the XNX Universal
> $ %&!% 1 2 0! ! % "%"
response include: -
• Test gas and concentration
• Tolerance of the test gas concentration
• Atmospheric pressure
Caution: Gas readings may be generated during this procedure. Take appropriate action at the
control and monitoring system to inhibit signals. • Ambient temperature
• Wind speed
: X ^ < \ ] & ?>`#
returned to zero.
31 32
2108M0550 2108M0550
7. Maintenance 8. Use of the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator

[Y ( / =8 > 7 8 =78> Read this chapter if the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator is being used to communicate
with Searchpoint Optima Plus.
~> \ ] ?\]&`' *
from most Searchpoint Optima Plus units. The reading depends on the target gas calibration of the unit.
The RGC is a tool to check for a gas response and is not precise; therefore variability in response between 8.1 Introduction
units should be expected.
" ; @&V@
Caution: Gas readings will be generated during this procedure. Take appropriate action at the control how to operate it. It also provides the menu structure for use with Searchpoint Optima Plus.
and monitoring system to inhibit signals.
"@&V@ *' * *'
_) - `; 78 @ !
"@&V@ X
>% ! + %&!% 1 2 % -/ "'B-/'J
>%-/' !+ >%&'( % " %->® communications.
Note: The HART®! ! | ! !%-&<6! ! #+%&'(
Note: During testing the 4-20 mA output can be monitored either at the control room or locally with a Handheld Interrogator. If the Searchpoint Optima Plus is being polled simultaneously by a HART® host,
multimeter. When connecting or disconnecting a multimeter, power off the Searchpoint Optima Plus, +! ! +#Y ! #+%&'( % "
otherwise the unit will indicate a latched warning that the 4-20 mA loop was broken. If this occurs it can be
cleared by re-cycling the power.
8.2 SHC1 Connection
Remote Gassing Cell
High Concentration WARNING
(v/v cell) Nozzles @&V@
! &V>> '@&
&@&V@ +
V B @ ! &V>> |;' *;

via the IS socket.
Calibrator
Type SHC1
1. Inspect the gassing pipes to the RGC. Ensure that the exhaust is clear and vents well away from the
Searchpoint Optima Plus, and does not cause a hazard.
: ! ~> > >3>?} V> '
allow a longer time for the gas to reach Searchpoint Optima Plus).
3. Check that the Searchpoint Optima Plus responds to the test gas.
ESC
Note: If the gas reading is not acceptable for the application, re-zero the Searchpoint Optima Plus and
% >%&'( % "%->® communication or the XNX Universal
> $ %&!% 1 2
4. Flush the RGC with zero gas until the gas reading has returned to zero. :B *;@& ? <#
Installation).
33 34
2108M0550 2108M0550
8. Use of the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator 8. Use of the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator
8.3 SHC1 Operation
Calibrator
Press and hold for three seconds to switch on.
Type SHC1
Press and esc together and hold to switch off.
Unit powers down automatically after 10 minutes
to prolong battery life.
IS Connector LCD Display
Flying Lead
Z - SHC1 EXCEL
Interrogator
Note: The protection device must always be used for this type of connection. A hot work permit may be
$ % ! Push Buttons
& + ESC

1. Isolate all power supplies.
2. Remove the cover of the junction box.
@ ^ @& X *;
+
Junction Box
" *@&V
Orange RS485 A Brown • Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to scroll through the menu options.
Blue RS485 B Blue
• Press Enter ( ) to select an option and z = > to exit.
Black 0V
SHC Protection
White 4-20mA
Device Flying Lead
Red +24V Z- SHC1 Optima +
Interrogator XvX
Green/Yellow GND
Main Main Main Main Main
Display Calibrate Diagnose Gas Tables Power Off
<& @& Calibrate Diagnose Gas Tables

Display Active Faults Show Gas
Main
Calibrate Diagnose Gas Tables
Cal Sensor Active Warns Show Library
Main
Calibrate Diagnose Gas Tables Change Mode
Force 4-20 Self Test Select Gas
Calibrate Diagnose
Normal 4-20 Soft Reset
35 36
2108M0550 2108M0550
9. Commissioning using SHC1

8. Use of the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator
Handheld Interrogator
B@&V 'X Read this chapter if the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator is being used to communicate
#;'& #kk ' +3 with Searchpoint Optima Plus.
1. Select Change Mode. >% ! % %%&'( !% 1 ] %5
2. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to scroll through the options until Optima+ is highlighted. 5 &'%< %&'( % "
3. Press Enter to select.
9.1 Introduction
"@&V
This chapter explains several operations that may be required during commissioning. Only First Time Switch
>% ! % % %%&'( !% 1 ] ¢"<3:> !L " @&V
the Main Menu. ' ' J J&= @&V@
for details.
8.4 Status indication

First Time Switch On
When Display is selected, the screen includes a status character which indicates the Searchpoint Optima Clear Faults or Warnings How to clear faults or warnings that may be generated during commissioning
? ' ` +3 Fix the 4-20 mA Output How to force the mA output to set levels in order to calibrate the controller or to test the
system
" A spinning line shows the system is operating normally i.e. in a fully active state Test 4-20 mA Loop Integrity
| A stationery line shows the system is in inhibit
W Active Warning & % } ,
F Active Fault value is correct.
A Alarm
9.2 First Time Switch On
Press Enter to view the software version of Searchpoint Optima Plus.
&!% 1 2 ! # + $ ! #
during commissioning.
8.5 SHC1 Battery Replacement
Note: During commissioning the 4-20 mA output can be monitored either at the control room or locally
"* @&V@ + with a multimeter. When connecting or disconnecting a multimeter, power off the Searchpoint Optima Plus,
>!+ %! ! + ?-'@``5(Z>+Z`-Z( ! "%&'( % "
1. Remove the Interrogator from its protective pouch. V | '
2. Using a 2.5mm allen hexagonal key, loosen the four screws on the rear cover of the Interrogator. are in accordance with Section 4.
& ' ^; * : ! &X *V= :
connecting the key pad to the electronics module is not damaged. J <3:> ! ' * +3
< * * \3 Current output Duration
~ & *X ' ^; *
^ <1 mA <5s
6. Using a 2.5mm allen hexagonal key, tighten the four screws on the rear cover of the Interrogator. 2 ± 0.2 mA < 60 s
When the battery reaches end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities. 4 ± 0.2 mA ongoing
Note: If gas is present, the unit will indicate a gas reading.
37 38
2108M0550 2108M0550
9. Commissioning using SHC1 9. Commissioning using SHC1

Handheld Interrogator Handheld Interrogator
% \~(; "0 0% ! # 9.5 Test 4-20 mA Loop Integrity
investigate and clear a warning or fault (see Clear Faults or Warnings).
It is recommended that the 4-20 mA loop integrity is tested by setting the Searchpoint Optima Plus to
Searchpoint Optima Plus is factory calibrated and it is not necessary to calibrate or gas test it during "
@ X current limit.
the unit is functioning, please see Chapter 10 Maintenance, Bump Test for instructions.
>% ! ( ! +

9.3 Clear Faults or Warnings
Note: When connecting or disconnecting a multimeter, power off the Searchpoint Optima Plus, otherwise
During commissioning, faults or warnings may be generated. This will be indicated by the 4-20 mA output the unit will indicate a latched warning that the 4-20 mA loop was broken. If this occurs it can be cleared
signal. Use the procedure below to clear them. "%&'( % "&'0 ; "
1. Select Diagnose then Active Faults, or Diagnose then Active Warnings to view any faults or warnings. 1. Select Calibrate then Force 4-20.
2. Use ▲ and ▼ to set the mA value to 21 mA and press Enter.
Note: If no active faults or warnings are present, the 4-20 mA output signal may have latched due to an
earlier fault or warning that has now cleared. Proceed to step 3 to clear latched faults or warnings. Searchpoint Optima Plus will now output 21 mA.
2. Use the Problem Solving section of this manual to rectify the issue. 3. Check that the signal at the controller is > 20 mA, then press Enter.
3. Select Diagnose then Soft Reset to clear any latched warnings or faults. 4. Press Enter to release the 4-20 mA output signal.
5. Press Escape to return to the main menu.
+! " !% " %# (6 ! # " !+! "
the power. Note: If the current at the controller is not correct, check the 4-20 mA loop connections and cabling, and
check that the loop resistance is less than 600 : ! ! +" (<
4. Press Escape to return to the main menu. V !%Y ! 6:.
9.4 Fix the 4-20 mA Output
"<3:> !*; *V ! :V !' * *

the controller or to test the system.
>% ! ( ! +
the unit will indicate a latched warning that the 4-20 mA loop was broken. If this occurs it can be cleared
"%&'( % "&'0 ; "
1. Select Calibrate then Force 4-20.

2. Use ▲ and ▼ to set the required mA value and press Enter.
Searchpoint Optima Plus will now output the set mA value.
3. When calibration is complete, press Enter.

4. Press Enter to release the 4-20 mA output signal.
39 40
2108M0550 2108M0550
10. Maintenance using 10. Maintenance using

SHC1 Handheld Interrogator SHC1 Handheld Interrogator
Read this chapter if the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator is being used to communicate = \| B
with Searchpoint Optima Plus. 9. Press Escape then Enter to release the 4-20 mA output signal.
10.Press Escape to return to the main menu.
>% ! % %%&'( !% 1 ] %5 11.Select Diagnose then Soft Reset to clear any faults or warnings that may have been generated by
5 &'%< %&'( % " cleaning.
+! " !% " %# (6 ! # " !+! "%
10.1 Introduction power.
" ; #&#K>>k3:k3

12.Press Escape to return to the main menu.
2 or other local or national regulations for guidance on establishing an appropriate maintenance routine.
" @&V ' ' J J&=
@&V@ Z`; \ ]
Inspection How to check and clean the unit Searchpoint Optima Plus should be inspected periodically and cleaned if necessary. The required frequency

Caution: Gas readings may be generated during this procedure.
Bump Test (Gas Challenge) with RGC How to carry out a gas test using the Remote Gassing Cell
Re-zero Searchpoint Optima Plus How to re-zero if gas test results are unacceptable 1. Select Calibrate then Display to inhibit the 4-20 mA output signal.
Calibration How to calibrate the zero (and span if required) 2. Inspect the Searchpoint Optima Plus unit, its junction box and cabling for any signs of physical damage.
X ^
View and Clear Faults or Warnings How to view Faults and Warnings
< V !} ' *X ^
3 *
& % } ,
~ ^ "
value is correct.
of the O-ring.
Note: When connecting or disconnecting a multimeter, power off the Searchpoint Optima Plus, otherwise 6. Clean any dust or contaminants from the optics using mild detergent and a soft cloth or cotton bud.
the unit will indicate a latched warning that the 4-20 mA loop was broken. If this occurs it can be cleared Do not use solvents or abrasive cleaners.
"%&'( % "&'0 ; " # 3 * ^ ' 3
below the retaining nuts, are clean and in good condition. Replace if in doubt.
= ^ ^
10.2 Inspection
k \33
Searchpoint Optima Plus should be inspected periodically and cleaned if necessary. The required frequency 10. Press Escape then Enter to release the 4-20 mA output signal.
12. Select Diagnose then Soft Reset to clear any faults or warnings that may have been generated by
Caution: Gas readings may be generated during this procedure. cleaning.
1. Select Calibrate then Display to inhibit the 4-20 mA output signal. +! " !% " %# (6 ! # " !+! "
2. Inspect the Searchpoint Optima Plus unit, its junction box and cabling for any signs of physical damage. the power.
V !} '
Standard Weather Protection. 13. Press Escape to return to the main menu.
< B * * '
5. Inspect the Dust Barrier and clean or replace if required.
6. Remove the Dust Barrier and inspect the optics.
41 42
2108M0550 2108M0550

Z`^ ( / =8 > Remote Gassing Cell
High Concentration
Searchpoint Optima Plus can be functionally checked using an appropriate test gas.
(v/v cell) Nozzles
Caution: Gas readings will be generated during this procedure.
>% % # (%#"
1. Select Calibrate then Display. (This will inhibit the 4-20 mA output signal).
2. Fit a Gassing Cover to the Searchpoint Optima Plus, if not already in place.
! V V~ >3>
4. Check that the Searchpoint Optima Plus responds to the test gas. The reading should be within
±20 % of target.
1. Inspect the gassing pipes to the RGC. Ensure that the exhaust is clear and vents well away from the
Note: If the gas reading is not acceptable for the application, re-zero the Searchpoint Optima Plus and Searchpoint Optima Plus, and does not cause a hazard.
repeat the test. Factors to consider when evaluating the gas response include: - 2. Select Calibrate then Display. (This will inhibit the 4-20 mA output signal).
• Test gas and concentration ! ~> > >3>?}
• Tolerance of the test gas concentration V> ' `
• Atmospheric pressure 4. Check that the Searchpoint Optima Plus responds to the test gas.
• Ambient temperature
• Wind speed Note: If the gas reading is not acceptable for the application, re-zero the Searchpoint Optima Plus and
repeat the test.
~ \ ] & ?>`#
returned to zero. 5. Flush the RGC with zero gas until the gas reading has returned to zero.
6. Press Escape then Enter to release the 4-20 mA output signal. 6. Press Escape then Enter to release the 4-20 mA output signal.
7. Press Escape to return to the main menu. 7. Press Escape to return to the main menu.
Z`Y ( / =8 > 7 8 =78> Z` 7 % } ,
~> \ ] ?\]&`' * Re-zero Searchpoint Optima Plus if it has given an unexpected response to a gas test. In most cases a
from most Searchpoint Optima Plus units. The reading depends on the target gas calibration of the unit. re-zero will restore accuracy and a full span calibration is not required.
The RGC is a tool to check for a gas response and is not precise; therefore variability in response between
units should be expected.
1. Select Calibrate then CalSensor. (This will inhibit the 4-20 mA output signal).
: # '
Caution: Gas readings will be generated during this procedure. a Gassing Cover and apply zero gas.
3. Press Enter.
_) - `; 78
When the process is complete the display will state Zero Calibrated. It will then show options to continue to
>% ! + %&!% 1 2 % -/ "'B-/'J a span calibration, or to exit calibration.
>%-/' !+
4. Press Escape to exit calibration.
Note: If the option to Calibrate Span is selected in error, press Escape.
43 44
2108M0550 2108M0550

10.7 Calibration 10.8 Investigation of Faults or Warnings
Searchpoint Optima Plus is factory calibrated and does not require routine calibration. In most cases, a If the unit is signalling Fault or Warning on the 4-20 mA output, the problem should be investigated and
re-zero will correct any inaccuracy in the gas reading. It is strongly recommended that a span calibration is remedied as soon as possible. Some types of faults and warnings are latching and will need to be cleared
not carried out. by a Reset.
In the unlikely event that a span calibration is required, use a cylinder of the target gas, of approximately
50 %FSD, with an accuracy of at least ± 2 %. 1. Select Diagnose then Active Faults, or Diagnose then Active Warnings to view any faults or warnings.
Note: Searchpoint Optima Plus will accept a span calibration gas concentration of between 30 %FSD and
(60&?%% ! + ! ! Note: If no active faults or warnings are present, the 4-20 mA output signal may be due to a latched fault or
warning. Proceed to step 3.
Do not calibrate Searchpoint Optima Plus during periods of very high or low atmospheric pressure, very
strong winds or storms.
2. Use the Problem Solving section of this manual (Chapter 14) to rectify the issue.
3. Select Diagnose then Soft Reset to clear any latched warnings or faults.
Caution: Gas readings will be generated during this procedure.
+! " !% " %# (6 ! # " !+! "%
>% % # (%#! #
power.
V V !} '

Standard Weather Protection.
2. Fit a Calibration Cap to the Searchpoint Optima Plus. Ensure it is pushed on fully.
4. Ensure that there is zero gas present in the vicinity of the Searchpoint Optima Plus. If necessary,
V V~
5. Press Enter.
When the process is complete the display will state Zero Calibrated. It will then show options to continue to
a span calibration, or to exit calibration.
6. Press Enter to begin span calibration.

7. Press Enter.
= ▲ and ▼ to set the concentration of the calibration gas. When it is correct, press Enter.
k ! * V V~ B *
?>3>`
10. Press Enter.
When the process is complete the display will show Span Calibrated. It will then show an instruction to
remove gas.
VV\ & * & ?>`#

has returned to zero.
12. Press Enter.
V\ B
45 46
2108M0550 2108M0550
11. Use of the HART® Communications 11. Use of the HART® Communications
Read this chapter if HART® communications are being used to communicate with "LV >>>>>>>>? `
Searchpoint Optima Plus. &V:& '&
Note: Some HART® handheld devices will retain the previous login until switched off, even if the Searchpoint
1 2 ! ! @ %`(!! ! % #+"" "
11.1 General when appropriate.
"@!\"® @!\"®@!\"® 11.3.2 Menu Structure
devices provide digital communications superimposed on the standard analogue output. Detailed
*@!\"®* @!\"®& } *
The welcome screen displays current information about the Searchpoint Optima Plus.
www.hartcomm.org.
@!\"® is a master-slave protocol, i.e. the Searchpoint Optima Plus does not continually transmit data but
will respond on request. WELCOME SCREEN
Example Data
@!\"® ?`' &
' * @ ! * 1 Device Setup
@!\"® Foundation website www.hartcomm.org. 2 Gas Concentration 0 %LEL
4 PV Loop current 4 mA
" @!\"® ' * @!\"®"X =
" ' =' * 5 Active Gas Table Methane
standard products. 6 Operating Mode Healthy
7 Loop Current Mode Point to Point HART Mode
"@!\"® ' *@!\"® host
8 Time (24-hour) 15:47
? `
9 Date (dd/mm/yyyy) 16/07/2010
11.2 Connection
Selecting Device Setup leads to the further menu options, depending on the access level of the user.
* @!\"® ? ; @!L *;`
@!\"® handheld device. " *?;;;; '££; `+3
*' *@!\"® signal across a load resistor in DEVICE SETUP MENU – DEFAULT ACCESS LEVEL
the current loop. For example, provided there is the minimum resistance of 230 : in the 4-20 mA loop, the
@!\"® handheld device can be connected across the terminals in the junction box. 1 Device Setup 1 User Default Default
2 User Login Level 1
3 Unit Status Level 2
&@ ! *
1 Device Setup 1 User Default 1 Operating Mode xxxx
2 User Login 2 Active Warnings
11.3 Searchpoint Optima Plus User Interface 3 Unit Status 3 Active Faults
11.3.1 Access Levels and Password Protection
" LV *

' L: @ }
" 3 * '
status, including active warnings and faults.
LV * ' X
LV " = ? `'
recommended that the user sets this to a password of their choosing. To avoid potential compatibility
* @!\"® ' =
47 48
2108M0550 2108M0550
11. Use of the HART® Communications 11. Use of the HART® Communications
DEVICE SETUP MENU – LEVEL 1 ACCESS 1 Device Setup 1 User Level 1 1 HART During Fault xxxx
2 User Login 2 Inhibit Current xxxx
1 Device Setup 1 User Level 1 Default
3 Unit Status 3 Warning Current xxxx
2 User Login Level 1
4 Overrange Current xxxx
3 Unit Status Level 2
5 Test 5 Set Time (24 hour)

6 Calibrate 6 Set Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
5 Test
7 Change Password
6 Calibrate
8 Assembly Details

9 Device Info
8 Assembly Details
9 Device Info 1 Device Setup 1 User Level 1 ! $ &&&&
2 User Login 2 HART Address xxxx
1 Device Setup 1 User Level 1 1 Operating Mode xxxx
3 Unit Status 3 Description ??
2 User Login 2 Active Warnings
4 Assembly Date ??
3 Unit Status 3 Active Faults
5 Test 5 Assembly Number ??
4 Event History
6 Calibrate 6 Device Tag ??
5 Test
7 Transmitter ID
6 Calibrate
8 Assembly Details

9 Device Info
8 Assembly Details
9 Device Info 1 Device Setup 1 User Level 1 1 Loop Current Mode xxxx
2 User Login 2 Num req preams xxxx
1 Device Setup 1 User Level 1 !" #
3 Unit Status 3 Num resp preams xxxx
2 User Login 2 Gas Selection
4 Dev id xxxx
3 Unit Status
5 Test 5 Universal rev xxxx

6 Calibrate 6 Fld dev rev xxxx
5 Test
7 Software rev xxxx
6 Calibrate
8 Assembly Details 8 Hardware rev xxxx

9 Device Info
8 Assembly Details
9 Device Info
1 Device Setup 1 User Level 1 1 Inhibit 11.3.3 Menu Navigation
2 User Login 2 mA loop test
3 Unit Status 3 Self test Menu options can be selected by highlighting the option and pressing Enter, by pressing the number of the
4 Device reset option, or by double clicking on the option. For more information on how to select menu options please see
5 Test 5 Simulate Alarm Fault @!\"® host device being used.
6 Calibrate

8 Assembly Details
9 Device Info 11.3.4 Error Reporting
1 Device Setup 1 User Level 1 1 Inhibit
2 User Login 2 Bump Test @!\"®& <='
3 Unit Status 3 Gas Concentration xxxx @!\"® host is connected, it will be reported immediately. Therefore warning messages
4 mA Loop Calibration may pop up during other operations.
5 Test 5 Gas Calibration
6 Calibrate 6 Calibration Info ??

8 Assembly Details
9 Device Info
49 50
2108M0550 2108M0550
12. Commissioning using 12. Commissioning using

HART® Communications HART® Communications
Read this chapter if HART® communications are being used to communicate with 12.2 First Time Switch On
Searchpoint Optima Plus.
&!% 1 2 ! # + $ ! #
Note: The instructions that follow assume that a suitable HART® host (handheld or PC) is connected to the during commissioning.
&!% 1 2 %% "" %`(!! " &'%((
of the HART®' ! Note: During commissioning the 4-20 mA output can be monitored either at the control room or locally
with a multimeter. When connecting or disconnecting a multimeter, power off the Searchpoint Optima Plus,
12.1 Introduction cleared using the HART® communications.
This chapter explains several operations that may be required during commissioning. The user should work
V | '
} " '& & '*
are in accordance with Section 4.
*
: ! &X *V= :
J <3:> ! ' * +3
First Time Switch On
How to change settings from the default values: -
Current output Duration
Change the Password – How to change the password for Level 1 access
® Operation during Fault - How to change the Fault < 1 mA <5s
output level to 1 mA so that HART® will operate during Fault
2 ± 0.2 mA < 60 s
Set the Time and Date - How to adjust the real time clock to local time
! " # $% & '% - How to 4 ± 0.2 mA ongoing
change the signal levels from the default settings
+% , & ', Note: If gas is present, the unit will indicate a gas reading
Fix the 4-20 mA Output How to force the mA output to set levels in order to calibrate the controller
or test the system % \~(; "0 0% ! #
investigate and clear a warning or fault (see Clear Faults or Warnings).
Test 4-20 mA Loop Integrity
and overrange
Searchpoint Optima Plus is factory calibrated and it is not necessary to calibrate or gas test it during
Calibrate the 4-20 mA Loop How to calibrate the current output (note this is not a gas calibration)
@ X
, How to change the internal threshold used to simulate Alarm and log gas the unit is functioning, please see Chapter 13 Maintenance, Bump Test for instructions.
events
Simulation How to test the system by simulating Alarm, Warning and Fault conditions
Z<; #
Clear Faults or Warnings How to clear faults or warnings that may be generated during
commissioning
12.3.1 Change the Password
& % } ,
value is correct. LV *
" = ? `! = *
Note: The instructions that follow assume that a suitable HART® host (handheld or PC) is connected to the
&!% 1 2 %% "" %`(!! " &'%(( 1. Select Device Setup.
of the HART®' ! 2. Select User Login.
3. Select Level 1.
4. Enter the password 00000000 (eight zeroes) and press Enter.
~ " 'OK.
6. Select # .
7. Select Change Password.
= " 'OK.
51 52
2108M0550 2108M0550

9. Type in the new password and press Enter. Z<;^ } % $
Note: Some HART® handheld devices contain a default password or hold a previously used password. The Warning, Inhibit and Overrange signal levels can be changed from the default values. The default levels
Ensure that the desired password is typed in before pressing Enter. +3
V>" 'OK.

Parameter Default Range
Warning* 3 mA 0 mA to 6 mA
VV &@!\"® Operation during Fault, step 3, or press Back to return to the Device
Setup menu. Inhibit 2 mA 1 mA to 3 mA
Overrange 21 mA 20 mA to 21.6 mA
Z<;< ]&7/® Operation during Fault * For ATEX compliance, the warning value should not be set > 3 and < 5 mA. If the warning value is set
higher than 4 mA, the output signal will toggle between the warning value for 1 s and the current gas
reading for 9 s.
Searchpoint Optima Plus is shipped with the Fault output current level set to < 1 mA. If the unit enters
} '@!\"® X?@!\"® communications require > 1 mA to
`"}* V !@!\"® communications remain The tolerance on the nominal current output value is ± 0.2 mA.
active during a Fault condition.
1. Select Device Setup.
2. Select # .
3. Select Inhibit Current.
2. Select # .
4. Enter the new value for the current within the allowed range and press Enter.
3. Select HART During Fault.
5. Select Warning Current.
4. Select HART ACTIVE and press Enter.
6. Enter the new value for the current within the allowed range and press Enter.
5. Press Send to send the information to Searchpoint Optima Plus.
7. Select Overrange Current.
6. Proceed to Set the Time and Date, step 3, or press Back to return to the Device Setup menu.
= # Enter.
12.3.3 Set the Time and Date
10. Return to the Welcome screen.
X' * Note: If a value is sent which is outside the allowed range, it will be rejected. Searchpoint Optima Plus will
time. offer the option to restore the previous value or re-enter another value.
1. Select Device Setup. Z<^ +

2. Select # .
3. Select Set Time. * ' *
4. Enter the correct time (24 hour format) and press Enter. ?` } ; *+3
~ " 'OK.
:
6. Select Set Date.
! *
# ? ` Enter.
! * K * =
= " 'OK.
"3=
k &B ' * L''Back to return
" :
to the Device Setup menu.
" '! * ! * K * *

Note: Device Tag and Transmitter ID are commonly used by HART® hosts to identify individual devices (even
% % % ! ! ! !+%&!% 1 2 J>% #
blank.
53 54
2108M0550 2108M0550

1. Select Device Setup. 12.6 Test 4-20 mA Loop Integrity
2. Select Assembly Details.
3. Select Description. It is recommended that the 4-20 mA loop integrity is tested by setting the Searchpoint Optima Plus to
4. Enter required information up to 26 characters (for example the device type) and press Enter. "
5. Select Assembly Date. current limit.
# ? ; ` Enter.
7. Select Assembly Number. >% ! ( ! +
= # =? ; * `
press Enter. Note: When connecting or disconnecting a multimeter, power off the Searchpoint Optima Plus, otherwise
9. Select Device Tag. the unit will indicate a latched warning that the 4-20 mA loop was broken. If this occurs, it can be cleared
using the HART® communications. See Clear Faults or Warnings.
V># =? ; *`
and press Enter.
11. Select Transmitter ID. 1. Select Device Setup.
12. Enter required information up to 32 characters (for example the device location) and press Enter. 2. Select Test
13. Press Send to send the information to Searchpoint Optima Plus. 3. Select mA Loop Test
14. Return to the Welcome screen. 4. The display shows a warning message, press OK.
5. Select Other.
6. Input 21 and press Enter
12.5 Fix the 4-20 mA Output
Searchpoint Optima Plus will now output 21 mA.
"<3:> !*; *V ! :V !' * *
the controller, or to test the system.
7. Check that the signal at the controller is > 20 mA, then press OK
>% ! ( ! + = End.
9. The display shows a note that the Searchpoint Optima Plus will return to normal operation,
press OK.
the unit will indicate a latched warning that the 4-20 mA loop was broken. If this occurs, it can be cleared V>" 'B
Note: If the current at the controller is not correct, check the 4-20 mA loop connections and cabling, and
1. Select Device Setup. check that the loop resistance is less than 600 : ! ! +" (<
V !%Y ! 6:.
2. Select Test
3. Select mA Loop Test
4. The display shows a warning message, press OK. 12.7 Calibrate the 4-20 mA Loop
5. Select required analogue output level and press Enter.
'< :> !* "
calibration.
Searchpoint Optima Plus will now output the set mA value.
6. When ready, press OK
the unit will indicate a latched warning that the 4-20 mA loop was broken. If this occurs, it can be cleared
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 with another value if required, or select End. using the HART® communications. See Clear Faults or Warnings.
= " 'OK.
k " 'B % ! # + +# ! + ( # "%
! # " &'%(># % "
55 56
2108M0550 2108M0550

Note: Different time delays may be observed for low and high calibration. ->? "0 #! " ->'>V@# "0 "
1. Select Device Setup. ! ! %%&!% 1 2 &' "->® Operation during Fault.
2. Select Calibrate. Note: When connecting or disconnecting a multimeter, power off the Searchpoint Optima Plus, otherwise
3. Select mA Loop Calibration.
4. The display tells you to connect a reference meter, press OK.
5. The analogue output value will be set to 4 mA, press OK
>% ! ( ! +
6. Enter the actual reading of the analogue output value (from reference meter or from the controller) and
press Enter.
2. Select Test.
The Searchpoint Optima Plus will collect data and perform the low calibration.
3. Select Simulate Alarm Fault.
4. Select the required function to simulate and press Enter.
7. When complete, the display shows a message that the unit is ready to perform the high calibration,
press OK.
= " *:> !'OK Searchpoint Optima Plus will output the appropriate mA value, and check for any errors.
9. Enter the actual reading of the analogue output value (from reference meter or from the controller)
and press Enter. ~ ' K 'OK.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to simulate different functions.
The Searchpoint Optima Plus will collect data and perform the high calibration. 7. When test is complete select End Simulation and press Enter.
= " K 'OK.
V>" 'OK 9. The display shows a note that the Searchpoint Optima Plus will return to normal operation,
11. The display shows a note that the Searchpoint Optima Plus will return to normal operation, press OK.
press OK. 10. Return to the Welcome screen.
12.10 Clear Faults or Warnings
Z< & /
During commissioning, faults or warnings may be generated. This will be indicated by the 4-20 mA output
The internal alarm threshold is used to log events when the gas reading exceeded the threshold. It is also signal. Use the procedure below to clear them.
used as the value to simulate Alarm. The default value is 20 %FSD.
1. Select Device Setup. 2. Select Unit Status
2. Select 8 . 3. Select Active Faults or Active Warnings to check for any faults or warnings.
3. Select & / . 4. Select View, then First, Next or Previous to display the fault or warning.
4. Select Alarm Threshold.
5. Enter the new value between 10 %FSD and 65 %FSD, and press Enter. 0 + %! "%!! @ %%
6. Press Send to send the information to Searchpoint Optima Plus. fault or warning has been reached.
5. Press OK and Back to return to the Unit Status menu.
12.9 Simulation
Note: If no active faults or warnings are present, the 4-20 mA output signal may have latched due to an
"%% ! 2! _!!% "
Searchpoint Optima Plus can simulate Alarm, Fault and Warning conditions. This can be used to test the
response of the overall system. Simulated Alarms, Faults and Warnings will not be recorded in the Event
@ 6. Use the Problem Solving section of this manual to rectify the issue.
7. Press Back to return to the Device Setup menu.
= Test.
57 58
2108M0550 2108M0550
12. Commissioning using 13. Maintenance using HART®

HART® Communications Communications
9. Select Device Reset. Read this chapter if HART® communications are being used to communicate with
10. Press OK to initiate a Device Reset, which will clear any latched faults or warnings. Searchpoint Optima Plus.
+! " !% " %# (6 ! # " !+! "%
power. Note: The instructions that follow assume that a suitable HART® host (handheld or PC) is connected to the
&!% 1 2 %% "" %`(!! "
VV" OK.
12. The display shows a note that the Searchpoint Optima Plus will return to normal operation,
press OK.
13.1 Introduction
" ; #&#K>>k3:k3:
or other local or national regulations for guidance on establishing an appropriate maintenance routine.
Inspection How to check and clean the unit

Bump Test (Gas Challenge) with RGC ' $ = >
Re-zero Searchpoint Optima Plus How to re-zero if gas test results are unacceptable
Calibration How to calibrate the zero (and span if required)
Store Calibration Information # & ,
to gas testing and calibration
Investigation of Faults or Warnings How to view Faults and Warnings
& % } ,
value is correct.
13.2 Inspection
Caution: Gas readings may be generated during this procedure. Follow the steps to inhibit the
4-20 mA output. Ensure that the unit is not left in Inhibit mode.

2. Select Test.
3. Select Inhibit.
4. Select Start Inhibit and press Enter.
~ " OK. The 4-20 mA output is now inhibited.
59 60
2108M0550 2108M0550
13. Maintenance using HART® 13. Maintenance using HART®

Communications Communications
V !} ' VV# 3 * ^ ' 3
Standard Weather Protection. go below the retaining nuts, are clean and in good condition. Replace if in doubt.
= B * * ' V: ^ ^
9. Inspect the Dust Barrier and clean or replace if required. V\33
10. Remove the Dust Barrier and inspect the optics. 14. Select Device Reset to clear any faults or warnings that may have been generated by cleaning.
11. Clean any dust or contaminants from the optics using mild detergent and a soft cloth or cotton bud. 15. Press OK to initiate a Device Reset.
12. Replace the Dust Barrier and Standard Weather Protection. +! " !% " %# (6 ! # " !+! "
13. Select Device Reset to clear any faults or warnings that may have been generated by cleaning. the power.
14. Press OK to initiate a Device Reset.
V" OK.
+! " !% " %# (6 ! # " !+! "% 17. The display shows a note that the Searchpoint Optima Plus will return to normal operation, press OK.
power. V=Inhibit.
19. Select End Inhibit and press Enter.
V~" OK. :>" OK to release the 4-20 mA output.
16. The display shows a note that the Searchpoint Optima Plus will return to normal operation, 21. Return to the Welcome screen.
press OK.
17. Select Inhibit.
V=End Inhibit and press Enter. Z;^ ( / =8 >
Vk" OK to release the 4-20 mA output.
20. Return to the Welcome screen. Searchpoint Optima Plus can be functionally checked using an appropriate test gas.
Z;; \ ] Caution: Gas readings will be generated during this procedure. The 4-20 mA output will be inhibited

of inspection will depend on local site conditions and will need to be established through experience. >% % # (%#"
Caution: Gas readings may be generated during this procedure. Follow the steps to inhibit the 1. Select Device Setup.
4-20 mA output. Ensure that the unit is not left in Inhibit mode. 2. Select Calibrate.
3. Select Bump Test.
1. Select Device Setup. 4. Select Start Bump Test and press Enter.
2. Select Test. ~ " 'OK. The 4-20 mA output is now inhibited.
3. Select Inhibit. 6. Fit a Gassing Cover to the Searchpoint Optima Plus.
4. Select Start Inhibit and press Enter. ! V V~ >3>
~ " OK. The 4-20 mA output is now inhibited. = &X "
6. Inspect the Searchpoint Optima Plus unit, its junction box and cabling for any signs of physical damage. is shown on the screen. The reading should be within ±20 % of target. When ready to continue
press OK.
X ^
= V !} ' *X ^
3 * Note: If the gas reading is not acceptable for the application, re-zero the Searchpoint Optima Plus and
repeat the test. Factors to consider when evaluating the gas response include: -
k ^ "
of the O-ring. • Test gas and concentration
10. Clean any dust or contaminants from the optics using mild detergent and a soft cloth or cotton bud. • Tolerance of the test gas concentration
Do not use solvents or abrasive cleaners. • Atmospheric pressure
• Ambient temperature
• Wind speed
61 62
2108M0550 2108M0550

k \ ] & ?>`#
returned to zero. Press OK to release the 4-20 mA output. Note: If the gas reading is not acceptable for the application, re-zero the Searchpoint Optima Plus and
10. Return to the Welcome screen. repeat the test.
Z;Y ( / =8 > 7 8 =78> Z; 7 % } ,
~> \ ] ?\]&`' * Re-zero Searchpoint Optima Plus if it has given an unexpected response to a gas test. In most cases a re-
from most Searchpoint Optima Plus units. The reading depends on the target gas calibration of the unit. The zero will restore accuracy and a full span calibration is not required.
RGC is a tool to check for a gas response and is not precise; therefore variability in response between units
should be expected.
Caution: During this procedure the 4-20 mA output will be inhibited automatically. If the procedure is

Caution: Gas readings will be generated during this procedure. The 4-20 mA output will be inhibited

2. Select Calibrate.
_) - `; 78
3. Select Gas Calibration.
4. The display shows a warning message, press OK.
>% ! + %&!% 1 2 % -/ "'B-/'J
~ # '
>%-/' !+
Gassing Cover and apply zero gas.
B * & *
Remote Gassing Cell approximately 15 s. The 4-20 mA output will be inhibited automatically at this time.
High Concentration
7. The display shows a message that the Zero Calibration was successful and offers to exit without a Span
(v/v cell) Nozzles Calibration. Select Yes and press Enter.
= " '
press OK.
13.7 Calibration
Searchpoint Optima Plus is factory calibrated and does not require routine calibration. In most cases, a
re-zero will correct any inaccuracy in the gas reading. It is strongly recommended that a span calibration is
not carried out.
In the unlikely event that a span calibration is required, use a cylinder of the target gas, of approximately
50 %FSD, with an accuracy of at least ± 2 %.
1. Inspect the gassing pipes to the RGC. Ensure that the exhaust is clear and vents well away from the Note: Searchpoint Optima Plus will accept a span calibration gas concentration of between 30 %FSD and
Searchpoint Optima Plus, and does not cause a hazard. (60&?%% ! + ! !
3. Select Calibrate then Bump Test.
4. Select Start Bump Test and press Enter.
~ " 'OK. The 4-20 mA output is now inhibited. Caution: Gas readings will be generated during this procedure. The 4-20 mA output will be inhibited

! ~> > >3>?}
V> ' ` >% % # (%#! #
7. Check that the Searchpoint Optima Plus responds to the test gas. The live gas concentration is shown
on the screen. When ready to continue press OK. V V !} '
= }\]& OK to release the
4-20 mA output.
63 64
2108M0550 2108M0550

Standard Weather Protection from the Searchpoint Optima Plus.
2. Fit a Calibration Cap to the Searchpoint Optima Plus. Ensure it is pushed on fully. If the unit is signalling Fault or Warning on the 4-20 mA output, the problem should be investigated and
3. Select Device Setup. remedied as soon as possible. Some types of faults and warnings will latch the 4-20 mA output and need to
be cleared by a Reset.
6. The display shows a warning message, press OK.
2. Select Unit Status
7. Ensure that there is zero gas present in the vicinity of the Searchpoint Optima Plus. If necessary, apply
V V~ 3. Select Active Faults or Active Warnings to check for any current faults or warnings.
= B *OK to initiate the Zero Calibration and then wait 4. Select View, then First, Next or Previous to display the fault or warning.
for approximately 15 s. The 4-20 mA output will be inhibited automatically at this time.
9. The display shows a message that the Zero Calibration was successful and offers to exit without a Note: First displays the fault or warning that occurred earliest in time.
Span Calibration. Select No and press Enter.
10. Enter the concentration of the span calibration gas and press Enter. 5. Select Back then Event History to investigate a series of events in more detail.
VV! * V V~ B * 6. Select Filter, then Warnings or Faults to display the events of interest.
?>3>`
7. Select View, then Latest Log, Older Log or Newer Log to navigate through the table of reported
12. Press OK to initiate the Span Calibration and then wait for approximately 15 s. events.
13. The display shows a message that the Span Calibration was successful. Remove the Calibration = Back to return to the Unit Status menu.
& ?>`
9. Use the Problem Solving section of this manual (Chapter 14) to rectify the issue.
V<# <3:> !
10. Press Back to return to the Device Setup menu.
11. Select Test.
12. Select Device Reset.
V\ B
13. Press OK to initiate a Device Reset, which will clear any latched faults or warnings.
13.8 Store Calibration Information +! " !% " %# (6 ! # " !+! "
the power.
' * * & * ;
called Calibration Info. For example, the date of the last bump test could be recorded. V<" OK.
1. Select Device Setup. 16. Return to the Welcome screen.
3. Select Calibration Info.
4. Enter required information up to 32 characters and press Enter.
13.9 Investigation of Faults or Warnings
65 66
2108M0550 2108M0550
14. Problem Solving 14. Problem Solving

The Troubleshooting section explains how to deal with problems that may be encountered when using
Unit does not respond as expected Zero offset 1. Re-zero Searchpoint Optima Plus before repeating
to test gas the test (see Maintenance, Bump Test).
The Warnings and Faults section explains the meaning of diagnostic messages and the best course of
action to deal with the problem. Dirty optics 1. Check that the optics are clean and dry. If necessary
clean optics and carry out a soft reset
Some types of faults and warnings will latch the 4-20 mA output and need to be cleared by a Reset.
(see Maintenance, Inspection).
High or low atmospheric pressure 1. Searchpoint Optima Plus does not compensate for
+! " !% " %# (6 ! # " !+! "%
the effects of atmospheric pressure, which can change
power.
= Q >[
Incorrect test gas 1. Check which gas and measuring range the
Searchpoint Optima Plus is calibrated for.
2. Check that the correct test gas and concentration
"%&'( % "%->® communications. See Clear Faults or Warnings.
with an appropriate tolerance are being used.
3. Check that the gas cylinder is not empty.
Note: Searchpoint Optima Plus continues to function as a gas detector while indicating Warning, although 4. Check that any gas tubing or inlet pipes are not
aspects of its performance may be reduced. broken or blocked.
\[ ,
times are being used (see Maintenance, Bump Test).
* @ ! '
back page. Unit is in HART® multi-drop mode 1. A unit which is set to HART® multi-drop mode will
output a constant 4 mA.
Unit requires calibration 1. If all of the above checks have been done without
14.1 Troubleshooting correcting the problem, carry out a full calibration.
Output appears to be drifting Correct response to low level gas 1. Check the gas concentration where the Searchpoint
Fault / Problem Possible Cause Remedial Action concentration Optima Plus is installed using a sensitive portable gas
detector.
No analogue output Electrical installation problem 1. Check that the +24 V supply is
reaching the unit. Voltage at the unit should be Build-up of contamination on 1. Clean the Searchpoint Optima Plus and carry out a
between +18 V and +32 V. optics, e.g. oil mist, exhaust Reset (see Maintenance, Inspection).
2. Check cables and connections to the unit, especially fumes, solvents etc. 2. If possible, identify and minimise potential sources
the 4-20 mA loop connections of contamination. Contamination can be carried by
Output is < 1 mA or 1 mA Unit is in Fault condition 1. Connect the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator to the unit steam.
or use the HART® Output appears to be unstable Electrical interference being ![ [
communications to ascertain the reason for the Fault induced on 4-20 mA cabling earthed correctly (see Electrical Installation, Earth
report (see Maintenance). Regimes).
2. Diagnose the problem using the table of Warning 2. Look for noise on the signal using an oscilloscope.
and Fault messages below. This may give some insight into the potential source.
Output is 2 ± 0.2 mA (or other Unit is in Inhibit 1. The Inhibit mode has no time out. A procedure may ][^ ' _
@ , > have been aborted while the unit was in Inhibit. signal processing at the control card.
2. Connect to the HART® communications and select Poor contacts 1. Check the terminal connections in the junction box.
+% &" " # then End Inhibit 2. If necessary tighten the connectors.
or 3. Excessive vibration can loosen connections. If
Connect the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator and select possible identify and minimise potential sources of
Calibrate then Normal 4-20. vibration.
Output is 3 ± 0.2 mA (or other Unit is indicating a Warning 1. Connect the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator to the unit
K > Note: Unit will still function or use the HART® communications to ascertain the
as a gas detector reason for the Warning report (see Maintenance).
2. Diagnose the problem using the table of Warning
and Fault messages below.
67 68
2108M0550 2108M0550

Unit fails to respond to SHC1 Incorrect connection (may display 1. Check that the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator is Unit fails to respond to HART® Incorrect connection 1. Check that the HART® handheld device is
Handheld Interrogator Comms Error 100) correctly plugged into the DVC100 or that the SHC handheld device connected properly.
Protection device is connected correctly (see Use of
the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator). @ ` ` ![ ` `
loaded and selected.
Incorrect software 1. Searchpoint Optima Plus only works with SHC1
Handheld Interrogator software version 3v0 and above. HART® 1. Check that the unit has the optional HART®
Check software version. = , >
2. If incorrect, contact Honeywell Analytics for the Battery failed 1. Check the battery in the HART® handheld device.
latest version of SHC1 Handheld Interrogator software. 2. If necessary replace the battery (see manufacturer’s
Incorrect mode (may display 1. Switch on the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator and instructions)
Comms Error 99) check the display. It should show Optima+ (not Optima Unit is in FAULT condition and the 1. HART® communications will not function when the
or Excel). output is less than 1 mA output current is less than 1 mA.
2. If incorrect, change the operating mode to Optima+ {[ !" ^
(see Use of the SHC1 Handheld Interrogator). = _ "$#® Operation
during Fault)
Battery failed 1. Check the battery in the SHC1 Handheld
Note: It may be necessary to re-cycle the
Interrogator.
power to the unit, and change the setting
2. If necessary, replace the battery (see Use of the
during the 60 s warm up period while the unit
SHC1 Handheld Interrogator).
is in Inhibit.
Interference from HART® The HART® communication takes precedence over the HART® handheld device is polling 1. HART® hosts typically poll Device Address, Device
communication RS485 communication used by the SHC1 Handheld for a value that is not set # _# @` ` @`
Interrogator. If the Searchpoint Optima Plus is being device.
polled simultaneously by a HART® host, temporary 2. Change the setting to use Device Address (this is
communication errors may be experienced. always set in the unit).
Unit fails to respond to HART® HART® 1. Check that the unit has the optional HART® 4-20 mA Loop Calibration was There is a timeout of 10 minutes 1. To work around the timeout delay, select mA Loop
communications = , > aborted, now stuck in a timeout before the calibration can be Test from the Test menu.
(HART® units) re-started 2. Set the 4-20 mA to 4 mA.
@ ` ` ![ ` `
3. Select End.
loaded and selected.
4. The mA Loop Calibration can now be re-started.
Problem with receiving the 1. Check cables and connections to the unit, especially
4 – 20 mA signal the 4-20 mA loop connections. Password for Level 1 access has Some handheld devices hold a 1. Re-start the handheld device.
2. Check the 4 – 20 mA loop for noise been lost (HART® units) default password, which could be 2. From the Device Setup menu, select User Login and
set in error Level 1.
Unit is in FAULT condition and the 1. HART® communications will not function when the 3. At the password entry screen, do not type anything,
output is less than 1 mA output current is less than 1 mA. and press Enter immediately (use the default password
{[ !" ^ from the handheld device).
= _ "$#® Operation [@ _
during Fault) Password to set the password to a known value.
Note: It may be necessary to re-cycle the 5. If the above was not successful, please contact
power to the unit, and change the setting Honeywell Analytics.
during the 60 s warm up period while the unit
is in Inhibit.
HART® host is polling for a value 1. HART® hosts typically poll Device Address, Device
that is not set # _# @` ` @`
device.
2. Change the setting to use Device Address (this is
always set in the unit).
69 70
2108M0550 2108M0550

14.2 WARNING and FAULT messages W / F – Obscured Warning / Fault Contamination in the optical 1. Remove the weather protection and dust
Optics (error 8) Obscured optics path. barrier. Replace the dust barrier if required.
2. Clean optics and carry out a Soft Reset (see
&: ® Meaning Solution Maintenance, Inspection).
W – Temp Lim Warning Q 1. Protect the unit from heat / cold.
Exceeded (error 0) Temperature Limit temperature limits nearly 2. Re-locate the unit. F – Signal Quality Fault Optical signal is low, noisy or 1. Remove the weather protection and dust
Exceeded exceeded. 3. As an option consider installing the unit in a (error 16) Poor signal quality unstable barrier. Replace the dust barrier if required.
sampling system. 2. Clean optics and carry out a Soft Reset (see
Maintenance, Inspection).
F – Temp Lim Fault Q ![$ [
W / F– Lamp Output Warning / Fault Lamp signal is low. 1. Clean optics and carry out a Soft Reset (see
Exceeded (error 0) Temperature Limit temperature limits exceeded. warranty are invalidated.
(error 11) Lamp output Maintenance, Inspection).
Exceeded
2. If the Fault / Warning does not clear, return unit
W / F – Bad 24V Warning / Fault 24 V supply is outside of 1. Ensure that the supply voltage at the unit is for repair.
Supply (error 4) Bad 24V Supply operating limits. between 18 V and 32 V.
2. Re-cycle the power or carry out a Reset to W / F – Internal Failure Warning / Fault Internal hardware fault 1. Cycle the power or carry out a Reset to restart
clear the latch. See Maintenance, View and Clear (error 22) Hardware failure the unit. See Maintenance, View and Clear Faults
Faults or Warnings Note: this error will Note: this error or Warnings
`>'% `>' 2. If the fault persists return the unit for repair.
mA output the 4-20 mA
W – Bad 4-20mA Loop Warning Error of greater than ±0.5 mA 1. If this Warning occurred while connecting or output
(error 5) Bad 4-20mA loop in analogue output disconnecting a multimeter, re-cycle the power or
Note: this error will Note: this error carry out a Reset to clear the latch. See F - Hardware Fault Fault The latched faults or 1. This error may occur following Self Test.
`>'% `>' Maintenance, View and Clear Faults or Warnings (error 13) Hardware Fault , 2. Check for any active Faults or Warnings.
mA output the 4-20 mA 2. Check the 4-20 mA loop connections and 3. If none present, cycle the power or carry out a
output cabling Reset to restart the unit. See Maintenance, View
3. Check that the loop resistance is less than and Clear Faults or Warnings.
600 :. In current source mode, for supply [$ Q # ^
voltages of 18 to 20 Vdc the maximum loop cleared.
resistance is 500 :. 5. If the Fault does not clear, return unit for repair.
F – Bad 4-20mA Loop Fault The unit cannot generate 1. Check the 4-20 mA loop connections and
(error 5) Bad 4-20mA loop the correct current output to cabling 14.3 Further Assistance
Note: this error will Note: this error signal a gas reading (the unit 2. Check that the loop resistance is less than
`>'% `>' reverts to Fault rather than 600 :. In current source mode, for supply
* '@ !
mA output the 4-20 mA under-reading) voltages of 18 to 20 Vdc the maximum loop
details on the back page of this manual.
output resistance is 500 :.
3. Re-cycle the power or carry out a Reset to
clear the latch. See Maintenance, View and Clear +3
Faults or Warnings
W / F – Neg Gas Warning / Fault Negative offset on the gas 1. Check that the optics are clean and dry. If the • A description of the problem, including the steps taken to try to resolve it
Reading (error 6) Negative gas reading. unit is in an environment of very damp / • The serial number of the Searchpoint Optima Plus
reading condensing conditions, consider additional
protection.
2. Check for the presence of interferent gases } @!\"®, please also locate the following information by selecting
e.g. acetylene or ammonia. +3
3. Check for Temp Lim Exceeded warnings or
faults.
? *`
4. Clean optics and ensure they are dry. Re-zero
the unit provided the atmosphere is gas-free (see } ? * @!\"®`
Maintenance, Inspection). • Software rev (Searchpoint Optima Plus software revision number)
@ ? *`
71 72
2108M0550 2108M0550
ZY % ZY %

ZYZ % Output Signals
Measuring Range 4-20 mA (0-100 %FSD), auto sensing sink or source
Environmental Inhibit 1 to 3 mA (Default 2 mA)
} # $ ~ - 40 °C to + 65 °C Warning 0 to 6 mA (Default 3 mA*)
Pressure Range 80 to 120 kPa (non-compensated) Fault < 1 mA
Operating Humidity 0 to 99 %RH (non-condensing) Overrange 20 to 21.6 mA (Default 21 mA)
Storage Conditions for Searchpoint Optima Plus - 40 °C to + 65 °C, 80 to 120 kPa, 0 to 99 %RH (non-condensing) *Note: For ATEX compliance the Warning value should not be set > 3 and < 5 mA.
and accessories
Digital Outputs HART® over 4-20 mA
Ingress Protection IP 66 / 67 Proprietary RS485 communications
~#$&=$ >" # # $ \ Dimensions
Performance Length 165 mm
Repeatability < ± 2 %FSD at 50 %FSD Diameter 73 mm
Linearity < ± 5 %FSD Weight 1.6 kg
Accuracy Baseline < ± 1 %FSD (Ethylene < ± 2 %FSD) Material 316 stainless steel
50 %FSD < ± 2 %FSD (Ethylene < ± 3 %FSD)
Compliance to Standards
Baseline Methane 100 %LEL Range: d ± 2 %FSD
# Q ,'= Ethylene 100 %LEL Range: d ± 4 %FSD Please refer to the EC Declaration of Conformity
EN 60079-29-1) &:
50 %FSD Methane 100 %LEL Range: d ± 4 %FSD
Ethylene 100 %LEL Range: d ± 5 %FSD Operating Temperature Range 0 °C to +40 °C
Baseline d ± 2 %FSD # $ -40 °C to +40 °C
Drift Over Temperature Range (-40 °C to 65 °C) 50 %FSD Methane 100 %LEL Range: d ± 0.131 %FSD per °C Storage Temperature Range -10 °C to +40 °C
Ethylene 100 %LEL Range: d ± 0.078 %FSD per °C
Operating and Storage Humidity 0 to 99% RH
1 % of reading per kPa Dimensions 190 mm x 80 mm x 40 mm (L x W x D)
Response Time Weight 0.5 kg
Complies with EN60079-29-1 (ATEX Performance Standard) Material 316 stainless steel
T50 < 3 seconds, T90 < 4 seconds (for methane, no accessories)
Response Time #\ _#! = _ _
with Standard Weather Protection and Dust Filter) 15.2 Available Gas Calibrations
Note: For gas calibrations other than the standard hydrocarbon gases (methane, ethane, propane, butane),
% +# % ! Caution: For Special Gas Tables the ATEX Performance Approval only applies when Searchpoint Optima Plus is
Operation calibrated using the target gas or vapour.
Power Supply 18 to 32 Vdc (24 Vdc nominal)

15.2.1 Hydrocarbon version of Searchpoint Optima Plus
Power Consumption <5W
Maximum 4-20 mA Loop Resistance 600 : Calibrated against EN50054 LEL levels
Minimum 4-20 mA Loop Resistance to main- 230 : Table Number Table Name CAS Number Full Scale LEL (%V/V) ATEX Performance
tain HART® communications Approved
Retention of battery backed up data* 3 years unpowered Standard Gases
4-20 mA Output Refresh Rate 250 ms D3001 Methane 74-82-8 100%LEL 5 Y
! ! +" (<V !%Y ! D3002 Ethane 74-84-0 100%LEL 3
500 :.
* Searchpoint Optima Plus contains a backup battery which maintains the real time clock and event logs D3004 Propane 74-98-6 100%LEL 2 Y
D3005 Butane 106-97-8 100%LEL 1.5 Y
73 74
2108M0550 2108M0550
ZY % ZY %

Special Gases D3174 Propene 115-07-1 100%LEL 2 Y
D3006 Propene 115-07-1 100%LEL 2
Calibrated against EN61779 LEL levels
D3012 Acetone 67-64-1 100%LEL 2.15
D3018 Butan-1-ol 71-36-3 100%LEL 1.4 Table Number Table Name CAS Number Full Scale LEL (%V/V) ATEX Performance
Approved
D3020 Butyl acetate 123-86-4 100%LEL 1.2
Standard Gases
D3022 Butanone 78-93-3 100%LEL 1.8 D3171 Ethane 74-84-0 100%LEL 2.5
D3024 Cyclohexane 110-82-7 100%LEL 1.2 Special Gases
D3026 Cyclohexanone 108-94-1 100%LEL 1.3 D3019 Butan-1-ol 71-36-3 100%LEL 1.7 Y
D3028 Ethanol 64-17-5 100%LEL 3.3 D3023 Butanone 78-93-3 100%LEL 1.8 Y
D3030 Ethyl acetate 141-78-6 100%LEL 2.1 D3025 Cyclohexane 110-82-7 100%LEL 1.2
D3027 Cyclohexanone 108-94-1 100%LEL 1 Y
D3032 Heptane 142-82-5 100%LEL 1.1
D3031 Ethyl acetate 141-78-6 100%LEL 2.2 Y
D3034 Hexane 110-54-3 100%LEL 1.2
D3033 Heptane 142-82-5 100%LEL 1.1 Y
D3040 Methanol 67-56-1 100%LEL 5.5
D3039 Propyl acetate 109-60-4 100%LEL 1.7
D3042 Toluene 108-88-3 100%LEL 1.2 D3041 Methanol 67-56-1 100%LEL 5.5 Y
D3044 o-Xylene 95-47-6 100%LEL 1 D3043 Toluene 108-88-3 100%LEL 1.1 Y
D3048 Diethyl ether 60-29-7 100%LEL 1.7 D3049 Diethyl ether 60-29-7 100%LEL 1.7
D3054 p-Xylene 106-42-3 100%LEL 1 D3055 p-Xylene 106-42-3 100%LEL 1 Y
D3056 Pentane 109-66-0 100%LEL 1.4 D3056 Pentane 109-66-0 100%LEL 1.4
D3059 Dimethyl ether 115-10-6 100%LEL 3 D3078 i-Propyl Acetate 108-21-4 100%LEL 1.8
D3064 N,N-Dimethyl 68-12-2 100%LEL 2.2 D3085 Propan-1-ol 71-23-8 100%LEL 2.2
formamide(DMF)
D3073 Propane 74-98-6 100%LEL 2.0 Y Additional ranges offered
Table Number Table Name CAS Number Full Scale LEL (%V/V) ATEX Performance
Calibrated against EN60079-20-1:2010 LEL levels Approved
Table Number Table Name CAS Number Full Scale LEL (%V/V) ATEX Performance Special Gases
Approved D3017 Hexamethyldisilox- 107-46-0 100%LEL 1.3
Standard Gases ane (HMDS)
D3170 Methane 74-82-8 100%LEL 4.4 Y D3036 Propan-2-ol 67-63-0 100%LEL 2
D3172 Propane 74-98-6 100%LEL 1.7 Y D3038 Propyl acetate 109-60-4 100%LEL 1.8
D3173 Butane 106-97-8 100%LEL 1.4 Y D3047 Benzin60/95 Mixture 100%LEL 1 Y
Special Gases D3050 Methane V/V 74-82-8 100%V/V NA
D3013 Acetone 67-64-1 100%LEL 2.5 Y D3058 AVTUR JP8 Mixture 100%LEL 0.8
D3021 Butyl acetate 123-86-4 100%LEL 1.3 Y D3060 Decamethyltetrasi- 141-62-8 100%LEL 0.9
loxane (DCMTS)
D3029 Ethanol 64-17-5 100%LEL 3.1 Y
D3061 Octane 111-65-9 100%LEL 1
D3035 Hexane 110-54-3 100%LEL 1 Y
D3063 Octamethyltrisilox- 107-51-7 100%LEL 0.9
D3037 Propan-2-ol 67-63-0 100%LEL 2 Y
ane (OMTS)
D3045 o-Xylene 95-47-6 100%LEL 1 Y
D3067 JP1 Mixture 100%LEL 0.6
D3062 Octane 111-65-9 100%LEL 0.8
D3068 Methyl isobutyl 108-10-1 100%LEL 1.4
D3070 Isobutane 75-28-5 100%LEL 1.3 Ketone (MIBK)
D3084 Chloroethane 75-00-3 100%LEL 3.6 D3069 Isobutane 75-28-5 100%LEL 1.8
D3090 1,2-Dichloroethane 107-06-2 100%LEL 6.2 Y D3077 1-Pentene 109-67-1 100%LEL 1.4
D3098 Dimethyl ether 115-10-6 100%LEL 2.7 Y D3081 1-Octene 111-66-0 100%LEL 0.7
75 76
2108M0550 2108M0550
ZY % ZY %

Calibrated against EN60079-20-1:2010 LEL levels
D3083 1-Hexene 592-41-6 100%LEL 1.2
D3087 Methane 100k 74-82-8 100k ppm NA Table Number Table Name CAS Number Full Scale LEL (%V/V) ATEX Performance
Approved
D3088 Ethylene 100k 74-85-1 100k ppm NA
D3089 Propane 100k 74-98-6 100k ppm NA Standard Gases
D3092 Propene 50k 115-07-1 50k ppm NA D3240 Ethylene 74-85-1 100%LEL 2.3 Y
D3093 1-Methoxy-2- 107-98-2 100%LEL 1.8 Y Special Gases
Propanol D3227 Benzene 71-43-2 100%LEL 1.2
D3094 3-Ethoxy-1- 111-35-3 100%LEL 1.3 D3229 Buta-1,3-diene 106-99-0 100%LEL 1.4
Propanol
D3095 Benzin 80/110 Mixture 100%LEL 0.9 Y Calibrated against EN61779 LEL levels
D3096 Propane 10k 74-98-6 10k ppm NA Y Table Number Table Name CAS Number Full Scale LEL (%V/V) ATEX Performance
D3097 Propane 5k 74-98-6 5k ppm NA Y Approved
D3100 Propane 400k 74-98-6 400k ppm NA Standard Gases
D3101 Propylene Glycol 108-65-6 100%LEL 1.3 D3228 Styrene 100-42-5 100%LEL 1.1
Methyl Ether
Note: For other gases, solvents and vapours, contact Honeywell Analytics.
Acetate (PGMEA)
>%!% !`@` % # !! ! %!"
D3102 Propane 600k 74-98-6 600k ppm NA
D3105 Propane 20k 74-98-6 20k ppm NA
15.3 Cross Interference to Other Gases and Vapours
D3107 Butane 18k 106-97-8 18k ppm NA
D3108 Methy isoamyl 110-12-3 100%LEL 1.3 Searchpoint Optima Plus is supplied pre-calibrated and ready for installation. The signal output
Ketone (MIAK) ' * *
housing.
D3111 1-Ethoxy-2- 1569-02-4 100%LEL 1.3 Y
Propanol Note: The following information is only applicable when detecting Hydrocarbons.
D3150 Band A n/a 100%LEL NA
A Searchpoint Optima Plus calibrated for a particular hydrocarbon will have a response to most other
D3151 Band B n/a 100%LEL NA *"3 *;
D3152 Band C n/a 100%LEL NA
D3153 Band D n/a 100%LEL NA "; ~>L#L '
D3175 Propane 5k 74-98-6 5k ppm NA Y * V>>L#L?L#L¤~` +3
Methane 2.5 %v/v

15.2.2 Ethylene version of Searchpoint Optima Plus
Propane 0.3 %v/v
Calibrated against EN50054 LEL levels Butane 0.2 %v/v
Table Number Table Name CAS Number Full Scale LEL (%V/V) ATEX Performance Hexane 0.3 %v/v
Approved Heptane 0.3 %v/v
Standard Gases
Propylene 0.8 %v/v
D3225 Ethylene 74-85-1 100%LEL 2.7 Y
" X +3
Special Gases
D3227 Benzene 71-43-2 100%LEL 1.2 • Ammonia
D3228 Styrene 100-42-5 100%LEL 1.1 • Acetylene
• Propyne (Methyl Acetylene)
D3229 Buta-1,3-diene 106-99-0 100%LEL 1.4
As a guide, the approximate concentrations that will create a Fault condition in a Searchpoint Optima Plus
* +3
Ammonia ~ 5500 ppm
Acetylene ~ 1000 ppm
Propyne (Methyl Acetylene) ~ 1000 ppm
77 78
2108M0550 2108M0550
16. Ordering Information 16. Ordering Information

Part Number Description Marine Approved
Searchpoint Optima Plus: (add H to part number for HART® option, e.g. 2108N4000H, add N to part number for non-HART® 2108N4400 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade
option, e.g. 2108N4000N)
2108N4401 Ethylene calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade
ATEX/IECEx
2108N4410 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade, including remote
2108N4000 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade gassing cell
2108N4001 Ethylene calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade 2108N4411 Ethylene calibration with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade, including remote
gassing cell
2108N4010 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade including remote
gassing cell 2108N5400 ' , , _ '
2108N4011 Ethylene calibration with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade including remote 2108N5401 ' , _ '
gassing cell
2108N5410 Hydrocarbon calibration, for use in remote sampling systems for gas ranges 0–100 %v/v
2108N5000 ' , , _ ' __ _ _

2108N5001 ' , _ '
= & $ , > ? @ , H %
__ _ _ 2108N4800 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade

2108N4801 Ethylene calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade
UL/Inmetro
2108N4100 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade gassing cell
2108N4101 Ethylene calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade 2108N4811 Ethylene calibration with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade including remote
gassing cell
gassing cell 2108N5800 ' , , _ '
2108N4111 Ethylene calibration with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade including remote 2108N5801 ' , _ '
gassing cell
& J K ,# ® " Q ,# =® option)
2108N5100 ' , , _ ' _
2108B2001 Hydrocarbon Optima Plus, ATEX/IECEx
2108N5101 ' , _ ' _
2108B2003 Ethylene Optima Plus, ATEX/IECEx
2108B2101 Hydrocarbon Optima Plus, UL /Inmetro
__ _ _
2108B2103 Ethylene Optima Plus, UL /Inmetro
FM/CSA 2108B2201 Hydrocarbon Optima Plus, FM/CSA
2108N4200 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade 2108B2031 Hydrocarbon Searchpoint Optima Plus, CCCF (Chinese)
2108N4210 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade including remote 2108B2033 Ethylene Searchpoint Optima Plus, CCCF (Chinese)
gassing cell 2108B2051 Hydrocarbon Optima Plus, Marine Approved
2108N5200 ' , , _ ' _ 2108B2053 Ethylene Optima Plus, Marine Approved
CCCF (Chinese) 2108B2041 Hydrocarbon Optima Plus XTC, Customs Union and Russian Pattern Approval
2108N4600 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade 2108B2043 Ethylene Optima Plus XTC, Customs Union and Russian Pattern Approval
2108N4601 Ethylene calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade Weather Protection Accessories
2108N4610 Hydrocarbon calibration, with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade, including remote 2108B0276 Standard Weather Protection
gassing cell
2108D0275 Deluge / Heat Shade
2108N4611 Ethylene calibration with dust barrier, weather housing, deluge/heat shade, including remote
gassing cell 2108B0280 Q ="#>
2108N5600 ' , , _ ' 2108B0259 Dust Barrier
2108N5601 ' , _ '
79 80
2108M0550 2108M0550
16. Ordering Information 17. Warranty Summary

@ ! X
Gassing Accessories
will repair or (at its option) replace any instruments which are or may become defective under proper use
2108D0258 Gassing Cover @ !
2108B0272 Calibration Cap
This warranty does not cover consumable items, normal wear and tear or damage caused by accident,
2108B0282 Flow Housing abuse, improper installation, poisons, contaminants or abnormal operating conditions. Under no
Mounting Accessories @ ! * ; * *
the product.
04200-A-1040 Junction Box Adaptor Plate
2308B0930 "}$ " ! @ ! B *
as soon as reasonably possible after a defect is discovered. In the event of a warranty claim please contact
2308B0923 HALO Pipe Mounting Bracket Kit @ !
2308B0934 HALO Sunshade Kit
" ' @ ! ]
2104B0349 European Duct Mounting Kit – Metric Threads
L B *
04200-A-1015 Honeywell Analytics Junction Box Duct Mounting Kit
2442-0016 US Duct Mounting Kit – NPT Threads
Termination Units
2308B0900 HALO junction box with HART® connection
2308B0903 HALO junction box
2104B6211 DVC100(I) MK2 Termination Unit ATEX / IECEx
2104B6212 DVC100(M) MK2 Termination Unit ATEX / IECEx with MODBUS capability
00780-A-0100 # `!!\\K ' !&{\]&{ ="# >
2441-0022 &= >
Commissioning and Maintenance Accessories
04230-A-1001 Q! @ "#@& = >} _}
Excel
2104B2351 Q! @ = >} _} &
2104B2354 Q! @ Q" =! >} _} &
04230-A-1025 SHC Protection Device module and lead
2104B6250 SHC Calibrator Connector System 10m
2108B1455 SHC1 Handheld Interrogator EEPROM upgrade (4V0)
TBA Spare set of O-rings for Flow Housing
Y K Z[
2108M0550 Searchpoint Optima Plus Operating Instructions (English)
Additional copies of this manual, in English and various other languages, may be downloaded from our
website. Navigate to www.honeywellanalytics.com and select Technical Services & Support, then Technical
L *
81 82
2108M0550 2108M0550
Z & Z &

18.1 EC Declaration of Conformity 18.2.4 CSA
A full EC declaration of conformity is available on the CD accompanying the product. This document lists & *+ VVkV<
the European Standards with which the Searchpoint Optima Plus complies. &' V']|'& " *3<>&~&
;¤: ;¤=B
Z< ] &
18.2.5 FM
18.2.1 ATEX
& *+ >V~V~
& K *+ | V!"#$>:k$ Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
II 2 GD Ex d op is IIC Gb Ex tb IIIC Db
"k&?" *3<>&~&`
"=&?" *3<>&~~&` Z< #/7 z) =z> & Q / @ =7>

;¤: ;¤=B & *+
V#; &"~"<]*$
Manufacturer's Explosion Protection ?" *3>&~&`
Trademark & Product Mark & Equipment Certified Ambient
Address Name Group Category Certification Code Temperature Range
Z<[ \ =>
& K *+ &#>VV~~

#; &"<"~
ATEX Symbol 18.2.8 IECEx

Certification Warning
Serial Number & MOD State & K *+ |!V>>k$
Number
Year of Ident Number of
Manufacture ATEX Notified Body
18.3 Performance Approvals

18.2.2 UL
18.3.1 ATEX
} K *+ #kV><< V
Class I, Groups B, C and D & K *+ |>!"#$]>V$
?! *3<>&~&`
;¤: ;¤=B
Special conditions for safe use
Z<; _ =(> " * +
& K *+ "¦V:V>V$ #&3 ; | V!"#$>:k$
|\3#; &"~?3<>&d Ta d~~&` • The parameter “warning” shall not be set to values between 3 mA and 5 mA
|\3#; &"<?3<>&d Ta d~&` • Searchpoint Optima Plus shall be calibrated using the target gas or vapour
;¤: "J *3 * #&3 ;
;¤=B "@!\"3 #&3 ;
' '
*;@!L
83 84
2108M0550 2108M0550
Z & Z &

18.3.2 FM 18.4 Marine Approvals
& *+>V~V~ Searchpoint Optima Plus complies with the EC Marine Equipment Directive (MED).
This Approval does not include or imply Approval of apparatus to which the subject instrumentation may
be connected. In order to maintain an FM Approved system, the apparatus to which this instrument is
connected must also be Approved by FM Approvals.
! !'
instrument while operating at the maximum transaction rate do not adversely affect the gas detection
operation and functions of the instrument. This Approval, however, does not include or imply Approval
of the communications protocol or functions provided by the software of this instrument or of the >>:$$
communications apparatus or software connected to this instrument.
Note: XX represents the year of manufacture
Z;; 7 , & =_ > / @
" !+ |
" + American Bureau of Shipping
Det Norsk Veritas
L \
as Name Measuring Range (%LEL) Measuring Range (expressed in %v/v)
Methane 0 to 100 0 to 2.2 ZY %]Z ] ] &
Ethane 0 to 100 0 to 1.25
Propane 0 to 100 0 to 0.85 18.5.1 ATEX
Butane 0 to 100 0 to 0.7
Acetone 0 to 100 0 to 1,25 & K *+ | >!"#$>>
II 2 G Ex ia IIC T4 Gb
Cyclohexane 0 to 100 0 to 0,6
?" *3<>&<>&`
Ethanol 0 to 100 0 to 1,55
MANUFACTURER'S TRADEMARK
Ethyl acetate 0 to 100 0 to 1,1
PRODUCT NAME
Heptane 0 to 100 0 to 0,55
Hexane 0 to 100 0 to 0,5 CERTIFICATION CODES
Propan-2-ol 0 to 100 0 to 1 EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES MARK
CERTIFIED AMBIENT
Methanol 0 to 100 0 to 2,75 AND ATEX CATEGORY CODES
TEMPERATURE
Toluene 0 to 100 0 to 0,55
o-Xylene 0 to 100 0 to 0,5 CERTIFICATE NO.
CE MARK AND IDENTIFICATION
p-Xylene 0 to 100 0 to 0,55 MARK OF ATEX NOTIFIED BODY
Pentanes 0 to 100 0 to 0,7
MOD STATE
Octane 0 to 100 0 to 0,4 YEAR OF MANUFACTURE
Nonane 0 to 100 0 to 0,35 AND SERIAL NO.
Isobutane 0 to 100 0 to 0,65
Methane 0 to 100 0 to 100
Ethylene 0 to 100 0 to 2,3
Propylene 0 to 100 0 to 2,00
Benzene 0 to 100 0 to 0,6
Sterol 0 to 100 0 to 0,55 18.5.2 IECEx
Ethylene oxide 0 to 100 0 to 1,30
& K *+|!>k>V:>
J $"&
85 86
2108M0550 2108M0550
19. Appendix 1 – 19. Appendix 1 –

SHC1 Additional Functions SHC1 Additional Functions
>% ! % %%&'( !% 1 ] %5 20. Press Enter.
5 &'%< %&'( % " :V\ B
& % } , 23. Press Escape to return to the main menu.
value is correct.
19.2 Self Test

19.1 Changing the Target Gas
If there are any latched faults or warnings set in the unit, Self Test will report the generic error code
Searchpoint Optima Plus is supplied with look-up tables for several different gases. If required, the gas @ }#V & \
table can be changed to a different target gas.
1. Select Diagnose then Soft Reset.
WARNING
If a new gas table is selected, the Searchpoint Optima Plus MUST be re-calibrated using the
target gas.
Searchpoint Optima Plus stores a number of gas tables up to a maximum of 10. These include the Standard
]?J'#''| @ * '# # `
]* ?} *
`
Caution: Searchpoint Optima Plus units contain a gas table called Linear 20R which is a factory
setting. DO NOT select this gas table.
1. Select Gas Tables then Show Library to view the gas tables available for the unit.
2. Press Escape.
3. Select Select Gas.
< *
5. Press Enter.
6. Display will read “Gas Selection OK”
7. Press Enter to release the 4-20mA output
= Escape to return to the main menu.
k V !} '
Standard Weather Protection.
12. Ensure that there is zero gas present in the vicinity of the Searchpoint Optima Plus. If necessary,
V V~
13. Press Enter.
When the process is complete the display will state Zero Calibrated. It will then show options to continue
to a span calibration, or to exit calibration.
14. Press Enter to begin span calibration.

15. Press Enter.
16. Use ▲ and ▼ to set the concentration of the calibration gas. When it is correct, press Enter.
V! V V~ B * ?>3>`
V=#
When the process is complete the display will show Span Calibrated. It will then show an instruction to
remove gas.
Vk\ & * & ?>`#
returned to zero.
87 88
2108M0550 2108M0550

HART® Additional Functions HART® Additional Functions
Note: The instructions that follow assume that a suitable HART® host (handheld or PC) is connected to the 4. Select the required navigation, for example Next Gas and press Enter.
&!% 1 2 %% "" %`(!! " ~ " 'OK.
6. The display will show the message “Checking availability of chosen gas”, press OK.
& % } ,
value is correct. " K 'OK.
= " \<
is found.
20.1 Changing the Target Gas
k " Accept Choose Gas.
Searchpoint Optima Plus is supplied with look-up tables for several different gases. If required, the gas V>@ Accept Selection and press Enter. (Alternatively, to keep the current gas, select
table can be changed to a different target gas. Abort Selection and press Enter).
VV" 'OK.
WARNING V:" K 'OK.
If a new gas table is selected, the Searchpoint Optima Plus MUST be re-calibrated using 13. Press Back twice to return to the Device Setup menu.
the target gas.
The Searchpoint Optima Plus must now be calibrated using the new target gas. Use a cylinder of the target
gas, of approximately 50 %FSD, with an accuracy of at least ± 2 %.
2. Select 8 then Gas Selection.
3. Select Choose Gas.
Searchpoint Optima Plus stores a number of gas tables up to a maximum of 10. These include the Standard
Caution: Gas readings will be generated during this procedure. The 4-20 mA output will be inhibited
]?J'#''| @ * '# # `

]* ?} *
`
>% % # (%#! #
Caution: Searchpoint Optima Plus units contain a gas table called Linear 20R which is a factory
setting. DO NOT select this gas table. Note: The calibration routine will timeout after 2 minutes of inactivity.
" * } ]'L]'K;] ]" V< V !} '
'; **+3 Standard Weather Protection from the Searchpoint Optima Plus.
Location Z # Ethylene Units 16. Select Calibrate
1 Methane Ethylene
V=" ' OK.
2 Ethane Special Gases
19. Ensure that there is zero gas present in the vicinity of the Searchpoint Optima Plus. If necessary, apply
3 Propane Special Gases V V~
4 Butane Special Gases 20. When the gas reading on the display is stable press OK to initiate the Zero Calibration and then wait
for approximately 15 s. The 4-20 mA output will be inhibited automatically at this time.
5 Special Gases Special Gases
21. The display shows a message that the Zero Calibration was successful and offers to exit without a
6 Special Gases Special Gases Span Calibration. Select No and press Enter.
7 Special Gases Special Gases 22. Enter the concentration of the span calibration gas and press Enter.
8 Special Gases Special Gases :! * V V~ B *
?>3>`'OK to initiate the Span Calibration and then wait for approximately 15 s.
9 Special Gases Special Gases
24. The display shows a message that the Span Calibration was successful. Remove the Calibration Cap
10 Linear 20R (DO NOT USE) Linear 20R (DO NOT USE) ?>`
25. Ensure that the gas reading has returned to zero. Press OK to release the 4-20 mA output.
}; ' ' } ]
*' ] 26. The display shows a note that the Searchpoint Optima Plus will return to normal operation, press OK.
Note: The order of the gas tables in the Searchpoint Optima Plus is by part number, therefore the standard :=\ B
" + #%
89 90
2108M0550 2108M0550
20. Appendix 2 – 21. Appendix 3 – Special Notes for

HART® Additional Functions Honeywell MC Toolkit Users
20.2 Set HART® Loop Current Mode Read these notes if the Honeywell MC Toolkit is being used to communicate with
33 @!\"® @!\"®J 3
Please be aware that in some cases the MC Toolkit will not display messages as detailed in these
instructions.
WARNING
@!\"®J 3J @!\"® Multi-Drop
J L3: @!\"® Multi-Drop Mode is outside the scope *+3
of any performance approvals.
V V:'& *<3:> !L J&"X
_+ & is being collected between steps 6 and 7, and between steps 9 and 10.
2. In section 13.6 “Re-zero Searchpoint Optima Plus” the MC Toolkit will not display a message that data
Note: When Searchpoint Optima Plus is set in Multi-Drop Mode, the 4-20 mA loop cannot be calibrated and is being collected during step 6.
any functions that force the 4-20 mA output to a set value are unavailable. 3. In section 13.7 “Calibration” the MC Toolkit will not display a message that data is being collected
= V:
2. Select Device Info. The MC Toolkit will not display any punctuation in the software version, e.g. version 5.2 will be displayed as
version 52.
3. Select Loop Current Mode.
4. Select the required option and press Enter.
6. The display shows a warning message. Press OK.
7. The communication mode is set and the display shows another warning message. Press OK.
= &X
9. Press Back to return to Device Setup menu.
} J 3J @!\"® * *V
10. Select Assembly Details.

11. Select HART® Address.
V:# @!\"® address and press Enter.
91 92
2108M0550 2108M0550

End Of Life Battery Removal HART® Commands Used
When Searchpoint Optima Plus reaches the end of its life, it should be disposed of in accordance with local 23.1 Universal Commands
regulations.
& *
Searchpoint Optima Plus contains a lithium battery of the type CR2032, which can be located and removed Gas Concentration.
as follows.
Additional comments: -
WARNING • Command #3 returns loop current and PV.
The battery does not need to be replaced during the working life of the unit. Opening the Searchpoint & ©V<+ ; * '
and returns 0
& ©=+\& & }
1. Remove the two main assembly screws (M5) which hold the two sections of the Searchpoint Optima & ©<=+\ !
Plus together.
2. Remove the “back end” section, which includes the potted cables.
23.2 Common-Practice Commands
LX ' *
23.2.1 Supported Commands
" 3 +
Command Number Description

40 Enter/Exit Fixed Current Mode
41 Perform Device Self-Test
42 Perform Master Reset
45 Trim DAC Zero
46 Trim DAC Gain
23.2.2 Burst Mode
Searchpoint Optima Plus does not support Burst Mode.
4. Remove the two screws and remove the printed circuit board. The battery is located on the underside 23.2.3 Catch Device Variable
of the board.
5. Cut the contacts to the printed circuit board to remove the battery. Searchpoint Optima Plus does not support Catch Device Variable.
6. Dispose of the battery in accordance with local regulations.
93 94
2108M0550
23. Appendix 5 –
HART® Commands Used
<;; + %
" 3 +
Command Number Description

128 Read Gas Table Name
129 Read available Gas Table Name
130 Write Gas Table Index
132 Read Event Log history Find out more
133 Read Diagnostics (Warnings or faults) www.honeywellanalytics.com
Contact Honeywell Analytics:

135 Simulate Alarm or Warning or Fault
138 Write Alarm1 threshold Europe, Middle East, Africa
Life Safety Distribution AG
139 Read Alarm1 threshold Javastrasse 2
8604 Hegnau
140 User Authentication
Switzerland
142 Password change Tel: +41 (0)44 943 4300
Fax: +41 (0)44 943 4398
143 Enter/Exit Inhibit mode gasdetection@honeywell.com
146 Bump Test
Customer Service:
147 Read Field Data Tel: 00800 333 222 44 (Freephone number)
Tel: +41 44 943 4380 (Alternative number)
149 Read Real Time Clock Fax: 00800 333 222 55
150 Write Real Time Clock Middle East Tel: +971 4 450 5800 (Fixed Gas Detection)
Middle East Tel: +971 4 450 5852 (Portable Gas Detection)
151 Read HART communication status during device fault India Tel: +91 124 4752700
152 Write HART communication status during device fault Americas
Honeywell Analytics Inc.
153 Read Inhibit current
405 Barclay Blvd.
154 Write Inhibit current Lincolnshire, IL 60069
USA
155 Read Warning current Tel: +1 847 955 8200
156 Write Warning current Toll free: +1 800 538 0363
Fax: +1 847 955 8210
157 Read Over range current detectgas@honeywell.com
158 Write Over range current Asia Pacific
159 Clear latched faults and logged faults (partial or full) Honeywell Analytics Asia Pacific
#701 Kolon Science Valley (1)
160 Read Current operating mode 43 Digital-Ro 34-Gil, Guro-Gu
Seoul 152-729 Please Note:
While every effort has been made to ensure accuracy in this publication,
Korea no responsibility can be accepted for errors or omissions. Data may change,
as well as legislation and you are strongly advised to obtain copies of the most
Tel: +82 (0)2 6909 0300 recently issued regulations, standards and guidelines. This publication is not
intended to form the basis of a contract.
Fax: +82 (0)2 2025 0328
India Tel: +91 124 4752700
analytics.ap@honeywell.com
Technical Services
EMEAI: HAexpert@honeywell.com
US: ha.us.service@honeywell.com
AP: ha.ap.service@honeywell.com ª>~:>V~
@ªJ!K>k>~ª#J#!
V:=V
:V>=J>~~>ª#&!><~<<
www.honeywell.com «:>V~@ !
95

Gas Detector1632073 Install Oper Maint

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gas Detector1632073 Install Oper Maint

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Classification: Confidential

Project Title: Doc Id.: 1632073

CMA CGM 22000 TEU Container Vessel FGSS

Hull No: H3033, H3034, H3035, H3036, H3037 - SJCS

Supplier: Autronica Fire and Security AS

70-AI-0001, 70-AI-0002, 70-AI-0003, 70-AI-0004, 70-AI-0005, 70-AI-0006

01 03.12.2019 Issued after variation order SSV RBA RE

INSTALLATION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Wärtsilä Gas Solutions

Wärtsilä Gas Solutions

PowerLoop Cabling - Guidance Table

Type of shield (Dual) Characteristics Usability for PowerLoop

AutroCom Serial Multi-wired cable Maximum 10m

Power Supply / Cable dimension

Autronica Fire and Security AS and

Product names mentioned in this

Infrared Hydrocarbon Gas Detector

The AutroPoint HC300PL is ideal for use in harsh

Figure 1 — Measurement Scheme for Infrared

ALARM SETPOINT RANGE— SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST—

Alarm setpoint is programmable from AutroSafe

3/16” (4.8mm) BARB FITTING

Figure 2 — Dimensions of HC300PL Detector in

Figure 3 — PIRTB Dimensions in Inches (cm)

Final suitability of possible gas detector

CONNECTIONS EARTH GND LUG

+ – + – Figure 6 — Terminal Strip Located Inside Wiring

Calibration Signal JUNCTION BOX ENTRIES, PLUGS, & FITTINGS

CAUTION Cable shield, if used, should be properly

Box is highly recommended for optimum ease TO ACTIVATE CALIBRATION SWITCH

of installation and calibration. The PIRTB module

Figure 7 shows the location of the wiring terminals,

This practice is often less than precise, and

SIGNAL SIGNAL TYPICALLY

Figure 10—Remote Calibration Module Wired to AutroPoint HC300 PL

HART COMMUNICATION Refer to Appendix G in this manual for complete

HART COMMUNICATION PORT

PLACE CALIBRATION MAGNET

EARTH GND LUG

C2058 CALIBRATION NOZZLE

The weather baffle assembly is not field-

1. Install the HC300PL in such a manner

*CENELEC APPROVED APPLICATION ONLY, OR

Figure 11 — Remote Calibration Configuration Options

2. Zero Only Calibration is a one-step process

Digital Communication Calibration

TIME OUT CALIBRATION ABORT

C2059 HYDROPHOBIC FILTER

Figure 12 — AutroPoint HC300PL with Baffle Removed

Table 5 — Troubleshooting Guide

CPU supply voltage monitor Internal fault Replace detector

Interface Memory fault Internal fault Replace detector

Interface General fault Internal fault Replace detector

Open lamp (0x13) The IR lamp is broken Replace detector

HC300PL memory error (0x14) Internal fault Replace detector

HC300PL voltage supply fault Internal fault Replace detector

HC300PL ADC fault (0x17) Internal fault Reset detector.

Other calibration gases are available. Consult the

The following items, functions, and options describe the FM approval.

AutroPoint Termination Box Model PIRTB

Gas Baffle T50 T60 T90

Gas Baffle T50 T60 T90

Performance testing to EN60079-29-1:

Additional Safety Notes: